Home

GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming

1. Hole machining data Hole position data Hole machining method Wherein the basis meanings of hole position data and hole machining data are shown in the table 4 4 1 a Table 4 4 1 O lt 3 Specified Parameter j Explanation gt S content word gt m Hode ff Zz Q machining Refer to the table 4 4 3 note above mentioned restrictions method Hole 7 Specify the hole position by an absolute value or an incremental value the control is same as the GOO positioning Figure 4 4 2 shows that the incremental value specifies the distance to the bottom of a hole from point R or the absolute Hole value commands the coordinate value at the bottom of a hole machining Refer to the feedrate in the Fig 4 4 1 the feedrate is data specified by F in operation 3 in the operation 5 it is the rapid traverse rate or the feedrate by F code based upon different hole machining methods The figure 4 4 2 shows that the distance from initial point plane to point R is specified by incremental value or the coordinate value of the point R is specified by absolute value The feedrate in the operations 2 and 6 are performed at the rapid traverse rate refer to the Fig 4 4 1 Specify the cutting value for each time in G73 G83 or the translation value incremental value in G76 G87 63 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Specified Parameter Explanation content wo
2. 21 9 1N 181715 8 if G SPI Poly S JAS S S LJ wf Vid B _ jsf J Jafe I al i 7 Fc al at EE E Fl Eel Gel ea ct ld ozo zag OODE EZZ Gas ZZS O Orm oa Sa ILS foo tt i 0 1 aada TETE tel X D E 2 b E ie a 2 H 4 is Ppp Sapa aa papa sant t ll SINN TOA O U m 5 O Z Soft key function area Machine control area Fig 1 1 2 GSK218MC H panel 194 LCD display area Soft key function area Chapter One Operation Panel oy on On UO Un OU Ea gt oe F a Li oP Li It HBBE ent ie wa 6 eS HAAA A BN DESL ME BOG e iia Hga 0 200 E l 555 8 coc BHH HERE Baan NASO eee pT ior M a Tikt A oomi aoi a wor 5 prm 4 g ltal a r T aged eese one a D I Ph BIRO EO Cs BIBI a Be eee ae eT ey ny atta A Fig 1 1 3 GSK218MC V panel Edit keyboard area Machine control area 195 O a5 m on gt om o F m i an gt O T o Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual LCD display area Editing keyboard area Gr Eo E E M REAL ay wie ath i i E EF Omm min SAVE 0 000 err ee ae O 200 EMS Orpm U vi ow 8 See D mm J K C SER amp 10 3 p 120 TT 2 TI HY i 7 JJA amr OPOPH O fee fo pee i G11 G98 G
3. IWZ WZO MCV GOF WOF 1 Prohibit inputting the tool wear offset value by MDI keyboard gt a mi z gt x lt 331 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0 Input the tool wear offset value by MDI keyboard GOF 1 Prohibit inputting the tool geometry offset value by MDI keyboard 0 Input the geometry offset value by MDI keyboard MCV 1 Prohibit inputting the macro program varible by MDI keyboard 0 Input the macro program variable by MDI keyboard WZO 1 Prohibit inputting the workpiece origin offset value by MDI keyboard 0 Input the workpiece origin offset value by MDI keyboard i2 1 Prohibit inputting the workpiece origin offset value by MDI keyboard in the dwell 0 Input the workpiece origin offset value by MDI keyboard in the dwell Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0131 eas Gre fone eae eg G01 1 It is the G01 mode when the power is turned on or the state is cleared 0 It is the GOO mode when the power is turned on or the state is cleared 1 The plane selection is G18 mode when the power is turned on or the state G18 is Cleared 0 The plane selection is G17 mode when the power is turned on or the state is cleared G19 1 It is the G19 mode when G19 1 it is better set the G18 to 0 0 It is determined by bit 1 of parameter No 31 G17 method X Y plane
4. Q F014 Faa2 F003 F015 1 Q F 16 F F004 F 017 TI 5 Q 005 1 1 F018 FOG aa F019 F007 F020 Faas Faas F 21 O 5 F 22 F010 F023 F011 17 03 54 PATH 1 Rese coy owe Fig 3 6 1 1 1 A DATA This signal is delivered to PLC from system its meanings and setting methods of each diagnosis number are shown in the matched GSK 218MC CNC System PLC amp Installation Connection Manual VOLUME II OPERATION 2 G signal interface Enter the diagnosis PLC NC interface by G SIGNAL softky in the lt DIAGNOSIS gt interface Refer to the Fig 3 6 1 1 2 0680806 6 GO12 0 0 ies bs sie 0 1 Ton 1 4 00 010o O 0 i Q 1 4 i Q Q Q Q 6013 6014 6015 G 16 6017 6018 6019 GO20 G 21 G 2e G 23 0206608060 1 0 060060 060 1 020606860 0 8 020080 06 6 020080 0 0 020080 860 6 0206860 0 8 020080 60 6 02000 0 0 020080 80 6 101060280 6 Q G04 005 GOOG G001 G002 GOO3 G07 G08 G89 G010 6011 G 17 04 05 E e ee ee eee A DATA Fig 3 6 1 1 2 268 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting This signa
5. O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 2 Operation table interface Enter the help information Operation list page by OPERATION TABLE softkey in lt HELP gt interface refer to the Fig 3 9 2 MDI data Search NO POS interface Rel coord clear Rel coord mediating spindle Speed Set REL or ABS down keyt speed gt Enter PRT CNT clear REL or ABS interface down key gt Enter RUN TIME clear REL or ABS down key gt Enter MPG interrupt clear SYS interface MDI mode any mode rel coord interface REL interface ALL interface MDI mode input value gt Enter NO gt SER key xi Z gt cance X Z gt Enter X Z gt down key gt Cance l input value gt Enter OFFSET setting H compensation num gt X Z gt Enter Ln 0017 135 o PATH 1 ees Fig 3 9 2 In the help information Operation list interface the operation steps and methods in each interface are detailed The unfamiliar or unclear operations can be searched and compared in the help interface 3 Alarm table interface Enter the help information Alarm list page by ALARM TABLE softkey in lt HELP gt interface refer to the Fig 3 9 3 ll SAIN TOA O 2 L gt O Z NO MEANING 4608 Parameter been modified that must power off 6 1 File open fail 4602 Data input overflow 663 Program number exists
6. eeeeceeeeeserrrrrreserrrrrrrrseree 251 3 4 3 2 Introduction and Operation Explanation of Tool setting Function ccc eeeeeees 251 3 4 4 Backup Recovery and Transmission Of Data cccccccceeessessessseesesessseeeseeeseeseeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 260 3 4 5 Setting amp Modification of Password Authority ccccccessseeeessseeeeeeeesssesesessssssssssessssseessetseaaaas 264 Soe Foure DISDIAY aeree E tase daaeeoutuntecaaney es AT TE 265 S20 DIAGNOSIS DIS DIA sasaasacockencnsessesoacacscacndeeseodonssscansasneconontncoaneuenceodoatesaasonesesoacesa EAA TA 267 JOT Diagnosis Data DIS playse e a sada vanced caasbaes a aai 268 36 11 Signal Parameter DISPlay zeuria i A a Aa a a ariii 268 3 6 1 2 System Parameter DIS Play acessasoucecscassessecsnasnsncnvssestatondscasnoneandoutndasnatevieedontnsncadesvesnaondseaans 270 3 6 1 3 Bus Parameter DISplay cece ccccccessssssnccecccesssssseeeeccceessessaaeeeeceesssssaaeeeeecesssesaaaeeeeses 270 3 6 1 4 DSP Parameter Display 00 0 0 cccccccccsssscccccesssseecceessseeeccesssseeeceesssaceeeeessaeeecesssaeeeeeens 271 3 6 1 5 Fluctuation Parameter Display cc cccccccsccccccceessssseeeecceeeeessseeecceeeeensseeeeceeeeesstseeeeeees 271 Fo saan Cek Sna NE eana e a a A Bc eee 272 e f 1H 7081 BE 2 2 y a E ee pig 329 Program Control DISpiay seassa E A soe ca te S E 275 29 ReDD Pay e a a E E T N E A O 277 CHAPTER FOUR MANUAL OPERATION ssssccceccc
7. Fig 4 7 3 1 The meaning of symbols The following symbols are used in sebsequent figures S indicates a position at which a single block is executed once SS indicates a position at which a single block is executed twice SSS indicates a position at which a single block is executed thrice L indicates that the tool moves along a straight line C indicates that the tool moves along an arc r indicates the cutter compensation value An intersection is a position at which the programmed paths of two blocks intersect with each other after they are shifted by r O indicates the center of the tool 1 Tool movement in start up When the offset cancellation mode is changed to offset mode the tool moves as illustrated below Start up 126 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 Linear Linear Linear Arc Programming gt Programming A A A oS A L Tool center path path v Tool center path b Tool movement around the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle 180 gt a290 Tool path in the beginning of compensation has two types A and B which are selected by bit 0 of parameter No 40 Linear Linear Linear Arc Start position Start position YNININVYDOUd SINN TOA Programmed Programmed path ___ path Tool center path Programmed path Start position Linear Linear S
8. c P1 P50 Then press the lt INPUT gt button ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z B The setting of the workpiece origin 1 Setting range 9999 999 9999 999 2 Data input When the automatic tool length measurement does not start in any operation mode move the cursor to the coordinate system selection option set the current Z axis moachine coordinate value to the Z axis of the current selected workpiece coordinate system by directly pressing the MEASUREMENT software alternatively input the data based upon the following formats a Input format Z b Z data Set the current machine coordinate value along Z axis the input data to the Z axis of the current selected workpiece coordinate system by MEASUREMENT softkey accordingly 3 4 4 Backup Recovery and Transmission of Data Enter the setting Data treatement interface by H DATA The user data Ladder diagram ladder diagram parameter system parameter value tool compensation value pitch compensation 260 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting value system macro variable user macro program and CNC component program can perform both the backup save and recovery read and the data output and input operations by U disk or PC machine Simultaneously the data back and recovery are performed the component program memoried in the CNC will be regardless CNC DISK FILE NUM CUR DISK ELLE Ets O LADD
9. iii Arc gt Linear Programmed Programmed G41 path path Fig 4 7 3 6 V If the compensation is normally performed but there is no intersection When the offset direction blocks A and B are changed by G41 and G42 if there is no need any intersection of compensation path the start at the block B is vertical to the vector of the block B 1 Linear Linear S L Dy aie Block A wr Block B G42 x G41 Programmed path Tool center path Sa ge ee L Compensation vector Fig 4 7 3 7 132 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 2 Linear Arc Tool center G41 G42 path TOCKA Block B Programmed path x Ts vector N Fig 4 7 3 8 3 Arc Arc ee a aT P g Block A G42 G42 A Programmed The end point path is out of arc C7 Cneter Tool center path Center Fig 4 7 3 9 vi When the cutter compensation vi Generally the following decription will not occur when cutter compensation makes the tool center path length above one circle However the following conditions may be generated when G41 and G42 are charge Arc Arc Linear Arc The system will alarm when cutter compensation changes its direction the alarm prompts Arc code can not cancel the tool compensation when tool number is regarded as DO Linear Linear Tool compensation direction can be altered 133 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd
10. 2 DEC1 DEC2 DEC3 DEC4 DECS5 DECS5 DEC4 DEC3 DEC2 DEC1 1 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 1 and the 1 axis reference position returns 0 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 0 and the 1 axis reference position returns 1 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 1 and the 2 axis reference position returns 0 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 0 and the 2 axis reference position returns 1 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 1 and the 3 axis reference position returns 0 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 0 and the 3 axis reference position returns 1 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 1 and the 4 axis reference position returns 0 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 0 and the 4 axis reference position returns 1 ORS A EH RRE y A 1 I 1 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 1 and the 5 axis reference position returns 0 Deleration is performed when the deceleration signal is 0 and the 5 axis reference position returns Standard setting 0000 0000 347 gt mi z x lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual System parameter number 0 0 3 DIR5 DIR4 DIR3 DIR2 DIR1 D
11. 2 Shift to the Manual MPG or Single step interface the machine tool immediately stops after the operation is interrupted 3 Shift to the mechanical zero return interface the machine tool decelerates then stops 7 4 Automatic Operation from Any Block F 5 D c The system supports the automatic operation of any block from current machining program gt Refer to the following operation steps 9 MANUAL 1 Enter the Manual mode by start the spindle and other miscellaneous function 2 Operate each modal value of the program in the MDI mode it is necessary to guarantee the modal value is correct 2 PROGRAM 3 Enter the Edit operation mode by ad enter the program page display by and the find the desired program to be machined in LIST 4 Open the program move the cursor before the block to be operated 5 Enter the Auto operation mode by soll 6 Automatically operate the program by SES Note 1 Confirm the current coordinate point is the previous block operation end positon The current coordinate point need not to be confirmed if the operated block is absolute programming and the G00 G01 movement on its operation block 301 er JJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Note 2 For example if the this operated block is tool change movement firstly conform the current position will not impact with the workpiece etc to avoid the machine
12. G65 H82 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number For example G65 H82 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 102 turn to N1000 block when 101 102 program performs with sequentially 4 Conditional branch 3 J GT K gt 160 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G65 H83 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number For example G65 H83 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 gt 102 turn to N1000 block when 101 lt 102 program performs with sequentially 5 Conditional branch 4 J LT K lt G65 H84 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number For example G65 H84 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 lt 102 turn to N1000 block when 101 2 102 program performs with sequentially 6 Conditional branch 5 J GE K 2 G65 H85 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number For example G65 H85 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 2 102 turn to N1000 block when 101 lt 102 program performs with SINN 1OA sequentially i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 7 Conditional branch 6 J LE K lt G65 H86 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number For example G65 H86 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 lt 102 turn to N1000 block when 101 gt 102 program performs with sequentially Note The sequence number can be specified by variable For example G65 H81 P 100 Q 101 R 102 the program moves to the block specified by 100 sequence number when the condition is executed 4 Logic AND OR and NON codes For example G65 H01 P 101 Q3 G65 H01 P 102 Q5 G65 H1
13. Tool center path Tool center path Arc Linear Linear Linear Programmed path Intersection L fc enti er i Tool t th Tool center path a pa c Tool movement around the outside with an acute angle a lt 90 Tool path in the beginning of compensation has two types A and B which are selected by bit 0 of parameter No 40 130 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Linear Linear Arc Linear Programmed path a Tool center path Tool center path Linear Linear Linear Circular Fig 4 7 3 5 5 Alter the compensation direction in the compensation mode The compensation direction is determined by cutter compensation G code G41 and G42 the symbol of compensation value is shown below Table 4 7 3 1 Sign of compensation value n G code Left compensation Right compensation Right compensation Left compensation 131 ONINNV N9OHd EEO ou A O lt e Sc Zz sS m 5 e Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual In the special occasion the compensation direction can be changed in the compensation mode instead of altering at the beginning of stat and its subsequent blocks When the compensation direction changes there is no inner side and outer side It is supposed to positive for the following compensation value i Linear gt Linear ii Linear gt Arc Programmed path e I Tool center path
14. 9 Modal information 4000 4030 Read only 10 Position information 5001 5030 Read only 11 Workpiece zero offset value 5201 5235 Read write 12 Additional workpiece coordinate system 001 7250 Read write 3 The details of system variable 1 Modal information Table 4 9 2 2 Variable Function Group No No 4004 G94 G95 Group 04 4005 G54 G655 G56 G57 G58 G59 Group 05 4006 G20 G21 Group 06 4007 G40 G41 G42 Group 07 4008 G43 G644 G49 Group 08 150 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G22 G623 G624 G625 G26 4009 G32 G633 G634 G635 G636 G37 G38 Group 09 G7 3 G 4 G 6 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 G98 G99 G15 G16 4012 G50 G51 G68 G69 G61 G62 G63 G64 4015 G96 G97 To be extended Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 Group 14 Group 15 Group 16 4017 To be extended Group 17 4018 To be extended 4019 To be extended 4020 To be extended Group 18 Group 19 Group 20 ee moe po o o S oe o o o o s S aooo o ooo 4028 4029 4030 P The additional workpiece coordinate system selection at present Note 1 The P code is the selected additional workpiece coordinate system at present Note 2 When performing G 4002 the value gained from 4002 is 17 18 or 19 Note 3 Modal information can not be wrote which is read only 2 Current position information Table 4 9 2 3 Relevant Read Variable i Position Information Coordinate
15. Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting END 4 Press the key after altering cursor moves to the CANCEL END button the interface prompts Press lt INPUT gt button to confirm the cancel After controlling the INPUT wer the interface prompts Cancel completion simultaneously cursor returns to the password setting column The password will be automatically cancelled after the power is turned off till to the reatart is performed 3 5 Figure Display Enter the figure page by G There are two display interfaces FIGURE PARAMETER and HIFIGURE which can be displayed by its corresponding softkey Refer to the following figure Fig 3 5 1 AXES XY 1 XZ 2 ZK 3 YZ 4 XYZ 5 ZXY O lt GRPH MOD 0 GRPH CENTER 1 MINSMAX vo AUTO ERA 0 ON 1 OFF m SCALE S GRPH CEN X COORDINATE qs GRPH CEN Y COORDINATE m GRPH CEN Z COORDINATE azn MAX X MAX Yo MAX Z MINX MINY MINZ Se ee x Fig 3 5 1 1 Figure parameter interface Enter the figure interface by f FIGURE PARAMETER refer to the Fig 3 5 1 A The meaning of the figure parameter Coordinate selection Set the drawing plane there are 6 methods 0 5 for example the 2 line shows Figure mode Set the figure display mode Auto erasion When it is set to 1 the program figure is automatically erased at the next circular start performed till t
16. M code for M02 maching number adds 1 controlling the M98 Subprogram calling program M99 Sbuprogram ends and returns repeatedly perform MOO Program dwell M01 Program dwell selection PLC controls the M03 Spindle positive M code M04 Spindle reverse M05 Spindle stop M06 Tool change M08 Cooling ON M09 Cooling OFF M10 M11 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 Spindle neutral command SINN TOA J O Q D gt Z Q A axis releasing A axis clamping Tool control releasing Tool control clamping Spindle orientation cancellation Spindle orientation M21 Cutter search code in tool return M22 Cutter search code in capturing a new tool M26 Punching water valve ON M27 Punching water valve OFF M28 Cancel the rigid tapping M29 Rigid tapping command M35 Start the chip removal promotion conveyor M36 Close the chip removal promotion conveyor M44 Start the spindle blowing 171 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual M45 Close the spindle blowing Start the automation tool change M51 Close the automation tool change The movement code and the miscellaneous function are simultaneously performed when they are shared with a same block When the numerical value followed with the address M is specified the code signal and strobe signal are conveyed to the machine tool to switch on or off this functions using machine Usaully only one M code can be specified in one b
17. Spindle override 50 120 8 level real time adjustment in total which can be performed the wave band control Tapping cycle flexible tapping and rigid tapping e Pitch error compensation Compensation interval compensation origin can be set compensation value range 999 999 pulse equivalent e Reverse interval compensation The reverse interval value can be Automatic compensated by setting the fixed frequency or lifting method compensation e Cutter length compensation A or B type length compensation function can be selected by parameter e Cutter raidus compensation C cutter compensation function the Max compensation value is 999 999mm or 99 9999inch State signal eESP eOvertravel eStored stroke limit eNC ready signal eServo Reliability and bt ready signal eMST function completion signal eAuto operation start indicator safety signal eAuto operation signal during motion eFeed hold indicator signal Self diagnosis function eSignal eSystem ePosition control eServo eCommunication eSpindle Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual NC alarm eProgram eOperation eOvertravel eServo eConnection ePLC eMemory ROM and RAM eEdit eAuto eMDI eZero return eManual eSingle step eDNC eSingle block Operation eSkip eDry run eM S T lock eProgram restart eMPG interrupted eSingle step function interrupted eManual interference eMachine lock elnterlocking eFeed hold eCycle st
18. Workpiece coordinate system 3 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 4 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G58 Workpiece coordinate system offset Mechani cal zero Workpiece coordinate system 6 G59 lt Machine tool reference position Fig 4 2 8 1 The above mentioned Fig 4 2 8 1 shows that the machine tool returns to the mechanical zero manually after it is starting up which is established a machine tool coordinate system by mechanical zero and therefore the machine tool reference position occrs and the workpiece coordinate system confirms The corresponding value of the workpiece coordinate system offset data parameter P10 P13 is the integrated offset value for the 6 workpiece coordinate systems And the 6 coordinate systems are determined by the distance from the mechanical zero to the each coordinate system zer Z Y Y X Workpiece zero offset Machine X tool zero Fig 4 2 8 2 Example N10 G55 G90 GOO X100 Y20 N20 G56 X80 5 225 5 In the above mentioned example when the N10 block is executed rapidly position to the workpiece coordinate system G55 X 100 Y 20 When the N20 block is executed rapidly position to the workpiece system G56 and the absolute value is automatically changed into coordinate value X 80 5 Z 25 5 under the G56 40 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 2 9 Additional Workpiece Coordinate System Also there are 50 additional workpiece
19. gt D mi z gt x lt G18 method Z X sete G91 1 It sets to the G91 mode when the power is turned on or the state is cleared 0 It sets to the G90 mode when the power is turned on or the state is cleared G13 1 It sets to the G13 mode when the power is turned on or the state is cleared 0 It sets to the G12 mode when the power is turned on or the state is cleared Standard setting 0010 0000 System parameter number id eal ccc A a a S ADJ 1 Specify two or more same addresses in a same block the system then alarms 358 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0 Specify two or more same addresses in a same block the system does not alarms Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number 0313 MaB Baa Moz M02 1 Return to the start of the block when performing to the M02 0 Do not return to the start of the block when performing to the M02 M30 1 Return to the start of the block when performing to the M30 0 Return to the start of the block when performing to the M30 M3B 1 Up to 3 M codes can be specified in a program 0 Only one M code can be specified in a program Standard setting 1001 0000 System parameter number 013 4 CFH DWL DWL 1 In the feed rev mode G04 is the dwell of per revelution 0 In the feed rev mode G04 is not the dwell of per revelution CFH 1 Clear the F H and D codes when re
20. 0 5 0 5 mm 387 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch Rotation axis 0 5 0 5000 deg 0191 The reverse interval compensation value of the 2 0 0000 axis Setting range Metric 0 5 0 5 mm Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch Rotation axis 0 5 0 5 deg 0192 The reverse interval compensation value of the 3 0 0000 axis Setting range Metric 0 5 0 5 mm Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch Rotation axis 0 5 0 5 deg 0193 The reverse interval compensation value of the 4 0 0000 axis Setting range Metric 0 5 0 5 mm Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch gt U U m z gt lt Rotation axis 0 5 0 5 deg 0194 The reverse interval compensation value of the 5 0 0000 axis Setting range Metric 0 5 0 5 mm Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch Rotation axis 0 5 0 5 deg The compensation step length of the 1 axis interval based upon the fixed frequency compensation method Setting range 0 0 5 mm 388 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List The compensation step length of the 2 axis interval based upon the fixed frequency compensation method Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0197 The compensation step length of the 3 axis interval 0 0030 based upon the fixed frequency compensation method Setting range 0 0 5 mm The compensation step length of the 4 axis interval based upon the fixed frequency compe
21. 3 In the offset mode the tool arrived position is performed by G27 command which is gained for adding the offset value Therefore if the position adding to the offset value is not the reference position the signal does not conduct and the alarm occurs Usually it is necessary to cancel the tool offset before using the G27 code 4 The X Y or Z coordinate point position specified by G27 is the one below the machine tool coordinate system 4 4 Canned Cycle G Code Canned cycle is a machining operation can be performed based upon multiple block codes by a block with G function so that the program can be simplified and the programming becomes easy for the programmer This system is only owned the canned cycle of the G17 plane The general procedure of canned cycle A canned cycle consists of a sequence of 6 operations refer to the Fig 4 4 1 6l Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Operation 1 Be EA lt Initial point Operation 2 lt Operation 6 R Operation 3 gt lt Operation 5 Rapid traverse Operation 4 Cutting feed Fig 4 4 1 Operation 1 The positioning both the X axis and Y axis Another axis is considered IWwWNTOA Operation 2 Move to the point R at a rapid traverse rate y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Operation 3 Hole machining Operation 4 The operation at the bottom of hole Operatio
22. 3 The setting of the GSK Com serial port communication software 1 Select the available GSK218M The transmission data error may occur if other system types are selected 2 Click the Series port menu set the Baud rate in the Series Setting dialog frame and the Baud rate selects 115200 It is corresponding with the default value of the data parameter P002 when the data is transmitted the Baud rate selects 38400 It is corresponding with the default value of the data parameter P001 when DNC is on line machining 11 1 1 Program Start gt mi z gt x lt Directly operate the Comm218M exe program The interface is shown below after the program is started 331 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual lt 000055 Communicator File Edit Series Port Operation View Language Help iNew Open Save Paste Print Q About System GSK 218M v mp Lp fo Port COM1 GSN Dj DNC Communic ER Send File yt Receive File Pinet Port Baud 38400 00001 Tool Path Name G90G40G17G80G49G0G54 20000M3 X9 034Y 28 627 210 2 13 773 G12 18 773F1500 X8 7642 18 817F3000 X8 4922 18 87 6 2222 18 933 X7 9512 19 002 X7 383Y 28 6052 19 071 X6 48Y 28 5552 19 185 6 069Y 28 5272 19 238 X6 8772 18 929 X7 42 18 735 X7 9062 18 561 X8 1712 18 476 8 4372 18 395 X68 7042 18 324 X8 9732Z 18 261 9 2442 18 205 9 5182 18 162 9 7952 18 133 10 0732 18 123
23. 37 09 PATH _1 O ame mon es Fig 3 4 3 1 6 1 Destination dimension D The profile diemension to be measured The measurement of this axial will not perform when the parameter is null or 0 256 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting 2 Start angle A Measured plane calculates the angle from the X direction Data input A The condition of the data input When the Auto center measurement does not start the data can be input in any operation method B Input format 1 Data lt INPUT gt inputs the desired data 2 Directly control the lt INPUT gt button to enter the null value 3 When the current line is the rough center coordinate X rough center coordinate Y measurement point coordinate Z the following formats can be input 1 Directly input null value by lt INPUT gt 2 X Y Z lt INPUT gt input the current absolute coordinate value 3 X Y Z data lt INPUT gt input the current absolute coordinate value of the selected axis data 4 Directly press the MEASURE software to input the absolute coordinate value of current axis X Y Z MEASURE input the absolute coordinate value of current axis X Y Z data MEASUREMENT input the current absolute coordinate value of the selected axis data Operation steps Step 1 Set the center parameters of each item by turn Step 2 Shift to the Auto Mode Step 3 Start the automatic center program by lt START gt softkey
24. 4 7 3 4 4 The tool movement in offset cancellation mode Intersection Programmed Tool center g path path ST N Int ti L ntersec PEN Tool center path There is no intersection of the compensation value of circular arc when tool radius value is small refer to the left figure however when the tool radius is becomes bigger the intersection may be inexistent and the system displays the alarm Interference exists in the cutter compensation C In the compensation mode when any of the following items of the block is performed the system then enters the compensation cancellation mode and the movement of the block is called Compensation cancellation a Code G40 b Cutter compensation number is 0 Fail to use the arc code G03 and G02 to cancel when the compensation cancellation is performed if the commanded arc may alarm and tool may stop 129 INININVYDOYd SINN 1OA Or JJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual a Tool movement around the inside of a corner a2180 Linear Linear Arc Linear Programmed path Tool center path Programmed path Tool center path b Tool movement around the inside with a corner 90 lt a lt 180 Tool path in the beginning of compensation has two types A and B which are selected by bit 0 of parameter No 40 Linear Linear Arc Linear JNININNVYSDOdd SINN TOA Programmed path
25. 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 676 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 ll SAINN TOA O U m gt O Z ABSOLUTE X TAT am Y 47 897 mm 7 Z 5 480 mm t Y J n a x START T STOP PATH 1 G PARA SWITCH START STOP ERASE Fig 3 5 2 The machining path of the operated program can be monitored in the figure page J A Enter to the drawing state by START or in this case moves to S Before the drawing start K B Enter the stop drawing state by STOP or In this case moves to T Before the 266 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting drawing stop C The figure shifts in the corresponding figures 0 5 by pressing SHIFT every time DELETE D Clear the drawn figure by Clear or 3 6 Diagnosis Display The state of DI DO signal between the CNC and machine tool the signal state for transmitting between the CNC and PLC and the PLC internal data and CNC internal state are displayed on the diagnosis page The corresponding meanings and setting methods for each diagnosis number are shown the GSK 218MC CNC System PLC amp Installation Connection Manual This diagnosis uses for detecting the CNC interface signal and internal signal operation state which can not be modified DIAGNOSIS Enter the diagnosis display interface by there are 5 sub interface in this page HISIGNAL SYSTEM BUS DSP and HIFLUCTUATION which can
26. 561364 1 28 05 58 PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 20 32 33 COPY TO USB DISK New Name PATH 1 CNC USB COPY DEL RETURN Fig 11 2 2 2 d If the CNC program file does not need to be renamed it can be directly copied by lt INPUT gt button If the CNC program file should be renamed input the new program number For example O10 0100 by lt CANCEL gt and the CNC program file then can be copied by lt INPUT gt again If the U disk stores at the program file with a same name the system may prompt RENAME AGAIN therefore it is necessary to input the new program numbers for example 010 0100 and then the CNC program file can be copied by lt INPUT gt button 2 Copy the CNC program file to system disk from U disk a Shift to the display interface of the U disk file list by U DISK softkey gt b Shift the cursor to the file list table by direction button gt c Move the cursor by or select the CNC program file in U disk to be copied The system prompts Copy to system disk New file name by COPY softkey refer to the gt E v m z gt lt following figure Fig 11 2 2 3 340 CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM 7 FILE LIST LADDER PLC 92 46 61 26 07 03 OPARA PLC 488 B 01 01 04 42 AA 549 1 1 64 46 PARAMETER 5 298 61 26 05 58 2599 1 28 05 58 561364 1 28 05 58 O CUTTER COMP OPITCH COMP OMACRO YAR OMACRO PRG PA
27. A 15 60 40 10 30 20 Fig 2 4 4 1 Chapter Two Programming Basis G90 G54X10 Y30 220 Move the tool from point A to point B using the point B coordinate in G54 workpiece coordinate system The instruction is as follows 2 Incremental coordinate value It is the target position coordinate relative to the current position with the current position set as the origin Cutter SINN TOA y J O Q D gt Z Q Fig 2 4 4 2 Tool rapidly moves to the point B from A its code as follows GO G91 X40 Y 30 Z 10 2 5 Modal and One shot Modal that of the value of one address will keep enabling as soon as setting until this address is reset again The another meaning of the modal is that this field may not input if the same function is used in the following block after one function word is set gt For example GO X100 Y100 Rapid positioning to X100 Y100 X20 Y30 Rapid positioning to X20 Y30 GO is modal which can be ignored G1 X50 Y50 F300 Linear interpolation to X50 Y50 feedrate 300mm min GO G1 X100 Linear interpolation to X100 Y50 feedrate 300mm min G1 Y50 and F300 are the modal which can be ignored GO X0 YO Rapid positioning to XO YO The initialized state is the default one after the system is turned on Refer to the table 4 1 2 gt For example 000001 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual X100 Y100 Rapd positioning to X
28. DATA Nd PATH 1 RIGIDITY CIRCUL RETURN Fig 3 3 5 3 2 Roundness measure interface Note The coordinate axis display on the servo debugging interface is determined by the system control axis numbers and the least number in the bus servo slave station 3 3 5 3 2 Function Introduction 1 Rigid grade and parameter optimization operation function This function is for setting the servo parameter to the optimization state of the servo performance 2 Round testing The round testing can be judged the response synchronism of each servo axis for the machine tool by collecting the motor encoder position information based upon imitating the round of the circle cutting movement 3 3 5 3 3 Operation Explanation 1 Rigid grade debugging operation Explanation the debugging and setting of rigid grad only one axis can be operated once Operation buttons A and buttons Selection axis Note The up down direction buttons 241 F m r en AE om o ll SAIN TOA O 2 L gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual can not be changed the axis in the current operation once entering the optimization schedule B and buttons Reduce or increase the rigid grade of the current axis the rigid level reduces or increases one level by every one push C AXIS SHIFTING and AXIS SHIFTING softkeys Move the current axis for a distance positiv
29. DNC 38400 Setting range 0 115200 Unit BPS 0002 Communication channel Baud Rate Transmission 115200 file Setting range 0 115200 Unit BPS 0004 System interporlation period 1 2 4 and 8ms Setting range 1 8 0005 CNC controllable axis number Setting range 3 5 0006 System language selection Setting range 0 3 0 Chinese 1 English 2 Russian 3 Spanish gt D mi z gt x lt 0008 The dimension of the slave state MDT data package 12 of the Ethernet bus Setting range 0 20 0009 The Max retransmission times of the Ethernet bus Setting range 0 30 0010 The 1 axis offset value of the external workpiece 0 0000 origin Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 368 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0011 The 2 axis offset value of the external workpiece 0 0000 origin Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0012 The 3 axis offset value of the external workpiece 0 0000 origin Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0013 The 4 axis offset value of the external workpiece 0 0000 origin Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0014 The 5 axis offset value of the external workpiece 0 0000 origin Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0015 The 1 axis workpiece origin offset value of G54 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0016 The 2 axis workpiece origin offset value of G54 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 00
30. ERROR SP EX CARD AXIS SET ZERO Ne LIMIT Po LIMIT GRATING 3 serring NOTE NO 1 YES 14 27 29 DATA Td PATH 1 SOFFSET PARA MACRO PITCH BUS CONF Fig 3 3 5 1 HIBUS CONFIGURATION Interface operation explanations After entering the bus configuration interface by the EBUS CONFIGURATION softkey as the Fig 3 3 5 1 the parameters displayed in this page can be viewed as well the relevant parameters can be altered The concrete operation methods and steps are shown below 1 Ente lt MDI gt operation mode 2 Move the cursor by the up down left right direction buttons to the item to be modified 3 Modification is performed based upon the following explanations 1 Whether it is bus 0 Drive transmission method is pulse 232 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting 1 Drive transmission method is bus Note It can also be set as bus method by the bit 0 of parameter No 0 2 Encoder type 0 Increment 1 Absolute Note Set whether use an absolute encoder by the bit 6 of parameter No 20 3 Select the Max allowable error Note System defaults 50 000mm also it can be set by data parameter P445 4 Axis extensive card 0 Without extensive card 1 With extensive card Note Set whether use a bus servo card by the bit 6 of parameter No 0 5 Grating type 0 Increment 1 Absolute Note Set whether use an absolute grating by the bit 0 of parameter No 1 6 Spin
31. It does not immediately specify it followed with G28 Intermediate point G29 Fig 4 7 3 13 7 Cutter compensation G code in compensation mode When specifying the cutter compensation G codes G41 G42 in the compensation mode it becomes a rectangular vector with the previous block related to the movement direction and it regardless of the machining inner side and outer side However if this G codes are specified in arc SINN 1OA code the correct arc can not be gained accordingly i ry O Q 70 gt Z Q When the cutter compenatin G codes G41 642 are changed the compensation direction refer to the 5 Linear Linear Programmed G42 mode path a NS i G42 command hb D block includin Tool center pat _ J Fig 4 7 3 14 Arc Linear 135 Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual e block including r G42 command s L pai Tdol center path Fig 4 7 3 15 AS 8 A block without tool movement z There is no tool movement in the following blocks In the blocks it will not move even if the cutter gt S compensation mode is enabled z m MOSG sreo M code output 2O21 S eti S code output 3 G04 X10 nee Dwell 4 G17 Z100 ee Without movement code inside the compensation plane 9 GOO i arnoa G code only 6 G01 G91 X0 eee Movement value is
32. M29 5200 G99 G84 X100 Y 100 Z 80 R 70 P300 F500 150 Y 200 X200 Y 150 G98 Y 200 G8 M99 DATA 20 40 47 PATH 1 E e oojo om Fig 10 1 1 2 1 3 Input the number buttons o o o o and the establishment of the O00002 program name in turn by the address button display the O00002 followed with the data column refer to the following Fig 10 1 1 2 2 000001 G80 G90 GO XO YO ZO AO G1 A 50 F500 M29 5200 G99 G84 X100 Y 100 Z 80 R 70 P300 F500 Y 150 Y 200 x200 130 G98 Y 280 G80 M99 F m Jc A om o DATA 20 41 35 080803 PATH 1 O E orn arm om Fig 10 1 1 2 2 4 Establish a new program name by refer to the following Fig 10 1 1 2 3 319 ll SAIN TOA O 2 L gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 000003 A DATA 20 42 02 PATH 1 MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 10 1 1 2 3 5 Input the compiled program step by step simultaneously the program is automatically stored after the complete to shift other working methods if you want to shift other interfaces Such as SAVE the rn firstly press the to save and then complete the program input Note 1 In the Editing method the system is temporarily not supported the single number N
33. Program and the user macro code is also treated as Macro program call code User macro program body Main program Complete a group User macro of command of program command one function Fig 4 9 1 1 The variable can be used in user macro program body The calculation can be performed among variables and the variable also can be assigned by macro code 4 9 2 Macro Variable Both the common CNC command and the variable as well the calculation and code shifting can be used in user marco program User macro program ends by M99 from the beginning of program number OOO066 Program number G65 HO1 Calculation command G90 GOO X 101 CNC command used with variable Command shifting User macro program body end Fig 4 9 2 1 The composition of user macro program body 1 Usage of variable The parameter value in user macro program body can be specified by variable The variable 148 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code value can be assigned by main program or set by LCD MDI as well evaluate the value to be calculated when performing the user macro program body Multiple variables can be used which can be distinguished from variable number 1 The indication of variable The variable can be indicated by the consecutive variable number followed with the format shows below i i 1 2 3 4 For example 5 109 1005 2 The quotation of variable The numerical value followed
34. Refer to the Program Number Information on the Program List Display Interface in Section 10 2 1 for the concrete storage capacity 10 2 4 Check of Program List Up to 6 CNC program names can be displayed at the program list display page once if it is more than 6 the display can not be performed within a page in this case you can use the page button to ll SAINN TOA O z a 5 O Z display it In succession the LCD will display the CNC program name at the next page LCD will repeatedly show the overall CNC program names if you control the page button again and again 10 2 5 Locking of Program This system sets a program switch to avoid that the user program is being modified or deleted by others After the program is edited the program can be locked by closing its switch and the user can not perform the program compilation any more refer to the Section 3 4 1 for details 330 CHAPTER ELEVEN SYSTEM COMMUNICATION The system can be communicated with the PC terminal or U disk by its interface to carry out the data transmission or DNC on line machining 11 1 Serial Port Communication Serial port communication preparation work 1 The computer port COM port is connected with the RS232 of the system by serial cable 2 Open the PC terminal GSK Com serial port communication software Note GSK Com serial port communication software is Windows interface which is suitable for the Win98 WinMe WinXP and Win2000
35. Setting range 0 9999 r min 0257 Spindle upper limit speed in tapping cycle 2000 Setting range 0 5000 r min 0258 Spindle upper limit speed 6000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0261 Spindle encoder linear number 1024 Setting range 0 9999 0262 Spindle override lower limit value 0 5000 Setting range 0 5 1 gt a mi z x lt 0266 The limit value is ignored moving along the external side of the corner in the cutter compensation C Setting range 0 9999 9999 0267 The top value of the cutter wear compensation value 400 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0268 The Max error value of the cutter compensation C 0 0010 Setting range 0 0001 0 0100 393 er Jd Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0269 The cutter radius coefficient with helix in groove 1 5000 cycle Setting range 0 0100 3 0000 0270 The clearance of G73 in high speed peck cycle 2 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0271 The clearance value of G83 in canned cycle 2 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0281 The least dwell time at the bottom of a hole Setting range O 1000 ms 0282 The top dwell time at the bottom of a hole 9999 Setting range 1000 9999 ms 0283 The override value in the rigid tapping tool retraction 100 Setting range 0 100 Note When the override value of the bit 4 of parameter N 44 1 is enabled When the bit of parameter No 45 equals to 1 t
36. The absolute position display considers the tool length compensation 0 The absolute position display does not consider the tool length compensation Standard setting 0000 000 gt a mi z x lt System parameter number 0 2 3 POSM POSM 1 Program monitoring page displays the modal 0 Program monitoring page does not display the modal Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number i Cia a a S E NPA 1 Shift to the alarm screen when alarm issues 0 Do not shift to the alarm screen when alarm issues Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 355 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 01215 ALM BON FORAT SET eve TRR 1 In the position interface shift the screen by pressing the Position button POS again 0 In the position interface do not shift the screen by pressing the Position button again BRG 1 In the position interface shift the screen by pressing the Program button again 0 In the position interface do not shift the screen by pressing the Program button again ave 1 In the position interface shift the screen by pressing the System button again 0 In the position interface do not shift the screen by pressing the System button again s t 1 In the position interface shift the
37. The program number of user macro program can be specified by address P followed with G65 L specifies the call times of macro program and the argument passes the data to macro program Specify the repeated times from 1 to 9999 after address L when a number of repititions are required 1 is assumed when L is omitted By using argument specification values are assigned to corresponding local variables Note 1 When the subprogram number specified by address P can not be indexed an alarm PS 078 occurs Note 2 The subprograms from No 90000 9999 is the reserved program by system when user calls this subprogram the system can execute the conent of the subprogram however the cursor may always stop at the G65 code section and the main program content will always show on the program interface The content of subprogram can be displayed by modifying the bit 4 of parameter No 27 Note 3 Never attempt to call the macro program in DNC mode Note 4 Up to 5 layer can be nested for the macro program calling 4 9 4 User Macro Program Function A 1 Common form G65 Hm P i Q j R k m 01 99 means the function of operation code or the shifting code i The variable name for registering the operation result j The variable name 1 for operating It also can be regarded as constant and the constant can be expressed directly regardless of the k The variable name 2 for operating It also can be treated as constant Meaning i j o
38. The tool path compensation is automatically performed after the compensation starts and when the workpiece shape is compiled such as P1 gt P2 P9 P10 P11 The program example of tool path compensation G92 X0 YO Z0 N1 G90 G17 GO G41 D7 X250 Y550 The compensation value should be set by its compensation number in advance 2 N2 G1 Y900 F150 3 N3 X450 4 N4 G3 X500 Y1150 R650 5 N5 G2 X900 R 250 6 N6 G3 X950 Y900 R650 7 N7 G1 X1150 8 N8 Y550 9 N9 X700 Y650 10 N10 X250 Y550 11 N11 GO G40 XO YO bA 250 C1 700 1300 P5 900 1150 650R H 650R 3 P4 500 1150 rc i 6 C2 1150 1550 Os O Sas P6 950 900 REEE RG P2 250 900 P3 450 900 P7 1150 900 Q lo P9 700 650 1150 550 l 250 550 eai ar ees 2 i ae gt VARTER A Y axis 40 A X axis O Start Program origin Fig 4 7 2 9 125 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 4 7 3 Details of Cutter Compensation Concept Inner side and outer side When an angle of intersection created by tool paths specified with move command for two blocks in over 180 it is referred to as inner side When the angle is between 0 and 180 it is referred to as outer side Workpiece Programmed path Workpiece a2180 180 2a20 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q
39. When the angle is specified When the angle is specified by absolute value by incremental value Fig 4 2 13 1 2 In the G91 increment method the current point is treated as the polar coordinate origin when specifying by G16 For example Bolt hole circle The zero of the workpiece coordinate system is set as the origin of polar coordinate select the X Y plane The zero of the workpiece coordinate system is regarded as the origin of the coordinate system Select the XY plane Fig 4 2 13 2 Specify an angle and a radius with absolute value G17 G90 G16 Specifying the polar coordinate code and selecting the XY plane setting the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system as the origin of the polar coordinate system G81 X100 Y30 Z 20 R 5 F200 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 30 Y150 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 150 45 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Y270 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 270 G15 G80 Canceling the polar coordinate code Specifying angles with incremental value and a polar radius with absolute value G17 G90 G16 Specifying the polar coordinate code and selecting XY plane setting the zero of the workpiece coordinate system as the origin of the polar coordinate system G81 X100 Y30 Z 20 R 5 F200 Specifying a distance of 100
40. Y 13 5 Z zero return indicator P 1 7 PATH Fig 3 9 11 The address symbol and meaning of the PLC are detailed in the PLC address interface the unfamiliar or unclear PLC addresses can be searched and compared in this page 8 Counter interface Enter the counter information page by COUNTER softkey in lt HELP gt S 5 interface refer to the Fig 3 9 12 m Vc T e s a sin cos sqrt DATAT oo d aawa PATH 1 Fig 3 9 12 In this page the system provides the operation formats in this interface such as the addition subtraction multiplication devision sine cosine and extraction move the cursor positioning to the space to be intput the data and then input the data then confirm it by the system may 9 automatically calculate the result after the desired data are input to the space followed the 282 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting Pressing the can be input the data again to calculate the overall data in this interface are then cleared ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z 283 er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual ll SAIN IOA O U m gt O Z 284 Chapter Four Manual Operation CHAPTER FOUR MANUAL OPERATION Enter the manual operation mode by MAWAL which contains of the manual feed spindle control and machine panel control et
41. along the 1 axis setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0336 The unidirection orientation and overtravel value along the 2 axis setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0337 The unidirection orientation and overtravel value along the 3 axis setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0338 The unidirection orientation and overtravel value along the 4 axis setting range 99 9999 99 9999 gt U v m z gt lt 0339 The unidirection orientation and overtravel value along the 5 axis setting range 99 9999 99 9999 398 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0341 The buffering area dimension of ARM interpolation 36 point Setting range 0 99999 0342 The low speed of the 1 axis zero return 200 Setting range O0 1000 0343 The low speed of the 2 axis zero return 200 Setting range O0 1000 0344 The low speed of the 3 axis zero return 200 Setting range O0 1000 0345 The low speed of the 4 axis zero return Setting range O0 1000 0346 The low speed of the 5 axis zero return Setting range O0 1000 0347 The absolute position of the 1 axis reference 65000 position when using the absolute rotation encoder Setting range 0 131071 0348 The absolute position of the 2 axis reference 65000 position when using the absolute rotation encoder Setting range 0 131071 0349 The absolute position of the 3 axis reference 65000 position when using the absolute rotation encoder Setting range
42. ie E N106 Z230 N108Z2 3 ONINNVYDONd I INNTOA ee N128X75 472Y 48 356Z 031 number NLS X75 496Y 48 174Z 3q Block end code N132Y 48 011 IN134X75 472Y 47 876Z 31 Block N136X75 425Y 47 776Z 028 N138X75 354Y 47 719Z 923 N140X75 26Y 47 712Z 017 N142X75 142Y 47 764Z 009 N144M30 Program end Input 08 06 12 Path Fig 3 1 1 Program structure The code series collection for controlling CNC machine tool to perform the component machining is regarded as program After the written program is input to the CNC system the system can be moved the tool along with the straight line arc or performed the rotation and stop to the spindle based upon the codes In program these codes will be compiled according to the actual movement sequence of the machine tool The program structure is as Fig 3 1 1 13 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 1 1 Program Name The system memory can be registered several programs At the beginning of the program in order to distinguish from these programs the address O and its following 5 digit is treated as program name refer to the Fig 3 1 1 1 O UUL Program No 0 99999 the leading zero can be omitted when it is input Address O Fig 3 1 1 1 The composition of program name 3 1 2 Sequency Number and B
43. k ___________ Operation symbol it is specified by Hm For example P 100 Q 101 R 102 100 101 o 102 P 100 Q 101 R15_ 100 101 o 15 P 100 Q 100 R 102 100 100 o 102 The H code specified by G65 is without any effect for selecting the offset value 157 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual code H code Foncion Denion o oz Pus H0 04 i gt E z H2 2 onandoa FB trunc k x k ECEE Complex square root i J j k Hi xSIN n 2 3 i jxTAN o 34 i ATAN j k 80 _ Unconditional branch Turn to N 81 F j k GOTO N 8 F j k GOTO N 83 F j gt k GOTO N 84 F j lt k GOTON H85 F j gt k GOTO N 86 We conn lt k GOTON H99 3122 2 D DIDIDID D Jalal aaja L I I z U Cc oP g O Ql L OREA D D O oO m N g O O1 OO SAINN TOA G O On L G O On L N O y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q G O O1 L N N g O O Re i x O A NR H 5 G O O1 L OD g O O1 L OO G O O1 L g O O1 L G O On E g O O1 L N G O On L g O O1 ae O Ql PoE 02 KOX On O1 Fig 4 9 4 1 2 Operation code 1 The assignment of variable J G65 H01 P I Q J For example G65 H01 P 101 Q1005 101 1005 G65 H01 P 101 Q
44. l There are 4 interfaces such as the display setting workpiece Setting Enter the l coordinate data and password setting which can be converted page setting page by corresponding softkey 199 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Note The above mentioned each softkey conversion interface can also be carried out by using the consecutive corresponding function buttons based upon the setting of bit 0 7 of parameter No 25 and bit 6 7 of parameter No 26 Refer to the CHAPTER THREE of this manual for the details 1 2 4 GSK218MC Machine Tool Control Area D mo E PEN bral alo excl D gt ETI cor f ao wo MAND sre muwa mee f onc skip f smew f ony A x Y Z 4th DEF TOL SS X Y Z 4 losers x ey Gz 4th n OI g om a o e amp x 2 4 ewe cow stop cw SoveRADE soene s overrne o fomevanon iS Loox MACHBIE ici WW PAWS PW RAPID o C a A le fo tere O39 i390 gab aad oS CP J users y N WFO Mehi waj D gt 5 TMAG ZERO TMAG COW f IMAG ow f T INFEED temam uara T CHANGER eane COOUNG f peaa 0 0014 0 01 0 1 mmal ear OOA GSK218MC Machine control area Fit 1 2 4 1 Remark amp Operation NOILVHJdO ll SAIN TOA Selection button in Edit mode Selection button in Auto mode Selection button in MDI mode Selection button in mechanical zero mode
45. select the Accept the file in the Transmission mode draw down menu on the GSK Com series port communication software and then the Accept the file dialog frame is shown refer to the Fig 11 1 3 1 4 000055 Communicator gt File Edit Series Port Operation View Language Help U New Open fel Save Paste Print P About System esk 2184 v U GSN oS Communi c Ga Send File Wl Receive File 0 Sat Port ee eee 1 F pi sn beer a Baud 38400 x gt lt Fig 11 1 3 1 333 er Jd Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Get List 3 Click the Sei dis button in acceptance file dialog frame and then gain the file list at the CNC port refer to the Fig 11 1 3 2 Receive File File List Receive Cancel Fig 11 1 3 2 4 Select the desired file to be accepted Multiple files can be accepted and then press the Receive button the file begins to acceptance refer to the Fig 11 1 3 3 Receiving File Hame Save Path Receive Packs Error gt a a x Fig 11 1 3 3 5 After the file is performed the acceptance the dialog state bar shows Accepted Refer to the Fig 11 1 3 4 Keceive File File List Get List Cancel Delete Fig 11 1 3 4 334 B Data input PC CNC 1 System prompts Waiting for the transmitting by pressing the DATA INPUT softkey a Send File 2 C
46. several persons are shared with a same system So that the accident or abnormality may avoid due to the incorrect programming 4 2 13 Polar Coordinate Start Cancel G16 G15 Format G16 G15 Function G16 specifys the polar coordinate of positioning parameter which means the beginning of the method G15 specifys the polar coordinate of positioning parameter which means the cancellation of the method Explanation Without command parameter Set the G16 the coordinate value can be inputted by polar coordinate radius and angle The plus direction of the angle is CCW of the selected plane first axis direction and the minus directionis CW Both the radius and angle can be specified in either absolute or incremental command G90 G91 After the G16 occurs the 1 axis of the positioning parameter of the tool movement command 44 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code expresses the polar radius below the polar coordinate system the 2 axis means the polar angle below the polar coordinate system Set the G15 to cancel the polar coordinate method so that the coordinate value returns to use the rectangle coordinate input The specification of the polar coordinate origin 1 In the G90 absolute method the workpiece coordinate system zero is regarded as the polar coordinate origin when specifying by G16 Command Command Radius Radius position y A Actual Actual O lt position position Sc 1
47. 0 a The code at the beginning of compensation The system will generate start up operation at the next movement code if the start up block does not move G40 G91 N6 X100 Y100 N7 G41 XO N8 Y 100 N9 X100 Y 100 Fig 4 7 3 16 b In the compensation mode command When only one block without tool movement is specified in compensation mode the vector and the tool center path is same as that when the command does not specify Refer to the item 136 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 3 compensation mode In this case the block without tool movement is performed at the single block stop position N6 G91 X100 Y200 N7 G04 X100 N8 X100 performs here path Tool center path Fig 4 7 3 17 However when the movement value is zero tool motion becomes the same as that when two or more blocks of without tool movement are commanded even if only one block is specified N7 N8 N6 G91 X100 Y200 N6 N8 X100 Block N7 performs here Fig 4 7 3 18 Note The above mentioned block is operated based upon the G1 G42 the path is inconsistent with the figure in GO c It is specified with the compensation cancellation together When there is no tool movement of a block specified with the compensation cancellation together it may form the length compensation and its direction is vertical to the movement direction vector of the previous block and this vector will be cancelled at the ne
48. 0 Non 4 axis linkage system PD1 1 The 1 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is negative 0 The 1 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is positive PD2 1 The 2 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is negative 0 The 2 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is positive gt U v m z x lt PD3 1 The 3 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is negative 0 The 3 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is positive PD4 1 The 4 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is negative 0 The 4 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is positive PD5 1 The 5 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is negative 0 The 5 axis pulse direction of the Non bus servo is positive Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0 10 RCUR MSL RLC ZCL SCBM SCBM 1 Perform the stroke detection before moving 0 Do not perform the stroke detection before moving ZCL 1 Clear the relative coordinate of the reference point return 0 Do not clear the relative coordinate of the reference point return 350 RLC MSL RCUR Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 1 Cancel the relative coordinate after resetting 0 Do not cancel the relative coordinate after resetting 1 The start line is the one which cursor locates when circularly starting the multi block MDI 0 The start line is the first line of the program when circularly starting the multi blo
49. 0 0000 COMMAND T NO T8000 OFFSET H DAAA G 6 G17 G9 G94 Gel G4 G49 G54 PART CNT 0014 0014 G11 G98 G15 GSs G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 000 00 00 DATA 10 50 50 E PATH we Fig 6 1 1 1 9 AWWA W0 Ay 218MC U1 can be controlled by R OVERRIDE TUXI R OVERRIDE buttons and the modification and debugging methods are identical with the above mentioned 295 ll SAIN TOA O 2 L gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 6 1 2 Selection of Movement Axis and Direction In the MPG operation mode select a axis to be controlled by MPG press the corresponding button and then this axis can be moved by MPG In the MPG operation mode if you want to move the X axis by MPG press in this case the X axis can be moved by operating the MPG The feed direction is controlled by MPG rotation direction refer to the manual made by machine tool manufacturer Generally MPG CW is positive direction feed and the CCW is the negative feed 6 1 3 MPG Feed Explanations 1 The relationshisp between the MPG graduation and the Machine tool movement amount refer to the following table Table 6 1 3 1 re The movement amount of each garaduation on MPG Machine tool movement value mm 0 001 0 01 0 1 MPG increment inch 0 001 0 01 Machine tool movement value inch 0 0001 0 001 2 The numerical values from
50. 1 Rapid Positioning GOO Format G00 X Y Z_ Function The G00 code moves a tool to the position in the workpiece coordinate system specified with an absolute or an increment code at a rapid traverse rate Either of the following tool paths can be selected according to bit 1 of parameter No 12 Refer to the Fig 4 2 1 1 1 Linear interpolation positioning The tool path is identical with linear interpolation G01 The tool is positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed that is not more than the rapid traverse rate for each axis 2 Nonlinear interpolation positioning The tool is separately positioned at the rapid traverse rate for each axis The tool path generally is not a straight line Non linear interpolation position N Linear interpolation position Fig 4 2 1 1 26 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Explanations 1 After executing the GOO the modal of current tool movement method turns into GOO by system Whether the system default mode when the power is turned on is GOO The parameter value is 0 or G01 The parameter value is 1 by changing the value of bit 0 of parameter No 31 2 Fail to move the positioning parameter tool without specification The system is only changed the modal GOO of the current tool movement mode 3 Both GOO and GO are the equivalent format 4 The X Y Z and the 4 axis and GO speed are determined by parameter P88 P91 Restriction Rapid traverse rate
51. 10 2 After entering this interface in any mode move the cursor to the coordinate system axis to be changed directly input the machine tool coordinate value of the origin of the workpiece INPUT coordinate system and then confirm it by mev 3 After entering this interface in any mode move the cursor to the coordinate system axis to be changed directly input the machine tool coordinate value of the origin of the workpiece coordinate system and then confirm it by lt INPUT gt In addition press the softkey lt INPUT gt after the coordinate value is input the system may automatically calculate the ll SAIN TOA O 2 L gt O Z new coordinate value and then display it 3 The method of coordinate system search 1 In any mode press to position after the coordinate system is input For example input G50 SEARCH 2 In any mode for example input P6 or P06 press the the cursor will position at the additional workpiece coordinate system G54 P06 3 4 3 Center and Tool setting Function Enter the center and tool setting function by CENTER TOOL SETTING the content of this interface displays in the following figure Refer to the Fig 3 4 3 1 250 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE COORDINATE SEL 5 A mm 0 OOA mm O mm 808 gt N lt X lt O 0 000 A m
52. 100 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 6 1 Groove Rough Milling of Inner Circle G22 G23 Code format G22 G98 G99 Xx Y Z R LL W QV D_ F_ K_ G23 Function The multiple circular arc interpolation can be performed by helical method from the beginning of the center till the round groove is machined by the program dimension Explanations G22 Groove rough milling of inner circle along CCW G23 Groove rough milling of inner circle along CW X Y The start position of X Y plane Z Machining depth its an absolute position in G90 it is a position related to the R reference surface in G91 R R reference surface position it is absolute position in G90 the start position related to this block in G91 I Incircle groove radius SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q L The width increment by cutting within XY plane W Cutting depth along with the Z axis at the 1 time it is downward from R reference surface which should be more than 0 If the cutting depth is more than the position at the bottom of the groove then it is machined directly based upon the groove position Q Cutting depth of each cutting feed V The distance from the unprocessed surface during cutting at the rapid traverse rate D Tool compensation number take out the corresponding tool compensation value based upon the provided series number K_ Repeated times Cycle processes 1 Rapid positioning to the specified point X Y off
53. 3 ina DO END cycle can be used as many times as desired Note when a program includes the overlapping of the crossing repetition cycle DO ranges the alarm may issue 168 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 1 Numbers 1 to 3 can be used 3 DO cycle can be nested to a Max as many times as required depth of 3 levels WHILE D0 1 See ee rf WHILE DO 2 Program WHILE DO 3 END 1 Program WHILE DO 14 Program END 3 END 2 END 1 i END 1 4 Control can be transferred to the 2 The range of DO can not be crossed outside of a repetition WHILE DO 1 WHILE DO 1 sori IF GOTO n idee ta END 7 END1 Nn Program END 2 Explanations gt Infinite cycle When DO is specified instead of specifying the WHILE statement an infinite cycle ranging from DO to END is produced gt Processing time When the GOTO statement marked with a branch is treated and the sequence number index is performed For this reason the processing in the reverse direction takes a longer time than processing in the forward direction Using the WHILE statement for repetition reduces processing time gt Undefined variable In the condtional expression that uses EQ or NE a lt vacant gt and zero have different effects In 169
54. 604 Digit or character input without address Modify program 665 Address with no data but another address or EOB code Modify program 86 Character input wrongly for address or2 or more input Modify program gaa7 wrongly input for address 2 or more input Modify program S Program too large use DNC I Character can t be used Modify program 6618 G code wrongly used Modify program 0011 Feeding speed not specified or improper Modify program 612 Insufficient memory 613 Too many Files Ln 1 359 17 68 58 DATA RCC PATH 1 a D Fig 3 9 3 The meanings and troubleshootings in this interface are detailed 4 G code table interface Enter the help information G code list page by G CODE TABLE softkey in lt HELP gt interface refer to the Fig 3 9 4 278 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting GOA G01 G02 G83 G04 G10 G11 G12 G13 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G32 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G49 G50 G51 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 659 G60 G62 G61 G63 G64 G65 G68 G69 G73 G74 G76 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 G90 G91 G92 G94 G95 G96 G97 G98 G99 Linear interpolation G1 P sys INFO OPRT ALARM 6 CODE a gt Fig 3 9 4 The definition of each G code used by the system is introduced in G code interface select the G code to be check by cursor and the G
55. 7 2 2 Feed per Revolution G95 Code format G95 F_ Function Tool feed amount per revolution Unit mm r or inch r Explanations 1 The machine tool can be used this function unless installing the spindle encoder 184 Chapter Seven Feed Function F Code 2 The feed amount of per revolution is directly specified by the numerical values followed with F after specifying G95 feed rev is specified 3 G95 is modal code Once a G95 code is specified it is always enabled untill G94 is specified The default feedrate per revolution is zero in the initialization 4 The feed min can be debugged by override adjustment button or wave band switch buttons on the operation panel the override is from 0 to 240 F Spindle feed amount T per revolution mm rev or inch rev Fig 7 2 2 1 Feed per revolution Notice When the speed of the spindle is low feedrate fluctuation may occur The slower the spindle rotates the more frequently feedrate fluctuation occurs Note In the G95 feed per revolution mode the top speed per revolution treated by system is F500 if it exceeds F500 SINN IOA the alarm may issue y J O Q D gt Z Q 7 3 Tangential Speed Control Usually the cutting feed is the speed for controlling contour path tangential direction so that it can be reached to the speed value of a command Linear interpolation Circular arc interpolation Fig 7 3 1 F The speed along the tangent
56. 7 2 3 G code Function Cutter compensation cancellation Left compensation of tool radius Right compensation of tool radius 5 G53 G28 and G30 codes in cutter compensation method When specifying G53 G28 or G30 code in cutter compensation mode the offset vector of tool radius offset axis is cancelled Wherein it is cancelled when G53 moves to the specified position and when G28 G30 moves to the reference position when moving to the specified position the axie other than the tool radius offset axis does not cancel When G53 is shared a same block with the G41 G42 the radius compensation is cancelled when the overall axes are moved to the command position When G28 or G30 is shared a block with G41 G42 the overall axes are cancelled the radius compensation when moving to the reference position The vector cancelled cutter compensation will recover by the buffered next compensation plane block Note In the compensation mode the bit 2 of parameter No 42 can be selected that when G28 or G30 code moves at the intermediate point and then confirm whether the compensation will dwell temporarily Cutter compensation cancellation G40 In the GOO G01 state the following code is used G40 X_ Y The linear operation from the old vector of start to the end is performed In the GOO mode each axis moves to the end at the rapid traverse rate The system enters the tool compensation cancellation state from the tool compensation state
57. 9 4 3 1 Absolute encoder zero setting ywi sAWeBoN Pwl SAISOd Note 1 Never attempt to operate the mechanical zero return if your machine tool does not install the zero return deceleration switch or set the mechanical zero Note 2 The indicator of corresponding axis is turned on when the mechanical zero return is ended Note 3 The zero return indicator is turned off when the corresponding axis does not at the mechanical zero point Note 4 Refer to the machine tool User Manual made by the manufacturer for the mechanical zero reference point direction Note 5 Do not modify the zero return direction feed axis direction and gear ratio dimension along each axis after the mechnical Zero is set Note 6 Refer to the Section 4 8 for CHAPTER FOUR INSTALLATION amp CONNECTION in PLC amp INSTALLATON CONNECTION VOLUMN for the relevant parameter of mechanical zero return and all kinds of methods of mechanical zero return gs m Ve gt om a er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual ll SAIN IOA O U m gt O Z 316 Chapter Ten Edit Operation CHAPTER TEN EDIT OPERATION 10 1 Edit of Program The editing of the component program should be performed in the Edit operation mode Enter 4 PROGRAM enter the program interface by on the panel then enter the editing and modification interface after pressing the E PROGRAM softkey
58. 9999 mm 0043 The 4 axis workpiece origin offset value of G59 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0044 The 5 axis workpiece origin offset value of G59 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm gt E v m z gt lt 371 er Jd Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0045 The 1 axis coordinate value of the 1 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0046 The 2 axis coordinate value of the 1 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0047 The 3 axis coordinate value of the 1 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0048 The 4 axis coordinate value of the 1 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0049 The 5 axis coordinate value of the 1 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0050 The 1 axis coordinate value of the 2 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0051 The 2 axis coordinate value of the 2 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0052 The 3 axis coordinate value of the 3 referen
59. Code format G76X Y ZQ RP F K Function The fine boring cycle is available for a hole with fine boring When reaching to the bottom of the hole the spindle stops and the tool is moved away from the machined surface of the workpiece and retracted To prevent the tool retraction path during retreating from impacting the smoothness on the machining surface simultaneously to avoid the damage of the tool Explanations X_Y_ Hole position data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R Q_ Offset value at the bottom of a hoel SINN 1OA P_ Dwell time at the bottom of a hole i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Times of the fine boring G76 G98 G76 G99 Initial point Spindle plane 7 Spindle positive t positive JOH AH 5 Spindle exact Point R plane stop tool R Spindle exact stop 7 Rapid aver a0 traverse GO Translation value q Fig 4 4 6 1 The spindle stops on the canned revolving position when the tool reaches to the bottom of a hole and tool moves and retracts based upon the reverse direction of tool nose So that the machining surface will not be damage and
60. Coordinate system set at the reference point N002 G90 GOO Z250 T11 M6 Tool change NO03 G43 Z0 H11 Plane tool length compensation is performed 114 Chapter Four N004 S300 M3 NO05 G99 G81 X400 Y 350 Z 153 R 97 F120 NOO6 Y 550 NO07 G98 Y 750 NO008 G99 X1200 NOO9 Y 550 N0O10 G98 Y 350 NO11 GOO X0 YO M5 N012 G49 Z250 T15 M6 N013 G43 Z0 H15 N014 S200 M3 N015 G99 G82 X550 Y 450 Z 130 R 97 P30 F70 N016 G98 Y 650 N017 G99 X1050 N018 G98 Y 450 N019 GOO X0 YO M5 NO020 G49 Z250 T31 M6 N021 G43 Z0 H31 N022 S100 M3 N023 G85 G99 X800 Y 350 Z 153 R47 F50 N024 G91 Y 200 Y 200 Preparatory Function G Code at the initial point Spindle start Machine 1 hole after positioning Machine 2 hole after positioning then return to point R plane Machine 3 hole after positioning then return to point initial point plane Machine 4 hole after positioning then return to point R plane Machine 5 hole after positioning then return to point R plane Machine 6 hole after positioning then return to point initial point plane Return to reference position spindle then stops Cancel the tool length compensation then tool change performs Initial point plane tool length compensation Spindle start Machine 7 hole after positioning then return to point R plane Machine 8 hole after positioning then return to point initial point
61. G02 X_Y_R_ G03 X_Y_R_ 1 In this case the following two arcs can can be drawn one is the circle more than 180 the other is the one less than 180 The arc radius more than 180 is specified by negative value Example Fig 4 2 3 3 When the arc of is less than 180 G91 G02 X60 Y20 R50 F300 When the arc of is more than 180 G91 G02 X60 Y20 R 50 F300 Fig 4 2 3 3 2 If the arc that equals to 180 can be programmed by both the I J or K and the R Example G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 110 F100 Equal to G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 R10 F100 or G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 R 10 F100 Notice The or value of the180 arc R is regardless of the motion path of the arc 31 SINN TOA n J O Q D gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 If the arc that equals to the 360 is only can be programmed by I J or K Program example 90 120 140 200 Fig 4 2 3 4 The tool path programming of the Fig 4 2 3 4 is as follows 1 In absolute programming IWwWNTOA G90 GO X200 Y40 ZO G3 X140 Y100 R60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 R50 Or GO X200 Y40 Z0 G90 G3 X140 Y100 I 60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 I 50 y J O Q 7 gt Z Q 2 In incremental programming GO G90 X200 Y40 ZO G91 G3 X 60 Y60 R60 F3000 G2 X 20 Y 40 R50 Or GO G90 X200 Y40 ZO G91 G3 X 60 Y60 l 60 F300 G2 X 20 Y 40 l 50 Restrictions 1 When the address I J or K
62. G40 X_Y_ SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Function G41 specifies the left compensation of tool movement direction G42 specifies the right compensation of tool movement direction G40 Cutter compensation cancellation Explanations 1 Cutter compensation function The following figure shows that the tool with radius R cuts the workpiece A tool center path is shown as B in the figure the distance from path B to A is R The distance of tool offset workpiece A radius is called compensation N B Tool center path compensation A Programming path Vector Compensation and vector Fig 4 7 2 1 Porgrammer uses the cutter compensation mode to compile the machining program during machining measure the tool diameter and record the register of CNC and then the tool path 119 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual becomes the compensation path B 2 Compensation value D value The radius offset number is specified by D code which is the cooresponding offset value is added or deducted to the movement code value in program so that the new movement code forms The offset numbers can be specified DOO D255 based upon the requirements Whether the radius compensation value is set by diameter or radius by bit 7 of parameter No 40 The compensation value corresponding offset can be set the offset register in advance by using LCD MDI panel The setting
63. G68 G69 The machining workpiece consists of the figures by many same shapes which can be programmed by coordinate rotation function only the subprogram should be programmed for the figure unit and then call the subprogram by the rotation function Code format G17 G68X Y R Or G18 G68 X_Z_R_ Or G19 G68 Y_Z R_ G69 G17 G19 Plane selection X_ Y_ Z Absolute command for two of the X_ Y_ and Z_ axes that correspond to the current plane selected by a command G17 50 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G18 and G19 The command specifies the coordinates of the center of rotation for the values Specifying the axis commands Y Z U V W A B and C other than the X after the G04 command the system may alarm and it is necessary to add the absolute command explanation in the User Manual specify the rotation center followed with the G68 R_ Angle shifting positive value means CCW Y Fig 4 2 15 1 Function The programmed shape inside the plane is rotated based upon that the specified center is regarded as origin by the G68 G69 is used for cancelling the coordinate system rotation Explanations 1 G68 can be held 2 positioning parameters which are regarded as the optional parameters The positioning parameters are specified the center of the rotation operation If the rotation center does not specify the system is regarded the current tool position as the rotation center The positioning parameter
64. Generally this point in CNC milling system coincides with the machine zero while it is usually the tool change point for machining center Chapter Two Programming Basis Reference position Worktable Fig 2 4 2 1 There are two methods to move the tool to the reference point 1 Manual reference position return Refer to the Chapter Nine Zero Operation SINN TOA 2 Auto reference point return y J O Q D gt Z Q 2 4 3 Workpiece Coordinate System The coordinate system used for workpiece machining is called workpiece coordinate system or part coordinate system which is preset by CNC system set in workpiece coordinate system setting gt Command Coordinate system Machine tool Machining drawing CNC system Fig 2 4 3 1 In the coordinate system specified by CNC in order to cut the workpiece into the shape on the drawing according to the program of the programming coordinate system on the drawing the relationship between machine tool coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system must be determined The method to determine the relationship between these two coordinate systems is called alignment It can be done by different methods depending on part figure workpiece quantity etc SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual The reference point with component Il Install t
65. HEREDI JE e W GRAPH GSK218MC U1 Editing keyboard area DIAGNOSIS ELP gt In the editing keyboard area the function of buttons are divided into 10 areas again the concrete usages are shown below Series o me moon No 1 2 Address button 3 Number button na az a 5 Screen operation en i Resetting button Page button 7 Cursor movement button Editing button Searching button Editing button 198 Function Explanation System resets feed or output stops Enter the MDI addresses Enter the MDI numbers Input the numbers addresses or data to the buffering area to confirm the operation result Control any of the buttons enter to the corresponding interface display Refer to the CHAPTER THREE for details It is used for the page shifing and the page up down of program in the same display mode It is used for moving the cursor up down or left right It can be moved the cursor to the start or end of the program line and the program It is used for searching the data address to check or modify It is used for operations suchas the insertion modification or deletion of program or word field etc as well the usage of complex buttons when the program is compiled Chapter One Operation Panel 1 2 3 Introduction of Screen Operation Buttons There are 8 operation page display buttons and one help page display key are displayed on operation panel for this system refer to the following f
66. Incircle boundar bounda center path y path ry Fig 4 6 2 1 Notice It is suggested to change the bit 1 of parameter No 12 into 1 when using this code For example The fine milling is performed for the roughed circle groove by canned cycle G24 code refer to the following figure 104 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Point R plane position Z 5 Intircle boundary i Fig 4 6 2 2 ig 4 6 lt O G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning a G99 G24 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 I50 J10 D1 F800 Canned cycle start perform the incircle fine milling cycle at the bottom of the hole z 7 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Cancel the canned cycle return to the point R plane M30 Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G24 G25 command otherwise G24 G25 will be replaced by the G code of group 01 Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command positioning tool radius offset is ignored call the specified cutter compensation by program in the procedure of in feed 4 6 3 Excircle Fine milling Cycle G26 G32 Code format G26 G98 G99 x Y Z R J D_ F_ K G32 Function Tool performs a whole circle at the excircle with fine milling based upon the specified radius value and its direction and then return Explanations G26 Excircle fine milling cycle CCW G32 Excircle fine milling cycle CW X Y
67. Le on gt om o vooo viz 00000100 Y 1I5 10000202 Yoos 8208000129080 Yog o98002008 o Yoos 82080000080 Oo 8280000808020 Y 11 yos 82080000202 DATA 17 04 29 PATH 1 ___ Fetow s sum xc EE owe Fig 3 6 1 1 4 This signal is delivered to PLC from system its meanings and setting methods of each diagnosis number are shown in the matched GSK 218MC CNC System PLC amp Installation Connection Manual 269 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 6 1 2 System Parameter Display Enter the system signal diagnosis interface by SYSTEM softkey The content of this interface is shown below Refer to Fig 3 6 1 2 1 DATA _ _____ _ _ 20 39 51 PATH 1 Fig 3 6 1 2 1 3 6 1 3 Bus Parameter Display ll SINN IOA O U m 5 O Z Enter the bus signal diagnosis interface by BUS The content of this page is shown below Refer to the Fig 3 6 1 3 1 E E Paez 8 lassenocantsive ty ooa o ausma cara stare ey OOOO OO Faas o us spiere stave ay OOOO O OO Doo S waaa PATH 1 See ee ee ee Fig 3 6 1 3 1 DATA 270 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting 3 6 1 4 DSP Parameter Display Enter the bus signal diagnosis interface by DSP The content of this page is shown below Refer to the Fig 3 6 1 4 1 O DSP scan counter DSP th
68. MDI mode automatically skip th the CUR MOD interface selection 0 In the MDI mode automatically skip th the MDI interface selection 1 In the PLC interface shift the page by pressing the Program control button again 0 In the PLC interface do not shift the page by pressing the Program control button again 1 In the Help interface shift the screen by pressing the Help button again 0 In the Help interface do not shift the screen by pressing the Help button again Standard setting 1100 0001 System parameter number 0 2 7 NE8 NE9 CE TSEN ee E 1 Prohibit the sub program editing of the program numbers 80000 89999 0 Allow the sub program editing of the program numbers 80000 89999 1 Prohibit the sub program editing of the program numbers 90000 99999 0 Allow the sub program editing of the program numbers 90000 99999 Standard setting 0001 0001 System parameter number 0 2 8 MKP MCL icc A Hal a E 1 Clear the compiled program when performing the M02 M30 or in the MDI mode 1 Keep the compiled program when performing the M02 M30 or in the MDI mode 1 Delete the compiled program by resetting button in MDI mode 0 Retain the compiled program by resetting button in MDI mode Standard setting 0001 0000 System parameter number 0 2 9 WOF
69. Operation Indi i N Dry run switch ing giv wn is enabled Auto MDI DNC Indicator is ON when Miscellaneous MST function is ON M function switch S and T function Auto MDI DNC outputs are disabled Indicator is on when Machine lock Machine locking is ON switch the axis operation output is disabled indicator ON OFF nme seri ean OLS lubrication eae switch Coolant ON OFF Sienaan Onoke S OYA Spindle Spindle positive MPG mode single step t ho 1 control bution Spindle Se mode and manual mode Spindle speed adjustment The spindle speed Any mode analog value control method is enabled Manual mode single step mode and MPG mode Auto MDI Mechanical zero MPG Single step Manual and DNC Spindle JOG Spindle JOG state JOG aa ea ON OFF Spindle exact sto ao daa ON OFF P Manual mode single step ORIENTATION p mode and MPG mode Oe 00 00 WES MNS Tool magazine Tool magazine Sd Bd e r operation ON OFF Manual mode M anualM a n u a releasing releasing clamping Manual mode clamping switch switch 201 F m Ve gt O T 2 F m on gt om Or Ia GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Remarks and operation Program restart key machining state before a Keys Designation Explanation explanation a Manual tool change key wanualtool change MANUAL mode T CHANGER An alarm occurs
70. P 1 16 PATH 1 MDI p id BRB oe ce oe ee Fig 3 9 8 SYMBOL MEANING Gaaa e FIN MST End signal Ghbo 1 MFIN Miscellaneous function completion signal Gaaa 4 SFIN Spindle function completion signal GEG0 5 TFIN Tool function completion signal GH01 8 ESP Emergency stop GaG1 1 SKIPP Skip Gaa24a GR1 Gear input Gage 1 GRE Gear input Gage 2 GR Gear input Gage 4 GEAR Gear in position input GABS 1 RGTAP Rigid tapping GHG9 1 UINT Macroprogram interruption lt O Cc m 5010 0 MT1 Mirror image 5010 1 MT2 Mirror image O 9 m gt O Z P 1 18 SYMBOL MEANING x 20 0 MT EDIT x en 1 MT AUTO xOcb e MT INPUT xo2p s MT ZERO xo2p 4 MT SINGLE STEP xo2p 5 MT MANUAL x 20 6 MT HANDWHEEL XO20 7 MT DNC x 21 0 MT SKIP x 21 1 MT SINGLE BLOCK xo21 2 MT DRY RUN x 21 3 MT MST LOCK xo21 4 MT MACHINE LOCK 02145 MT OPTIONAL HALT P 1 6 Fig 3 9 10 281 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual SYMBOL MEANING Yal2e 8 EDIT indicator Y 12 1 AUTO indicator Y 12 2 INPUT indicator Y 12 3 ZERO indicator Yale 4 SINGLE STEP indicator Y 12 5 MANUAL indicator Y 12 6 HANDWHEEL indicator YO12 7 DNC indicator Y 13 0 Spindle reverse indicator Y 13 1 Spindle forward indicator Y 13 2 Spindle ovrd cancel indicator Y 13 3 x zero return indicator Y 13 4 Y zero return indicator
71. Press the sve enter the servo debugging interface by E BUS CONFIGURATION and then enter the parameter display screen by E SERVO PARAMETER ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z 5 Select the RECOVERY button the backup file DrvParXX txt of the current selected axis is recovered to the servo drive XX axis number For example the file name is DrvPar01 txt if the X axis is backup SAVE 7 Servo saves the updated parameter by and the state column displays Successful for drive parameter save 7 Close the parameter switch after the overall parameters setting are completed 3 3 5 1 5 Servo Level Zering The machine tool trembles due to the excessive big of the servo parameter rigid when debugging the parameter To avoid the hazard the servo parameter can be recovered into O level initial state parameter by the function of the servo level zeroing 1 Select the lt MDI gt operation mode SETTING 2 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by set the parameter switch to 1 236 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting SETTING 3 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by input the terminal user password or above SYSTEM 4 Press the sr enter the servo debugging interface by E BUS CONFIGURATION and then enter the parameter display screen by E SERVO PARAMETER 5 The overall servo axis parameters can be recovered into the parameter of the 0 level by the butto
72. Rea ena con 302 720 SINGIE Block OPS all ON ern AARE E N casas wteacsta cessor neues ARN 302 7A Machine LOCKING OPSrall ON seer aran aa ANA E AO RN 302 7 8 M S T Function Locking Operation ssseeessseeseesssesesssesressserressssrreesssreressssrressssreresssrrresssrrresssseree 303 7 9 Feed Rapid Trimming in Auto Operation ccc ccccccccccesssscecceesseecceeessseeceeeesseeeceeessseeeceeessseeeeeees 303 7 10 Spindle Speed Trimming in Auto Mode 2 0 ec cceccccccesssscceceeessseeceeeesseeeceeessseeeceeessseeeeeeessseeeeess 304 7 11 Background Editing in Auto Mode uu ic ccccccscccccccesssssseeeeeceeeeessseeeecceeeeesssseeeceeeeeessseeeeeeeeeentaaees 305 CHAPTER EIGHT NEIDLOPE RA DION cepcscicrccdecsinisiccecscccaccivctavtnncavecsnvcudescnccccsestutatesencceseesmnveccsene 307 Sek WABCO S INPUT arn a E N aeiasd eens 307 8 2 Operation and Stop of MDI Code BIOCK 0 000 ccccccesscccccccecesesssceececcesssesseeeeeceeseesssteeeeseeeeeens 308 8 3 Modification and Clear of Filed Value in MDI Code BIOCK 00 0 cceccccceesscceeeesseeeeeeessseeeeeens 308 8 4 Conversion of Each Operation Mode esisiini Ta E O A E A A 308 CHAPTER NINE ZERO RETURN OPERATION secccccsssscceccsssscccecocosssscccecosssssseeeocssssssceooso 311 9 1 Concept of Machine Tool Zero Mechanical Zero ccccccccccsssssccceeessseeceeeesseeeceeessseeeeeeessseeeeeess 311 9 2 Operation Steps for Pulse Servo Mechanical Zero Return c cc ccceeccecc
73. SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual other types of conditional expressions a lt vacant gt is regarded as zero gt Typical program The sample program below counts the total of numbers 1 to 10 00001 1 0 2 1 WHILE 2 LE 10 DO 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 END 1 M30 Precautions When a macro program is called by G65 and a variable is quoted by F the system performs based upon the variable value Do not use the cycle and skip command in DNC SINN TOA GOTO statement searches downward from the current block if it can not find the corresponding y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q sequence number and then research again back to the beginning of the program Do not use the identical N codes in a same program as much as possible When the decimal means the variable number the system will directly discard the decimal section instead of considering the carry bit The value of the local variable will always hold before the end of main program which is used together within each subprogram 170 Chapter Five Miscellance Function M Code CHAPTER FIVE MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M CODE The M codes for this machine tool can be used by user which shows below Table 5 1 Mae Program ends and turns to the beginning of the program maching number adds 1 Program ends and turns to the beginning of the program
74. Ten Edit Operation 10 1 3 Deletion of Overall Programs The overall programs in the memory should be deleted refer to the following steps a Select the lt EDIT gt operation mode b Enter the program display screen c Input the address d Input the address Rib 2 9 3 and a in turn DELETE e The overall programs in the memory are deleted by i 10 1 4 Program Copy The current program copies and saves as a new program name a Select the lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the program display page selet the desired program to be copied by cursor in LIST INPUT interface enter the program display interface by mar c Press address button o and then input a new program name d The file is copied by COPY software and then enter a new program editing interface F m r en AE om a e Acopied new program name can be viewed by returning to the LIST The copy of the program can also be performed at the program editing page Refer to the Fig 10 1 1 1 Press the address button GI and then input a new program number 2 The file is copied by COPY softkey and then enter the new program editing interface 3 A copied new program name can be viewed by returning to the LIST 10 1 5 Copy and Paste of Block The operation steps for the copy and paste of blocks are shown below a Cursor moves to the start of the block to be copied 323 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC Syst
75. The dwell time at the bottom of a hole or the dwell time at the point R F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Repeated times If required 90 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G74 G98 G74 G99 Initial point GA O plane Motion 1 gt O Motion 1 Motion 2 Motion 6 Motion 2 Point R plane Spindle peat Spindle stop negative stop Spindle Motion 3 Spindle l Spindle Spindle stop positive positive P Motion 4 Z PMotion 4 Z Fig 4 5 1 1 SINN TOA Z axis moves to point R at the rapid traverse and performs G74 along with X and Y axes after n J O Q D gt Z Q positioning and then spindle reverse The tapping is performed from point R to Z when the tapping is completed the spindle stops and performs the dwell then spindle rotates tool retreating from point R with reverse direction spindle then stops consequently spindle moves to the initial position at a rapid traverse rate The feedrate and spindle override are regarded as 100 when tapping is being performed Rigid method In the position mode bit 1 of parameter No 46 is set to 1 K parameter No 7 7 sets to 1 to perform M29 S before the tapping code can be specified the rigid method Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the too
76. X Y The start position on X Y plane Z Machining depth it is the absolute position inG90 it is the position related to the R reference surface in G91 R R reference surface position it is the absolute position in G90 it is the position related to 111 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual the start of this block in G91 l The width along with rectangular X axis direction J The width along with rectangular Y axis direction L The distance from the fine milling start to the rectangular edge positive direction along X axis U Corner arc radius there is no corner arc transition if it omits D Cutter compensation number take out the corresponding cutter compensation value based upon the provided series number K Repeated times Cycle processes 1 Positioning to the start position on XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Descend to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the arc interpolation from the start based upon that the transition arc 1 is regarded as the path SINN TOA 5 Perform the linear and arc interpolation based that the 2 3 4 5 6 are treated as path y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 7 Return to start to perform the arc interpolation based upon that the transition arc 7 is regarded as path 8 Return to initial point plane or point R plane based upon the different specifica
77. X_ or P_ X P Specify a time Function G04 executes a dwell delay performs based upon the specified time and then execute the next block In addition in the cutting method the exact stop detection is performed in the G64 which can be specified the dwell The feed method G95 per rotation specifies the dwell by the bit O of parameter No 34 Table 4 2 5 1 Command value range of dwell time Command by X The least movement unit Command value range Dwell time unit 0 001 9999 999 S or rev No 5 1 1 0 0001 9999 999 Table 4 2 5 2 Command value range of dwell time Command by P The least movement unit Command value range Dwell time unit 1 99999 999 0 001s or rev No 5 1 1 1 99999 999 0 0001s or rev 35 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Explanations 1 G04 is the one short modal code which is only enabled at the current line 2 X value is enabled when the X and P parameters are displayed together 3 When the X and P values are set as negative the alarm may occur 4 The system does not perform the dwell when X and P are not specified 5 The alarm may be generated if the axes commands Y Z U V W A B or C other the X are specified after the G04 4 2 6 Single Direction Positioning G60 Format G60 X_Y_Z_ Overrun value Fig 4 2 6 1 Function When the accuracy positioning should be performed for el
78. a movement axis however the actual machine s position is invariable Example The coordinate system origin of G54 corresponding with its machine coordinate is 10 10 10 The coordinate system origin of G55 corresponding with its machine coordinate is 30 30 30 The absolute coordinate of the end and the machine coordinate are shown below when performing the program based upon its sequence Table 4 2 8 1 Absolute coordinate Machine coordinate GO G54 X50 Y50 Z50 50 50 50 60 60 60 G55 X100 Y100 100 100 30 130 130 60 X120 Z80 120 100 80 150 130 110 5 G10 is available to change an external workpiece zero offset value or workpiece zero offset value Refer to the following methods With the code G10 L2 Pp XYZ P 0 External workpiece zero offset value Basis offset value P 1to6 The workpiece zero offset from workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 X Y Z Foran absolute value code G90 workpiece zero offset value of each axis For an incremental value code G91 value to be added The result of addition becomes the new workpiece Zero offset to the set workpiece zero offset for each axis 39 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual With the G10 command each workpiece coordinate system can be changed separately Workpiece coordinate system 1 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 2 G55
79. and R are simultaneously specified by program the arc specified by R is prior and the others are omitted 2 If the arc radius parameter does not specify from the start to the arc center the system will then alarm 3 If you want to interpolate a whoel circle only the parameter I J or K can be specified from the start to arc center instead of specifying the R 32 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 It is note the setting of the coordinate plane when the arc interpolation is performed 5 Tool is invariables if X Y and Z are omitted that is the start and end are shared with a same position and the R is specified For example GO2R50 B Helical interpolation Code format G02 G03 Circular arc on XY plane G02 _J_ G1 4 X Yo Z a G03 R_ Circular arc on ZX plane G02 I_K_ ete Ye Z F_ G03 R_ Circular arc on YZ plane G02 J K ete Xo We Z F_ G03 R_ Fig 4 2 3 5 Function The tool from the current point moves to the specified position with the helical path based upon the feedrate appointed by parameter F Explanation Tool path X The feedrate along with the 2 arc interpolation axis circle is the specified one Fig 4 2 3 6 The previous two digit of code parameters are positioning parameter The parameter words are the 2 axes numbers X Y or Z inside the current plane These two positioning parameter are specified a tool that should be moved to the position inside the cu
80. are performed by its corresponding softkey Note 1 The softkey functions both the data output and the data input are consistent when I O channel sets to 262 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting U disk 2 For the output input operation of the data guarantee the the correctly set of the I O channel The I O channel should be set to 0 when using U disk I O channel should be set to 0 or 1 when using the transmission software by PC machine 3 The content of one touch operation is determined by password authority refer to the Section 3 4 5 of OPERATION EXPLANATION for the corresponding relationships between the each data item and password authority 4 Relevant parameter 1 It is set by the bit 7 of parameter No 54 Whether the one touch input output 2 It is set by bit 0 of parameter No 27 Whether forbid the subprogram editing of program numbers 80000 89999 3 It is set by bit 4 of parameter No 27 Whether forbid the subprogram editing of program numbers 90000 99999 5 During the treatment of the data the system sets a relevant opration prompt its prompt content shows below Table 3 4 4 2 Table 3 4 4 2 Prompt Information Reason Troubleshooting One touch operation completion Successful operation Transmission completion The input output operation One touch operation completion of the macro program is system prompts The copy can be Skip the input output _ performed how
81. be used 0007 the or two or more signs were input Modify the program 0008 Program file excessive big It is better to transfer by DNC 0009 Illegal address input Modify the program a An unusable G code is used or a G code without this function is commanded Modify the program i Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was inadequate Modify the program 0 0012 Inadequate disc space Fail to create a new file or add file content 0 0 0015 The allowed simultaneously controlled axes are exceeded 0016 The current pitch error compensation exceeds its range Inadequate authority modification input the corresponding password to the password interface Do not modify the null and local variable G10 is only altered the parameter 0014 It can not specify the G95 without supporting from spindle 10 11 13 7 001 7 Fail to create a new program due to the program file numbers are reached to the upper limit for the user level Without scaling function if you want to use it it is better to open it by altering 0019 the bit parameter 60 5 0020 In circular interpolation G02 or G03 the distance between start and arc 0 40 O gt a mi z x lt gt D mi z x lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual center is different from the one between the end and arc center the D value e
82. better to specify it after the rotation function is cancelled otherwise the system alarm may issue 6 Perform the cutter compensation tool length compensation tool offset and other operations after the coordinate system rotates 7 Perform the coordinate rotation code in the scaling method G51 the coordinate value of the rotation center is also scaled instead of scaling the corner when the movement code issues firstly perform the scaling and then rotate the coordinate Example 1 Rotation G92 X 50 Y 50 G69 G17 G68 X 50Y 50 R60 G90 G01 X0 YO F200 G91 X100 G02 Y100 R100 G3 X 100 I 50 J 50 G01 Y 100 G69 M30 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Cutter path after rotating The original programming cutter path 50 50 Rotation center Fig 4 2 15 2 Example 2 Scaling with rotation G51 X300 Y150 P0 5 G68 X200 Y100 R45 32 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G01 G90 X400 Y100 G91 Y100 X 200 Y 100 X200 G69 G50 M30 Only when the coordinate system rotation function is performed When the scaling and coordinate rotation i function are enabled y lt 200 Only when the scaling 0O function is performed N T gt C aS lt Machined program d Z 100 Q n i i x 0 100 200 300 400 Fig 4 2 15 3 Example 3 Repeatedly use the G68 According to the program Main program G92 X0 YO Z20 G69 G17 M3 S1
83. controlled Manufacturer should take responsibility for the security of the CNC system and accessories Manufacturer should be take responsibility for the offered information and suggestions for the user Security responsibility of the user User should know and understand about the contents of security operation by learning and training the CNC system safety operations User should take responsibility for the security and danger because of increasing changing or modifying the original CNC system and accessories by themselves User should take responsibility for the danger without following the operations maintenance installations and storages described in the manual This manual is reserved by final user Sincere thanks for your support of GSK s product Chinese version of all technical documents in Chinese and English languages is regarded as final VII LIST VOLUME TD PROGRAMMING reai E eat tiee isle entrada 15 CHAPTER ONE SUMMARY sasaiadcoccesszasceceseessiesazasadeved E A 1 CE Product BNers oana A eb ans mands baasasnu adsense Neacanbasarsaveds l 1 2 Technology SPSCINCANOM asec sess cies coiacysissvistadcaceesssas N O E E EN NR 2 1 3 Product Type Defni Meraner n O ea ced ee es ea 4 14 Bus Function EXplanatl OM ssie A EO A OA eae awed 3 CHAPTER TWO PROGRAMMING BASIS eeessessssscceccccssssceccoocsssscecoocosssssecocoosssssccecoosssssecesosssse 7 Zl 7S OME AE I S E E A alate 7 ZZ ASN E
84. dectduuedunteleapevsestumncetennds 84 MAO Borno Cy Cle GSS he a a a a a a a a a 86 AAT Bonno C yele GBI hoer ae a EE E eee nen eeenre arr eee nee eeee 88 Ao ROT OYCE GC 0d E eaa e T E E A E iene 90 4 5 1 Left handed Rigid Tapping Cycle G74 ass icts csstnccecesinedes eisioeaslen salen ten ciatuamesssinedentavtaads dad ox segtaatessewedaaweeecs 90 4 5 2 Right handed Rigid Tapping GS a csaccescdeces chstiastesssincdescseinscneteaiseden cease iansaaes soi taactssp Sak onskevassusdeesassoiesens 93 45 3 Peck Tapping Chip remoyvyah Cycle ririri aiias Ee a EE AARE AEE ENEE EAEE 96 460 Compound Cycle G2 COde ici csceisn cass cisesrsestivascecusgeucdessdevecn2eisialancesvactueis vedanudtacdsieseles R 100 4 6 1 Groove Rough Milling of Inner Circle G22 G23 oo ccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 101 4 6 2 Fine milling Cycle of the Full Incirele G24 G 25 sacs sdcascvesstieeschseastvassessas ssstaseaeested ea capuasdusesecdacdeoes 103 4603 excitcle Fine milline Cycle G2 6 G2 occa voeads oe t2 E R tas essoreat estate a 105 4 6 4 Rectangular Groove Rough milling G33 G34 cc ccc ccc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeEEEE EH 107 4 6 5 Fine milling Cycle within Rectangular Groove G35 G36 ccccccccccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 109 4 6 6 Fine milling ccle Outside the Rectangle G37 G38 ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 111 46 7 Canned Cycle cancel G8 0
85. distance by exceeding the destination dimension If there is no programming the default value is 10 0 mm 0 394 inch B Hole amp external circle parameter MEASURE MODE Fo tee ee COORDINATE SEL 5 2 8247 mm mm TOOL OFFSET NO T oOo o an EMP Val OFT No E OO CENTER COOR Cx OoOo CENTER COOR Cy Oe OPERATER STEP AUTO MODE 31 7420 m g O 1 INPUT WORKPIECE PAREMETER MEAS PONT COOR Z m 2 SWITCH INTO AUTO MODE SURFACE TOL H 61 5870 mm AJ C 3 PRESS lt START gt THEN lt CYCLE START gt RADIAL CLE R 8 gt PROBE EXCEED Q 10 AAA va O mm O Mm WORKPIECE SIZE D 2 34 5667 mm 61 5870 mm J JUYY Manual 1 Automatic 8 0000 ne oATA Pid 887 PATH 1 serine m ZEEE sonra season Fig 3 4 3 1 3 1 Destination dimension D The Hole or diameter of the external circle to be measured This value can not be a null or 0 C Boss amp groove parameter 254 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE aes Gaeaiaee COORDINATE SEL 5 TOOL OFFSET NO T EMP Val OFT No E CENTER COOR Cx CENTER COOR Cy OPERATER STEP AUTO MODE 4 INPUT WORKPIECE PAREMETER MEAS PONT COOR Z 2 SWITCH INTO AUTO MODE SURFACE TOL H 3 PRESS lt START gt THEN lt CYCLE START gt RADIAL CLE R PROBE EXCEED Q Target Dim k 2 8247 mm Y mm 8080 mm 31 7420 mm 61 5878 m
86. does not support the canned cycles programs Note 8 The program restart function does not support the DNC on line machining program Note 9 The program restart function does not support macro programs Including Type A B 10 2 Program Administration 10 2 1 Index of Program List F m r en AE om a PROGRAM Press the buttin entering the program list display interface by controlling the LIST softkey in the program interface Refer to the Fig 10 2 1 1 Program quantity Memory information information oa Program list 9388 98 29 39 15 02 our aed el eT ro N Program coarae preview N azem i GIGIS eE a ae ae o anme ies e ae pATA fo 1808 28 PATH 1 AUTO Lf PRG MDI ounsmoo cnnot BO Fig 10 2 1 1 1 Open the program Open a specified program O series number input or EOB or series number input or 329 er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual EOB A new program will be established if the input series number is null in the editing mode 2 Delete the program 1 Editing method Delete the specified program by DEL 2 Edit mode O series number DEL or Series number DEL 10 2 2 Quatity of Storage Program Up to 400 can be stored at the system program the sotred quantity can be view the Section 10 2 1 for the Program Number Information on the Program List Display Interface 10 2 3 Storage Capacity
87. e WFO VL25 N50 f N00 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 manual rapid traverse rate by override Fo 25 50 and 100 Fo speed is set by data parameter P93 m weied me 218MC U1 can be modified by P overRIDe TUXI and R OVERRIDE buttons Note The rapid override selection can be available for the following traverse rate 1 G00 rapid feed 2 Rapid feed in canned cycle 3 The rapid feed in G28 4 Manual rapid feed and total 4 gears for the rapid For example When the rapid feedrate is 6 m min if the override is 50 the speed is then 3 m min 4 1 4 Manual Intervention In the Auto MDI and DNC modes the program is converted to the manual mode during operating after the feed holde is performed and then the manual intervention should be operated After moving each axis then convert at the previous operated method when this program is operated ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z by pi IW each axis rapidly returns to the origin manual intervention point based upon the GOO mode and then continue the operation program Detailed explanations 1 If single block operation is switched on during the return operation the tool will perform the single dwell at the manual intervention point 2 If the alarm or reset occurs in the manual intervention or return this function will be cancelled 3 When using the manual intervention it is important to carefully use the machine lock mirror and scal
88. even if the different length and diameter are used at the same program B The setting of the coordinate origin along the Z axis After the tool length measurement is completed move the tool to the workpiece surface in this case in this case the current machine coordinate value that is regarded as the origin sets to the selected workpiece coordinate G54 G59 G54 P1 P50 by pressing the lt MEASUREMENT gt softkey Tool measurement A Parameter option explanation 1 Measurement mode selection 1 Length 2 Diameter 3 Length amp Diameter calibration 4 Length calibration 2 Tool number T The current tool number to be measured 3 Tool length offset number H Store the offset number of the current tool length It s default is same with the T 4 Cutter diameter offset number D 258 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting Store the offset number of the current tool diameter It s default is same with the T 5 Cutter diameter S The diameter for the measured tool when S is value that means the tool is the right handed direction cutting when S is value that means the tool is the left handed direction cutting When the cutter radius offset No D in the register is already treated as the nominal tool diameter the value may not be input This parameter value is cleared after the tool No T is altered 6 Tool length estimated measurement L The tool length is being m
89. for retration Standard peck rigid tapping cycle In the position mode bit 1 of parameter No 46 is set to 1 K parameter No 7 7 sets to 1 specify M29 S as the peck rigid tapping cycle before the tapping code here use the standard peck tapping cycle method and its setting method is indentical with the flexible standard peck tapping one Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a Restrictions 98 same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G code Fail to specify the G code From G00 to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit 0 of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G74 G84 command the system then performs the G60 modal M code Use the miscellaneous function M code to rotat the spindle before specifying the G 74 G84 if the spindle rotation does not perform the system is then automatically rotated based upon the current spindle in R plane and then adjust to the CCW When the G74 G84 and an M codes are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first positioning operation The system then proceeds to the next drilling operatio
90. forbidden area is inside bit 0 of parameter No 11 0 212 Chapter Two System ON OFF amp Safety Operation N1 G12 X50 Y40 Z30 120 J10 K15 Set the tool forbidden area point A 5 40 30 B 20 10 15 N2 G01 X30 Y30 220 Linear interpolation to 30 30 20 N3 G13 Cancel the stored stroke detection fuction N4 G01 X50 Example 2 The forbidden area is outside bit 0 of parameter No 11 1 N1 G12 X50 Y40 Z30 I20 J10 K15 Set the tool forbidden area point A 50 40 30 B 20 10 15 N2 G01 X10 Y 10 Z 10 Linear interpolation to 10 10 10 N3 G13 Cancel the stored stroke detection fuction N4 G01 X50 3 The inspection point of forbidden area It is important to confirm the inspection point position the top of the tool nose or tool setting before programming the forbidden area Refer to the Fig 2 6 4 for example the inspection point A tool nose the distance a should be set as the data of the stored function inspection the point B tool setting the distance b should be set as the data of the stored function inspection When the inspection point is A tool nose and the tool length varies from different tools the forbidden area should be set based upon the longest tool to guarantee the safety operation a5 m r an gt o T o Tool position after reference point return the forbidden area of tool Fig 2 6 4 Set the forbidden area 4 The overlap of tool forbidd
91. general purpose time constant along each axis can be set by parameter 186 Chapter Seven Feed Function F Code Speed followed with the interpolation Speed after the acceleration deceleration control Speed y J O Q D gt Z Q Tc The acceleration deceleration time constant of cutting feed and manual feed Data parameter 125 128 T Time Cutting feed manual feed Fig 7 5 1 7 6 Acceleration Deceleration Treatment at Corner of Block For example if the previous block is only moved along Y and the next block is only moved along X the X line accelerates while the Y decelerates in this case the tool path is as follows 187 I IWwWNTOA SINN 1IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Y Insert a exact stop command 2 ra N gt Programmed path 1 The actual tool path X Fig 7 6 1 If the exact stop code is input the tool operates according to the program command as the solid line in the Fig 7 6 1 Otherwise the bigger the cutting speed is or the longer the acceleration deceleration time constant is the bigger the arc at the corner is In the circular arc command the arc radius of the actual tool path is smaller than the one provided by program If you want to shorten the error at the corner the acceleration deceleration time constant should be set smaller as much as possible
92. if n the hard limit is reached Press pe Overtravel this key with its indicator MANUAL mode MGP mode OVERTRAVEL release key lighting up to move the machine reversely till the indicator goes off For exiting the running program Auto mode the distance to go is 7 or restoring to the last the straight line distance from the current point to the break RESTART sudden power loss point J Optional stop ON OFF eae Mier ME Ope Ture Auto mode MDI mode DNC Op ke stopped after a block Roe Toe containing M01 is executed p 100 4 Feedrate override key Rapid traverse ON OFF Any mode WW AWW WA b Wy Rapid traverse key Rapid traverse ON OFF Manual mode RAPID WFO Aas 50 Aoo 0 007 0 01 0 7 1 Rapid Step and MPG override keys x GY 2 Fea x er 7 4th LJ X Y Z 4 Manual feeding key For selecting rapid override manual step override and MPG override For positive negative movement of X Y Z and 4th axes in MANUAL mode and Step mode and the axis moved in positive direction is selected by MPG Auto mode MDI mode Machine zero return MPG mode Step mode Manual mode DNC mode Machine zero return mode Step mode Manual mode MPG mode Channel selection key For machining channel switch The function is unavailable temporarily Any mode Feed hold key Press this key to stop Auto operation Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode Cycle start ke
93. is boss or groove there are 4 measurement points P1 P4 and the measurement will perform without particular order wherein P1 and P2 are separately two points along the X axis direction P3 and P4 are separately two points along the Y axis direction The center coordinate of X axis direction calculates of the X coordinate of P1 and P2 the center coordinate calculates of the Y coordinate of P3 and P4 B Operation steps 252 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting Step 1 Press the lt MEASURE gt softkey after manually moving the tool or center bar to the 1 measurement point Step 2 Repeated the step 1 till the overall measurement points are completed There are 3 points for circle and 4 points for rectangle Step 3 Set the center coordinate to the selected coordinate system by lt START gt softkey ll Auto center Interface display and parameter option explanation A Public parameter option 1 Measurement method 0 Manual 1 Auto 2 Workpiece type 1 Hole amp external circle 2 Boss amp groove 3 Vector hole amp external circle 4 Vector boss amp groove Note 1 hole 1 external circle 2 groove 2 Boss 3 vector hole 3 vector external circle 4 vector groove 4 vector boss 3 Coordinate system selection S G54 G59 G54 P1 P50 lt O C m 4 Tool offset number T O U m gt O Z Tool offset number The radius compensation value o
94. is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement P is the modal code the least value of parameter is set by data parameter P281 and the most value is set by p282 Value P is less than the P281 parameter setting value which is operated based upon the least value if it more than the P282 parameter setting value and it is operated based upon the most value Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Axis switching Cancel the canned cycle before the boring axis can be shifted Boring machining In a block that does not contain X Y Z or other miscellaneous axes is not performed Example M3 S100 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G89 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to 89 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual po
95. j R k i Macro program code G68 G68 X_Y_R Coordinate rotation Lek a ioe tz G73 XY ZR Fe High speed peck G73 YAR OF F me machining cycle G76 G 6 XY ZQRPF K Fine boring cycle Write along with other programs in the G80 eci F Canned cycle cancel Oc 4 G N x lt N T v TI NO Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Function Code form JOU JO p jqeu pow Aoeinooe ubiuU AVDO 8A UBIH Drilling cycle spot drilling F cycle i Drilling cycle counter boring cycle F Peck drilling cycle y F Right tapping cycle S lt F Boring cycle T z F Boring cycle z F Back boring cycle z F Boring cycle F Boring cycle Write in the block T eee ees Increment command G92 X_Y Z a Floating coordinate system setting G94 T Feed per minute G95 T Feed per rotation G96S_ T Constant cycle speed control Cutting speed G97S_ Constant cycle speed T control cancel Cutting speed Return to the initial plane Write in the block T a a Return to the R point plane in canned cycle Note 1 If the modal code is shared with a same block with the one shot modal and the one shot modal shoud be considered in priority simultaneously change the corresponding mode based upon the other modal codes in a same block instead of executing them Note 2 The system is on G code state of which this G code is with when the power is turned on Partial G codes are 29 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Prog
96. l Fig 3 7 2 The detailed content of each user alarm information shows in the GSK 218MC CNC System PLC amp Installation Connection Manual Note The external alarm can be set and edited the alarm number based upon the on site actual circumstance by the user and the alarm content after edited inputs to the system by the system transmission software The external alarm is the A of the edited file LadChi txt the followed two digit are set by the 273 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual value of the bit parameters 53 0 53 3 Default vaue is 01 that is the file name is LadChi01 txt 3 History interface Enter the history alarm information interface by HISTORY Jsoftkey in lt ALARM gt interface refer to the Fig 3 7 3 P 01701 p pH 1 o am m ES e l Fig 3 7 3 This items within this interface are arranged from near to far based upon the time sequence so that the user can easily view it 4 Record interface Enter the external alarm interface by RECORD softkey in lt ALARM gt interface refer to the Fig 3 7 4 The content of operation record interface is the concrete modification information for the system ll SINN TOA O 9 a 5 O Z parameter and ladder diagram such as the modification content and time etc j jj 00A 7 2011 07 11 15 27 MODIFY NUM PARA NO G Paeli23 PATH 1 MDI Ss DS Aa user tasty B
97. machining block of scaling G50 Canceling the scaling Or G51X_Y_ Z I_J_K_ Each axis is separately performed acoording to different scaling I J and K Machining block of scaling G50 Canceling the scaling Function 46 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code The programmed shape is regarded as a center with the specified position by G51 scaling the same or different proportion It is necessary to point out that the G51 is specified otherwise the unexpected situation may occur with the single block and then cancel it by G50 Y Po Scaling center SINN 1OA Fig 4 2 14 1 scaling P1P2P3P4 P1 P2 P3 P4 i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Expanations 1 Scaling center 3 positioning parameters X_Y_Z can be performed with G51 which are the optional parameters The positioning parameter is used to specify the scaling center of the G51 If the positioning parameter does not specify the system is set the current position of the tool as the scaling center The scaling center is always specified with the absolute positioning mothod regardless of the current positioning method is absolute or increment Moreover the parameter in G51 is also indicated with the rectangular coordinate system in G51 code based upon the polar coordinate G16 method Example G17 G91 G54 GO X10 Y10 G51 X40 Y40 P2 Incremental method scaling center is still the absolute coordinate 40 40 in the G54 coordinate system G1 Y
98. manne i E E a A E T a lt aad ce 113 4d TOO COMPES MS aAtlOn G COG sisese an E T T ue Aas 116 4 7 1 Tool Length Compensation G43 G44 and G49 oo cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 116 Ao Cutter Compensation G40 GA Ge aceite ee rian iis E bes sue nanan te 119 Ay Details or Cutter Compensation sersan aetna diene eee A 126 ATA Comer Onset Arc interpolation G39 as aiscchs0s cc tate a a tesa bsbuteial mespal awa iae 143 4 7 5 Tool Compensation Value Entering Compensation Number From Program G10 eee 143 48 Feed 18 O10 0 lt Game nn rrr nr ren Ean enn CERRY cee rene re Tne ee Re ere ne ener 144 ASL Feed ModS God GOGG enO Gteagtadesow scasseael OAS 144 A832 Antona Corner Over de G02 ien a ise 145 A O Macro FUNCIONO COG C5 n e a a a see aane 147 Oks User Macro Prora rion e r a a a a ha ceeohe dois 147 K Macro Vara Dle eei a a a a a a news aoe aceae eee 148 A933 Oser Macro Proorain Calea a N Sesgue a iee 157 AO A User Macro Proeratn PUNCH OMA 25 sorte tcesieaudst Gaiohi a e a e 157 405 User Macro Program PunCiGm D erriten rores rie Aue see es 163 CHAPTER FIVE MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M CODE cccssssssescccccccesssssesees 171 SI We OS Ol iON IO CG aces ahieicncpatases aster tansaseninrsen a a aa N 172 5 1 1 Negative Reverse Code Command M03 M04 c sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseessssssssssseeeeeaaaas 172 5 1 2 Spindle Stopping Cod
99. menm enaena or coordinate system can not be performed 0 name nenawm coordinate system can not be performed oO ee ee eee block 0166 There is no specification axis when reference point return oo 0167 Intermediate point coordinate excessive big i nde The Min dwell time at the bottom of a hole should be less than the Max one at the bottom of a hole 0 m Cutter compensation does not cancel when entering or retracting eh subprogram P does not the integer alternatively P is less than or equals to 0 in the block for calling the subprogram 07a he suberogram cating should be ess ran BBW mes f OTE Tre canned pl can oriy be pero onthe GPF lanes J 07s The spinde speed does not spectiy bolere Tre raid tepping bogre 07 iessen orne sorae nostre peamneranmeer function of the spindle Modify the program or parameter OFT The sinde speed doss not pec before the cammed oyde teare om mans o 0182 Spindle speed excessive big or small 0183 Illegal T codes 0184 The selected tool is out of the range L is excessive small the alarm reasons are shown below gt mi z gt x lt 0185 1 Lis less than the tool radius in the rectangle groove fine milling 2 Lis less than 0 in the groove rough milling L is excessive big the alarm reasons are shown below 0186 1 Lis more than the cutter diameter in the circle groove rough milling 2 Lis more than the cutter diameter in the rectangle groov
100. movement is separately performed the interval RBK compensatin 0 The cutting feed rapid movement does not separately perform the interval compensatin RVCS 1 Reverse interval compensation mode Speed up speed down 0 Reverse interval compensation mode Fixed frequency Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 011 9 ALMS ALM5 ALM4 ALM3 ALM2 ALM1 ALM1 1 The alarm is generated when the 1 axis drive alarm signal is set to 1 0 The alarm is generated when the 1 axis drive alarm signal is set to 0 ALM2 1 The alarm is generated when the 2 axis drive alarm signal is set to 1 0 The alarm is generated when the 2 axis drive alarm signal is set to 0 ALM3 1 The alarm is generated when the 3 axis drive alarm signal is set to 1 0 The alarm is generated when the 3 axis drive alarm Signal is set to 0 ALM4 1 The alarm is generated when the 4 axis drive alarm signal is set to 1 0 The alarm is generated when the 4 axis drive alarm signal is set to 0 ALM5 1 The alarm is generated when the 5 axis drive alarm signal is set to 1 0 The alarm is generated when the 5 axis drive alarm signal is set to 0 ALMS 1 The alarm is generated when the spindle drive alarm signal is set to 1 gt U v m z gt lt 0 The alarm is generated when the spindle drive alarm signal is set to 0 Standard setting 0010 0000 System parameter number 02 0 UHSM APC MAPC ZRS ITL I
101. not stop when the feedrate is Fo 1 During the tapping the dry run is enabled 0 During the tapping the dry run is disabled 1 The dry run is enabled during cutting feed 351 er Jd E GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0 The dry run is disabled during cutting feed RDR 1 The dry run is enabled in the rapid positioning 0 The dry run is disabled in the rapid positioning Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 011 3 HPC NPC NPC 1 The feed rev is enabled when the position encoder does not install 0 The feed rev is disabled when the position encoder does not install HPC 1 System installs a position encoder 0 System does not install a position encoder Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number seth C C C F ee e DEE 1 Manual zero return positions to the reference point manually at the rapid traverse rate after the refernce point establishes and memories 0 Manual zero return positions to the reference point at the rapid traverse rate after the refernce point establishes and memories Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 011 5 PIIS PPCK ASL PLAC STL gt D m z gt x lt STL 1 Select the pre reading machining method 0 Select the non pre reading machining method 1 The acceleration deceleration metho
102. number of the 2 axis reference position Setting range 0 9999 0218 Pitch error compensation number of the 3 axis reference position Setting range 0 9999 0219 Pitch error compensation number of the 4 axis reference position 390 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List Setting range 0 9999 0220 Pitch error compensation number of the 5 axis reference position Setting range 0 9999 0226 The pitch error compensation interval of the 1 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0227 The pitch error compensation interval of the 2 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0228 The pitch error compensation interval of the 3 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0229 The pitch error compensation interval of the 4 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0230 The pitch error compensation interval of the 5 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0231 The reverse interval compensation value of the 1 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 5 0 5 0232 The reverse interval compensation value of the 2 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 5 0 5 0233 The reverse interval compensation value of the 3 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 5 0 5 0234 The reverse interval compensation value of the 4 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 5 0 5 391 gt a mi z x lt er Jd Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operatio
103. of the reference position a 0064 The 4 axis is out of the reference position of 0065 The 5 axis is out of the reference position a 0066 It is necessary to cancel the canned cycle mode before performing the parameter input G10 tar The sting oat doses supporediy SO oe Fao penis prametrswich oo o 0060 The Use operation race shoul be coset when acing 007o The emor areas rfc Delt any unecessary program enren The address to be searched was not found Or the program with specified a program number was not found in program index Check the data 0 geet programs 2 raster econ peyens T or delete the unnecessary programs 0074 The program number is other than 1 to 99999 Change the program number Lf An attempt was made to register a program whose number was protected Address P Program number was not commanded in the block which F includes an M98 Modify the program OFT he program was caled in fve folds Wody epeen 0 aces ramea ve nave pogan caman oo soere and G65 was not found or the macro program called by MO6 does not exist O07 he sem pred oneee OOOO 00 menm lowest speed is more than the top speed 00er Hare program cannot be caled he subprogram Macy pogam os Buen ovement OOOO O dobe When the data is input to memory by using the series port overflow occurs The setting or input output equipment of Baud rate is incorrect 0086 In the canned cycle modal the system cannot be sh
104. operation Refer to the Fig 3 1 1 4 GOO G17 G9 G94 Gel ABSOLUTE REM DIST G40 G49 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 1 727 mm mm G54 247 897 m F AF S AS 5 480 mm fa H D M 30 G92 XB YO Z N1082 G G90 X74 295 Y 50 N1086 Z30 M3 51500 M8 N108 22 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 09 07 05 DATA Doo o PATH 1 ee Fig 3 1 1 4 Note 1 Whether the modal in the program monitoring display interface can be displayed by bit 6 of parameter No 23 When BIT6 0 the modal code does not display on the interface instead of displaying the machine tool F m r en AE O T 2 coordinate value at the original position Note 2 In the lt Zero gt lt Single step gt lt Manual gt and lt MPG gt modes the intermediate coordinate system is regarded as the relative one in the lt Auto gt lt MDI gt and lt DNC gt modes the intermediate coordinate system is treated as the remainder movement amount 3 1 2 Display Machining Time Component Numbers Programming Speed Override and Acutal Speed Etc Information Inthe ABSOLUTE RELATIVE method interface displayed from lt Position gt the information such as the programming speed actual rate feedrate rapid override G function code tool offset machining numbers cutting time spindle speed override spindle speed and machining tool etc can be displayed refer to the Fig
105. operation When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Axis switching Cancel the canned cycle before the drilling axis can be changed Boring machining In a block that does not contain X Y Z or other axes is not performed For example M3 S2000 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G86 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to the initial position plane 83 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machi
106. overmane i U1 is coincided with the 218MC other than the button Icons NOILVasadO ll SAIN TOA Any mode z Movement Rapid traverse he button function of WW Wwi00 Wh Override button 218MC U1 is coincided F OVERRIDE F OVERRIDE F OVERRIDE ON OFF with the 218MC other than the button icons PAF X Y Z and the 4th axis Mechanical zero Single gt ft YJ step Manual and MPG aoe feed manual single step The button function of operation methods positive axis regards W th the 218MC other as MPG selection axis than the button icons ee of GSK218MC and GSK218MC U1 are of GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V The following introduction of the buttons of 218MC are regarded as an example shared the same effect with the Note 2 In Manual mode the manual speed override is adjusted by the feed override switch in the case of the rapid traverse buttons are not controlled Note 3 The buttons within the lt gt in the following explanations are regarded as panel buttons within the are 205 er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual treated as softkeys below the screen Jis the corresponding interface for the current softkeys means that there is sub menu within this menu gs m LT on gt om rA 206 Chapter Two System ON OFF amp Safety Operation CHAPTER TWO SYSTEM ON OFF amp SAFETY OPERATION 2 1 System ON The f
107. performing the MOO M01 M02 M30 M99 M98 and 06 Note 9 The bit 7 of parameter No 0 Selection mode 0 Common mode 1 High velocity and high accuracy mode does not support the G10 on line modification 4 2 8 Workpiece Coordinate System G54 G59 Function Specify the current workpiece coordinate system Select a workpiece coordinate system by specifying a worpiece coordinate system G code in a program 38 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Format G54 G59 Explanations 1 Without code parameters 2 The system itself can be set 6 workpiece coordinate systems which any of the coordinate can be selected by codes G54 G59 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 3 The system displays the performed workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 G92 or the additional workpiece coordinate system before the power OFF 4 When different workpiece coordinate systems are called in a block specify a movement axis EEO and then position to the coordinate point under a new workpiece coordinate system the i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q coordinate will turn into its corresponding coordinate value under a new workpiece coordinate system without specifying
108. saves the updated parameters by and the state column displays Successful for drive parameter save 9 Close the parameter switch after the overall parameters setting are completed 3 3 5 2 3 Backup of Spindle Parameter 1 Select the lt MDI gt operation mode SETTING 2 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by L set the parameter switch to 1 SETTING 3 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by L Input the terminal user password or above 4 Press the sve and then enter the parameter display screen by E SPINDLE PARAMETER softkey 5 Select the BACKUP button the parameter of current selected axis can be copied to the file DrvParXxX txt XX axis number For example the file name is SP0O1 txt if the X axis is backup 6 Close the parameter switch after the overall parameters setting are completed 3 3 5 2 4 Recovery of Spindle Parameter 1 Select the lt MDI gt operation mode SETTING 2 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by L J set the parameter switch to 1 SETTING input the terminal user password or above 3 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by SYSTEM 4 Press the ssj and then enter the parameter display screen by E SPINDLE PARAMETER softkey 239 O U m gt O Z ll SAIN TOA Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 5 Select the RECOVERY button the backup parameter file SPXX txt of c
109. spindle speed clamping 0 Before the spindle override 1 After the spindle override whether the setting of bit O of parameter No 61 is used the constant cycle speed control Restrictions 1 The response problem in the servo system does not consider when the spindle speed changes but the constant surface cutting speed control is also enabled during thread cutting And therefore cancel the constant surface cutting speed by G97 before the machining of thread 2 In a rpaid traverse block specified by GOO the constant surface speed control is not made by calculating the surface speed to a transient change of the tool position but is made by calculating the surface speed based upon the position at the end point of the rapd traverse block on the condition that cutting is not executed at rapid traverse 3 When the machining such as the flexible tapping rigid tapping or peck tapping etc are performed it is necessary to firstly cancel the constant surface cutting feed by G97 otherwise the disorder gear or broken screw tap etc will occur 181 ry O Q D gt Z Q SINN TOA Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 182 Chapter Seven Feed Function F Code CHAPTER SEVEN FEED FUNCTION F CODES Feed function controls the feedrate of a cutter the feed function and its control method are shown below 7 1 Rapid T
110. start position of the X Y plane Z Machining depth it is absolute position in G90 it is a position related to the R reference surface in G91 R R reference surface position it is the absolute position in G90 it is a position related to the 103 SINN TOA n J O Q D gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual start of this block in G91 I Fine milling circle radius J The distance between the fine milling start and the center of the fine milling D Tool compensation number take out the corresponding tool compensation value based upon the provided series number K_ Repeated times Cycle processes 1 Rapid positioning to the postion along with XY plane 2 Descend to point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the start of the bottom of a hole 4 The transition arc 1 is regarded as path to perform an arc interpolation from the start 5 The fine milling incircle is treated as a path to perform the whole circle interpolation 6 The transition arc 4 is regarded as a ptht to perform the arc interpolation and then return to the start 7 Return to initial point plane or point R plane based upon the different specifications of G98 or G99 Code path 4 Fine milling cycle inside the whole circle CCW G25 Fine milling cycle inside the whole circle CW Y Y X X Incicle
111. stopped on the intermediate point 7 7 Machine Locking Operation MACHINE Press the WSK button The indicator ON on the button means that the single operation state is already performed in the lt AUTO gt operation mode In this case each axis of machine tool does 302 Chapter Seven Automatic Operation not move but the display of the position coordinate is identical with the machine movement as well the M S or T can be performed this function is used for program verification 7 8 M S T Function Locking Operation MST Press the MSTK button The indicator ON on the button means that the single operation state is already performed in the lt AUTO gt operation mode In this case M S or T code does not perform which is used for the program verification with the machine tool locking function together Note M00 M01 M02 M30 M98 and M99 can be performed normally 7 9 Feed Rapid Trimming in Auto Operation In the lt AUTO gt operation the system can be changed the movement velocity by trimming feed or rapid traverse rate Select the feedrate by in the Auto mode its feed override can be carried out 21 level real time adjustment Press once the feedrate increases one level each level is 10 it will not increase any more till to 200 the feedrate decrease one level by wh once each level is 10 the bit 4 of parameter No 12 set whether the axis is stopped if the override regards to Fo if it s
112. the Fig 3 1 1 2 215 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual PRG SPEED 5 FEED OVRD 100 e mm 46 6868 126 168 2H Fa 25 50 100 Y 4 f e 3S om S 20000 100 50 66 76 86 J 166 116 128 Z 5 48U m COMMAND T NO T 0OA OFFSET H 08 DAGAA G20 G17 G9 G94 G21 G4 Gag G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 613 CUT TIME 000 0O DATA 09 05 55 O mn S sm Fig 3 1 1 2 3 Compositive Enter the interface by COMPOSITIVE softkey they will be displayed at the same A The position at the relative coordinate system B The position at the absolute coordinate system C The position at the machine coordinate system D The offset in the MPG interruption Shift value E Velocity component ll 3WwWNTOA O U m 5 O Z F Remainder movement value It displays in the Auto MDI and DNC mode The display page is as follows refer to the Fig 3 1 1 3 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 GBB mm 000 DATA Sd 086 29 PATH 1 o m ee Fig 3 1 1 3 4 Program monitoring method 216 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting Enter the LPROGRAM MONITORING interface by its software in this interface the current position absolute coordinate relative coordinate can be simultaneously displayed with the modal information and operation block at the current
113. the absolute position in G90 it is the position related to the start of this block in G91 l The width along with rectangular X axis direction J The width along with rectangular Y axis direction L The distance from the fine milling start to the rectangular edge positive direction along X axis U Corner arc radius there is no corner arc transition if it omits When O lt U lt tool radius the alarm then occurs D Cutter compensation number take out the corresponding cutter compensation value based upon the provided series number K Repeated times Cycle processes 1 Positioning to the start position on XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Descend to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the arc interpolation from the start based upon that the transition arc 1 is SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q regarded as the path 5 Perform the linear and arc interpolation based that the 2 3 4 5 6 are treated as path 7 Return to start to perform the arc interpolation based upon that the transition arc 7 is regarded as path 7 Return to initial point plane or point R plane based upon the different specifications of G98 or G99 Code path G35 rectangular groove fine milling cycle CCW G36 rectangular groove fine milling cycle CW Cutter center ee path Cutter center path Rectangular groove boundary Rectangular gr
114. the comensation value Tool center path Fig a Programmed path Fig b Fig 4 7 3 25 140 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code d Overcutting by cutter compensation 1 When the machining is performed by the arc less than the tool radius When the corner radius is less than the cutter radius the internal compensation of the cutter will result in overcutting therefore the interference may alarm and stop before performing Tool center _ _ TE The interference alarm path Occurs before operating the operation is then stopped Programmed path Normally do not perform the interference inspection over cutting path p The over cutting may occur if the CNC does not stop SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Fig 4 7 3 26 2 Machining groove smaller than the tool radius When the machining is performed by the cutting groove less than the tool radius the cutter compensation forces the tool center path that moves along the negative direction of programmed path the overcutting then may occur Tool center path E ao N Alarm occurs operation stops a gt n Ypll ON Z The over cutting may occur if the CNC does not stop Fig 4 7 3 27 141 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 Machining section difference smaller than the tool radius If the section difference smaller than the tool r
115. the cursor to the position where the parameter number is to be modified Method 1 Display the page to be set a parameter by page up down button alternatively move the cursor by direction buttons to position the parameter position to be modified 234 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting Mehtod 2 Positioning is performed by after inputting a parameter number INPUT 6 Confirm it by men the parameter value is delivered to drive and the state column displays Successful for drive parameter download SAVE 7 The servo saves the updated parameter by and the state column displays Successful for drive parameter save 8 Close the parameter switch after the overall parameters setting are executed 3 3 5 1 2 Matched Parameter Setting Between Servo amp Motor Type 1 Select the lt MDI gt mode SETTING 2 Enter lt SETTING gt interface by j set the parameter switch to 1 SYSTEM 3 Firstly press the sse then enter to the servo debugging interface by BUS CONFIGURATION lastly enter the parameter display page by E SERVO PARAMETER 4 Move the cursor to the current selected axis parameter 0 input the password 385 download the drive parameter to the system by input button modify the servo parameter in the SERVO PARAMETER interface 5 Move the cursor to the parameter 1 input the matched numerical value to the motor type INPUT 6 Confirm it by men the
116. then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to initial position plane A G80 O lt G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Reference position return T O D gt C M5 Spindle rotation stop as 2 lt m M30 E e Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G83 command the system then performs the G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation 4 4 5 Tapping Cycle G74 or G84 Code format G 4 G84 X_Y_ Z R_P_F_K_ Function This cycle performs tapping In the tapping cycle the dwell is performed when the tapping axis reaches to the bottom of the hole then the spindle retracts the tapping axis with the negative rotation G74 is left counter tapping cycle G84 is right counter tapping Explanations X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R P_ Dwell time at the bottom of a hole F_ Tapping feedrate K_
117. then the precise and enabled boring machining can be carried out Parameter Q specifies the distance of tool retraction The tool retraction direction and its axis can be specified by the bit 4 and 5 of parameter No 42 the Q value should be positive and the sysmbol is still disabled even if using the negative The offset value of the Q at the bottom of a hole is the 79 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual registered modal value within the canned cycle so it is important to specify it carefully And therefore it also uses for cutting depth of the G73 and G83 To use the miscellandous function M code rotates the spindle before specifying the G76 When the G74 and the M code are specified at a same block perform the M code at the time of performing the 1 hole position operation The system then proceeds the next operation When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canne
118. will then stop the PLC 1021 automatically Check the ladder diagram logic and eliminate the dead cycle or excessive repeated calling 1022 Function command name is absent Correctly input the function command name 1023 The address or constant of the function command exceeds its range 1024 The unnecessary relay or coil exists Delete the unwanted connection 1025 Function command correct output The line numbers of network connection are exceeded its support range Change the ladder diagram 421 gt a m z x lt gt E v m z x lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 1028 Ladder diagram file format error 1029 The ladder diagram being used is lost wa The same output address is used in another position Reselect the unused the output address 1030 There is incorrect vertical line in the network Delete the vertical line User data area is already full reduce the data table capacity of the COD The 1 level of the ladder diagram is excessive big which can not be immediately performed it Reduce the 1 level ladder diagram 1034 Function command DIFU DIFD address repeated Reselect the address 1039 The command or network are not within the performable range Clear it Fail to correcet use the function command CALL or SP the corresponding 1040 relationships between the CALL and SP or the SP and SPE are incorrect Alternativel
119. with the parameter can be replaced by variable For example F 103 When 103 15 it is identical with the F15 command G 130 When 130 3 it is same as the G3 Notice 1 Parameter word O and N Program number and Seqence number can not be quoted the variable And it can not be programmed by O 100 N 120 2 It can not be used if exceeds the top code value specified by parameter value When 30 12 M 30 exceeds the Max code value 3 The display and setting of variable value The variable value can be displayed on LCD and set by MDI mode 2 Types of variable Variable can be divided into null local common and system variables which are different in the purpose and character 1 Null variable 0 This variable is always null no value can be assigned to this variable 2 Local variable 1 50 Local variables can only be registered the data in macro program bit 7 of parameter No 52 can be reset or whether it is eliminated after ESP When a macro program is called arguments are assigned to local variables 3 Common variables 100 199 500 999 Bit 6 of parameter No 52 can be reset or whether it is eliminated the common variables 100 199 after ESP Common variables are public one in main program and each user macro program called by main program that is the used variable i in one user macro program is identical with the one of other macro programs Therefore the common variable i in one macro program calculation
120. 0 at the G54 workpiece coordinate system N7 G29 X60 Y20 Reference position returns to the point 60 20 via the intermediate point 40 60 at the G55 workpiece coordinate system G28 automatically cancels the tool compensations This code generally is used Tool change is performed at the reference position after returning the reference point in the automatical tool change therefore when using this code it is necessary to cancel the cutter compensation and tool length compensation firstly Refer to the 1 reference position setting in the data parameter P45 P48 4 3 2 2 3 and 4 Reference Position Retrun G30 set 4 reference positions in the machine coordinate system In a system without an absolute position detector the 2 3 and the 4 reference position return functions can be used only after the automatical reference position return G28 or the manual reference position return is performed Format G30 P2X_Y_ Z the 2 reference position return P2 can be omitted 59 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G30 P3 X_Y_Z_ the 3 reference position return G30 P4X_Y_Z_ the 4 reference position return Function G30 performs the operation that the intermediate point specified in G30 returns to the appointed reference position Explanations 1 X_Y_ Z_ Specify the code Absolute value incremental value code at t
121. 0 01 0 1 and 1mm Forward acceleration The linear acceleration deceleration or S type one can be selected the acceleration deceleration time constant can be set Backward deceleration The linear acceleration deceleration or index one can Acceleration be alternative the acceleration deceleration time constant can be set deceleration Wherein Manual MPG and single step are used the backward deceleration The rapid positioning cutting feed can be selected the forward backward acceleration or deceleration It is specified by M and 2 digit M function can be self defined System internal M command do not repeatedly define End of program M02 Miscellaneuos M30 Program stop M00 Optional stop M01 Tool magazine call M06 Subprogram call M98 and Subprogram end M99 The defined M commands by PLC M03 M04 M05 M08 MO9 M10 M11 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M2 M26 M27 M28 M29 M35 M36 M44 M45 M50 and M51 e T and 4 digit tool selection e256 groups tool offset value e length Tool function compensation e worn compensation eC type Cutter comensation e S2 digit I O gear control S5 digit Analog output e Top spindle velocity limit function Tool function SINN TOA s J O Q 7 gt Z Q e Constant line velocity function Spindle encoder The encoder linear number can be set to 100 5000p r the Spindle function driving ratio between encoder and spindle 1 255 1 255
122. 0 131071 0350 The absolute position of the 4 axis reference 65000 position when using the absolute rotation encoder gt a mi z x lt Setting range 0 131071 0351 The absolute position of the 5 axis reference 65000 399 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual position when using the absolute rotation encoder Setting range 0 131071 0352 Acceleration deceleration time constant with high speed in zero return Setting range 3 400 0353 Acceleration deceleration time constant with 100 low speed in zero return Setting range 3 400 0354 Failure times of DSP start Setting range 0 999999 0355 Successful times of system start Setting range 0 999999 0356 The machined components Setting range 0 9999 0357 The total components to be machined Setting range 0 9999 gt U v m z x lt 0358 The accumulation value Hours of power on time Setting range 0 99999 0359 The accumulation value Days of power on time Setting range 0 99999 0360 The accumulation value of cutting time Hours Setting range 0 99999 0361 Backup the connection state Unchangeable without MDT package of the Ethernet Setting range 0 20 400 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0362 Backup DSP scan counter Unchangeable 78 Setting range O 1000 0363 Backup the invalid MDT package counter Unchangeable of the
123. 000 GO Z2 G42 D01 Tool offset setting M98 P2100 P02100 Subprogram calling M98 P2200L7 Call for 7 times G40 GO G90 220 XOYO M30 Subprogram 2200 02200 G91 53 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G68 X0 YO R45 0 Relative rotation angle G90 M98 P2100 Subprogram 02200 calls the subprogram 02100 M99 Subprogram 2100 02100 G90 GO XO Y 20 Establish a right tool 2 compensation method Ng Nae ane G01Z 2 F200 X8 284 att Subprogram X14 142 Y 14 142 M99 Program path The path with ___ offset value Fig 4 2 15 4 4 2 16 Skip Function G31 Code format G31 X_Y_Z_ Function Linear interpolation can be commanded following the G31 code like G01 If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this code and this execution of the code is then interrupted and the next block is performed The skip function is used when the end of the machining is not programmed but specified with a signal from the machine for example in grinding It is used also for measuring the dimension of a workpiece Explanations 1 G31 is one shot mode G code which is only enabled in the specified block 2 The alarm occurs if the G31 code issues when the cutter compensation is applied the cutter compensation should be cancelled before G31 code Example The next block to G31 is 1 axis mo
124. 03 determines the cutter position points of the fitting spline curve which should be controlled within a certain range 403 1 10 the greater the parameter is the more the calculation value is the less the shape error is the smaller the parameter is the smaller the calculation value is the greater the shape error Is 0404 Spline coefficient n1 Setting range 1 0000 199 0000 0405 Spline coefficient n2 30 Setting range 1 0000 199 0000 0406 Spline coefficient n3 setting range 1 0000 199 0000 Fit a piece of initial spline curves for 3 times based upon the spline coefficients n1 n2 n3 404 405 406 the greater the spline coefficients are the greater the curve errors are however the speed is smooth and the machine operates stably The least the coefficients are the least the curve errors are but the speed does not smooth and the machine viberates The spline coefficient n3 406 is reversed 0407 System internal parameter 1 0 6000 Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0408 System internal parameter 2 0 6000 Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 0409 Pre read the smooth treatment control 2 0000 Setting range 0 0000 30 0000 The parameter of the pre reading treatment control is pre read the machining shape in advance automatically calculate the tendency of the integral shape so reduce machining scars due to the program error generated from the CAM 0 Close the pre reading smoo
125. 1 P 100 Q 101 Q 102 5 means that the binary is 101 3 means 011 the calculation result is 100 7 G65 H12 P 100 Q 101 Q 102 5 means that the binary is 101 3 means 011 the calculation result is 100 1 5 Macro variable alarm For example G65 H99 P1 Macro variable 3001 alarms G65 H99 P124 Macro variable 3124alarms 161 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual The example of user macro program 1 Bolt hole cycle The center is regarded as reference position XO YO radius is R and start angle is A N holes can be machined accordingly Reference position X0 Y0 SINN 1IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Fig 4 9 4 2 XO YO are the reference point coordinate value of the bolt hole cycle R Radiu A Start angle N Numbers The above mentioned parameters are used the following variables 500 The coordinate value X0 of reference position X 501 The coordinate value Y0 of reference position Y 502 Radius R 503 Start angle A 504 N numbers N gt 0 CCW numbers N N lt 0 CW numbers N The following variables are used the operation in the macro program 100 The 1 hole machining counting 1 101 Terminal value of counting N IE 102 The angle 61 of the 1 hole 103 The X coordinate value Xi of the 1 hole 104 The Ycoordinate value Yi of the 1 hole The user macro program body can be written as the foll
126. 10 3512 18 131 10 6282 18 166 X10 9032 18 225 11 1712 18 306 Ready HUM lt Fig 11 1 1 1 11 1 2 Function Introduction 1 File menu The file menu contains some functions such as the New Open and Save the program file gt U U m z gt lt Print and Print setting the file list for current opening file etc 2 Edit menu Edit menu contains of cut copy paste retraction reach replacement etc 3 Series port menu It is used for opening and setting of the series port 4 Transmission method menu It contains of the DNC transmission method file delivery transmission method file reception transmission method 5 Menu check The display and hiding of tool and state bars 6 Help menu The software information for this software 332 11 1 3 Series Port Data Transmission The operation steps are shown below 1 Select lt MDI gt operation mode SETTING set the I O channel as 0 or 1 2 Enter the setting page by 3 Enter the setting password page by PASSWORD softkey input the corresponding level authority password Refer to the Setting and Modification of Password Authority in Section 3 4 5 SETTING 4 Enter the setting data treatment page by J move the cursor to the detstination position by or A Data output CNC gt PC 1 System prompts Waiting for the transmitting by pressing thef DATA OUTPUT softkey g Receive File 2 Click button Alternatively
127. 100 Positioning GOO X120 Y100 Positioning M29 1000 Specify a rigid tapping M29 1000 Specify a rigid tapping G84 Z 100 R 20 F1000 Left handed rigid tapping G84 Z 100 R 20 F1 Left handed rigid tapping G80 Cancel the tapping cycle G80 Cancel the tapping cycle G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Reference position return G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Reference position return M30 End of program M30 End of program Restrictions G code Fail to specify the G code From G00 to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G84 command the system then performs the G60 modal M code Spindle is rotated by miscellaneous function M code before specifying G84 If there is no specified the spindle rotation the system then adjusts as CW based upon the current spindle command speed automatically When the G84 and an M codes are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first positioning operation The system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement S command Ifthe specified spindle speed exceeds the top spindle speed in tapping data parameter P257 the upper limit speed of
128. 100 Y100 GO is the system iniliatization G1 X0 YO F100 Linear interpolation to XO YO feed min feedrate is 100mm min One shot the corresponding address value is only enabled in the block written this code if this address value is used again in the next block which should be specified it again Refer to the G function code in the group 00 in table 4 1 2 The modal and one shot descriptions of the function words are refer to the table 2 5 1 Table 2 5 1 Modal and one shot of function code A group of G functions can be cancelled each other Modal G These functions will always enable once they are function performed until cancelled by a same group G functions A group of M functions can be cancelled each other Modal M which keeps enabling before canceling by another function SINN TOA function in the same group One shot G It is only enabled in the specified block which is function cancelled when the block ends One shot One shot M It is only enabled in the block of writing this code function y ry O Q D gt Z Q Chapter Three Component Program Configuration CHAPTER THREE COMPONENT PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 3 1 Program Composition A program composes of doubles of blocks a block consists of words Each block is divided into by EOB code ISO is LF EIA is CR The character described in this manaual means the code of EOB program 090022 6 000016 Program mae name G92 X0 YOZO
129. 110 101 110 G65 H01 P 101 Q 102 101 102 158 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 2 Plus operation J K G65 H02 P I Q J R K For example G65 H02 P 101 Q 102 R15 101 102 15 3 Minus operation J K G65 H03 P I Q J R K For example G65 H03 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 4 Multiplication operation Jx K G65 H04 P I Q J R K For example G65 H04 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102x 103 5 Division operation J K G65 H05 P I Q J R K For example G65 HO5 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 6 Logic plus OR J OR K G65 H11 P I Q J R K For example G65 H11 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 OR 103 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 7 Logic multiplication AND J AND K G65 H12 P I Q J R K For example G65 H12 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 AND 103 8 XOR J XOR K G65 H13 P I Q J R K For example G65 H13 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 XOR 103 9 Square root 1 4 j G65 H21 P I Q J For example G65 H21 P 101 Q 102 101 V 102 10 Absolute J G65 H22 P I Q J For example G65 H22 P 101 Q 102 101 102 11 Remainder J TRUNC J K x K TRUNC Reject the decimal section G65 H23 P I Q J R K For example G65 H23 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 TRUNC 102 103 x 103 12 Complex devision operation 1 Ix J K G65 H26 P I Q J R k For e
130. 15 GS G69 G64 G97 G13 i BY a 000 00 a zs E x a s AAT sEEREEEEE POS PRG SYS PLC SET GRA DGN ALM f HELP timi 5 p9 TS A Z REEERE aeara f tenrai tiet e San z pJ gt b C d J EJ R O gt SLX1 Send tenn fam FeeSit FRESER x D o o w fmi 7 B ai me oe softkey function area Machine tool control area Fig 1 1 4 GSK218MC U1 panel 1 2 Panel Function Explanation 1 2 1 LCD Display Area GSK 218MC and GSK 218MC V systems are used the colorful 10 4 inch LCD with 800x600 resolution GSK 218MC H and GSK 218MC U1 systems are used the colorful 8 4 inch LCD with 800x600 resolution 196 Chapter One Operation Panel 1 2 2 Editing Keyboard Area x i SYSTEM INTs La Ja V W ae J K Rf a l INSERT Pare SEA SE HS ny et D Q Fig 1 2 2 1 GSK218MCRKXGSK218MC H Editing keyboard area ll SINN TOA O 5 a 5 O Z mom SEO Afrejs ch OE M VA f Ta D W Fig 1 2 2 2 GSK218MC V Editing keyboard area Q 197 F m on gt om A Cr Ia T O jeun Guu SE ON PROGRAM Fig 1 2 2 3 RONG lf I SYSTEM PMC SET GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual ep gt z m a L gt Z f N Hee ea N Lis N J O moo 1d A 0 0 A DELETE l S m m Z o INSERT ALTER f i
131. 17 The 3 axis workpiece origin offset value of G54 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0018 The 4 axis workpiece origin offset value of G54 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0019 The 5 axis workpiece origin offset value of G54 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0020 The 1 axis workpiece origin offset value of G55 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0021 The 2 axis workpiece origin offset value of G55 0 0000 gt a mi z x lt 369 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0022 The 3 axis workpiece origin offset value of G55 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0023 The 4 axis workpiece origin offset value of G55 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0024 The 5 axis workpiece origin offset value of G55 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0025 The 1 axis workpiece origin offset value of G56 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0026 The 2 axis workpiece origin offset value of G56 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0027 The 3 axis workpiece origin offset value of G56 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0028 The 4 axis workpiece origin offset value of G56 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0029 The 5 axis workpiece origin offset value of G56 0 0000 Setting ra
132. 2 set whether cleans the macro program common variable 100 199 after resetting 10 It can be used in the system output abnormality and coordinate axis abnormality 2 3 2 ESP The system enters the ESP state after pressing the ESP button during the machine tool is being operated In this case the machine tool is immediately stopped The ESP can be removed after releasing this button Although it differs depending on the manufactures usually rotate this button left it can be automatically skipped 208 Chapter Two System ON OFF amp Safety Operation Note 1 It is necessary to confirm that the fault reason is eliminated or not before releasing the ESP button Note 2 Perform the reference point return operation again after the ESP button is released to ensure the correct of the coordinate position Generally the ESP signal is NC contactor signal when the contractor is cut off the system then enters the ESP state and the machine is emergently stopped accordingly The ESP circuit connenction is shown below 24 V es ESP button ESP Fig 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 Feed Hold The operation dwell by 2 during the operation of the machine tool It is essential to note that the dwells performs after the current codes are carried out in the rigid tapping or cycle code operation 2 4 Cycle Start amp Feed Hold and 2 are used for the program s start and dwell in Auto MDI and DNC modes Set whether uses the external star
133. 3 1 2 1 217 ll SAIN TOA O 2 L gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual FEED F mm min PRG SPEED FEED OVRD 100 mm 4 86 128 160 cha a Fa 25 50 100 S SP 6 rpm h 4 89 m 500000 i 100 56 6A 78 88 90 100118 120 ES Z 25 ABV m Tool T COMMAND T NO T 880 OFFSET H 08 DAOA G G17 G90 G94 G21 G4 G49 G54 PART CNT 2001 2000 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 200 0O DATA Fd 89 07 52 PATH 1 a ABS ALL PMONI Fig 3 1 2 1 The concrete meanings are shown below Rate The actual machining rate after the override is performed during the machining Programming rate The rate specified by F code code in a program Feedrate The selected override by feedrate switch Rapid override The override controlled by system default panel or the selected override by rapid traverse wave band switch G function code The value of the G code is being performed at present Tool offset The tool length compensation of the current HOOOO machining program The radius compensation of the current H0000 machining program Machining numbers When machining number of the program adds 1 and perform to M30 or M02 in the Auto or DNC mode the other modes will not add Cutting time When the Auto operation starts the timing begins and its unit is hour minute and second in turn 218 S00000 Comm
134. 36 Single direction positioning and overshoot along with the Y axis Unit mm SYE ao 7 P338 Single direction positioning and overshoot along with the 4 axis Unit mm Note 1 The symbols of the data parameter P335 P338 are expressed the unidirectional positioning and the value of the parameters are indicated as the overrun Note 2 overrun value gt 0 the positioning direction is Note 3 overrun value lt 0 the positioning direction is Note 4 overrun value 0 do not perform the unidirectional positioning 4 2 7 System Parameter On Line Update Function This function is used for setting or modifying the values of the cutter radius length offset external zero offset value workpiece zero offset value additional workpiece zero offset data parameter and bit parameter in the program 37 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Format G10 L50NP R Set or modify the bit parameter G10L51N_R_ Set or modify the bit parameter G11 Cancel the parameter input method Parameter definition N Parameter Number The parameter series No to be modified P Parameter bit number The parameter bit No R Modification value It is used for specifying the value after the parameter is modified The modification specification value can be performed based upon the following codes refer to the relative Chapters for details G10
135. 5 H mM P I at J R K M 1 99 operation instruction 1 operation result var seq alarm ll SAINN TOA O U m gt O Z J operand variable invariable K operand 2 variable invariable H 1 I J H 2 1 J K HgS 1 J K H 4 1 J K HGS 1 J K H11 1 J or K H12 1 J and K H19 I J xor K H21 I sqrt J P 1 4 PATH 1 S Fig 3 9 7 The formats of macro commands and each operation code are introduced in this interface and the setting range of the local variable universal variable and the system variable are provided As for the unfamiliar or unclear macro command operations can be searched and compared in the interface 7 PLC AD interface Enter the help information PLC address list page by PLC AD softkey in lt HELP gt interface There are four sub interfacel F ADDRESS G ADDRESS X ADDRESS and Y ADDRESS for the PLC address interface The content shows below Refer to the Fig 3 9 8 3 9 11 280 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting SYMBOL MEANING Faaa 4 SPL FEED HOLD FaGG 5 Se Cycle start FbGG 6 SA Servo ready Foaa OP Auto run F g1 0 AL Alarm F g1 1 RST Reset F g1 3 SAR Spindle rev arrive Failed ENB Spindle enable FaG1 5 TAP Tapping FOG1 6 DTAP Tapping exe Faal MTAP GES Tapping mode F ge 3 THRD Threading F p2 4 SRNMY Program start Fage 6 CUT Cutt ing
136. 50 100 uI Y D e YUUU m SP 5 Orpm Z Y JOm 56 66 7 86 398 198110120 ES 5 100 D DBO E e 29 COMMAND T NO Tag9a OFFSET H OOO DAOA G G17 G9 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0030 0000 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 00O 00 08 DATA 20337 alal PATH 1 ee EO Fig 2 3 1 2 4 Coordinate System 2 4 1 Machine Tool Coordinate System A special point on a machine used as machine benchmark is called machine zero which is set by the machine tool builder The coordinate system with machine zero point set as its origin is called the machine coordinate system It is set up by manual machine zero return after the power is turned on Once set it remains unchanged till the power off system reset or emergency stop A special point on a machine used as machine benchmark is called machine zero which is set by the machine tool builder The coordinate system with machine zero point set as its origin is called the machine coordinate system It is set up by manual machine zero return after the power is turned on Once set it remains unchanged till the power off system reset or emergency stop 2 4 2 Reference Position There is a special point on the CNC machine tool for tool change and coordinate system setup This point is called reference point It is a fixed point in the machine coordinate system set by the machine tool builder By using reference point return the tool can easily move to this position
137. 75 Y 47 882 Z N146 M3 09 08 06 DATA ooo O PATH 1 ee a ll 3WwWNTOA O 9 m 5 O Z Fig 3 2 2 Press gt enter to next page Press P enter to next page Press return to previous page Note Wherein CORRECTION function can only be used in the Auto mode B EDITING and B END can only operate this function Background editing function in Auto 222 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting and DNC modes The editing program of each function for B EDITING is indentical in the lt EDITING gt mode refer to the Program Editing Operation of Chapter Ten of OPERATION After the editing is performed save this editing interface by B END and retreating from it by RETURN 2 MDI input display Enter the MDI display interface by MDI softkey in the MDI mode multi program can be compiled and performed The program format is as same as the editing program MDI operation is suitable for the simple testing program operation Refer to Fig 3 2 3 GOO G17 G9 G94 G21 G40 G49 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 G13 al B a al 727 mm G54 47 897 mm 47 897 mm 5 480 mm 5 48 mm 088020 9 09 30 DATA Pd PATH 1 oe BE sewn om Fig 3 2 3 4 Program CUR MOD display Enter the CUR MOD display page by the CUR MOD J softkey the code value is displayed for the being performed block and the current modal value
138. 8 G91 X0 YO ZO return to the reference position M30 End of program Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Screw leading In the feed min mode the relationships among the screw leading feedrate and spindle speed are shown below SINN 1OA Feedrate F screw tap pitch x spindle speed S i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q For example tap the M12x1 5 screw hole in component optional parameter S500 500 r min F 1 5x500 750mm min In multiple thread the F value can be calculated by multiplying by the numbers of thread head In feed rev mode the thread leading equals to the feedrate Example Feed min Feed rev Spindle speed 1000r min Spindle speed 1000r min Thread leading 1 0mm Thread leading 1 0mm Then Z axis feedrate 1000 1 1000mm min Then Z axis feedrate thread leading 1mm r G94 Feed min G95 Feed rev G00 X120 Y100 Positioning G00 X120 Y100 Positioning M29 1000 Rigid method M29 1000 Rigid method G84 Z 100 R 20 F1000 Right counter rigid tapping G84 Z 100 R 20 F1 Right counter rigid tapping G80 Tapping cycle cancellation G80 Tapping cycle cancellat
139. 8 command it is better to specify each axis Consider it based upon the N5 block in the following example 1 R es position Fig 4 3 1 1 1 The operation of the G28 block can be decomposed into following items Refer to the Fig 58 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 3 1 1 1 The current position positions to the intermediate point position Point A Point B of the command axis at the rapid traverse rate 2 Position to the reference position Point B Point R from intermediate point at the rapid traverse rate 2 G28 is one shot modal code which is only enabled to the current block 3 It is supported the referernce position return of the composition both the single or multi axis The coordinate of the intermediate point is registered into CNC when the coordinate coordinate is converted Example N1 G90 G54 XO Y10 N2 G28 X40 Setting the intermediate point on X axis is X40 at the G54 workpiece coordinate system return to the reference point by 40 10 that is the X axis is separately returned to the reference position N3 G29 X30 Return to the 30 10 via 40 10 from reference that is the X axis is returned to the destination alone SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q N4 G01 X20 N5 G28 Y60 Intermediate point Y60 N6 G55 The workpiece coordinate system conversion the intermediate point changes into the point 40 10 at the G55 coordinate system from the point 40 6
140. 8 coordinate system 80 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 4 7 Boring Cycle G85 Code format G85 X_Y_ Z_ R_F_K_ Function This cycle is used to bore a hole Explanations X_Y_ Hole position data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Repeated times H L ER Initial point Point R plane O Fig 4 4 7 1 Rapid traverse to point R after positioning along the X and Y axes and then perform a boring from point R to Z perform the cutting feed to return point R when reaching to the bottom of a hole Before specifying G85 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle When the G85 and the M code are specified at a same block perform the M code at the time of performing the 1 hole position operation The system then proceeds the next operation When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statemen
141. 9 9999 0399 Interpolation step length times 5 Setting range 1 0000 10 0000 0400 Shape matched parameter 20 Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 gt a mi z x lt O The shap matched parameter 400 is performed the shape optimization based upon the initial spline and the analysis shape error and control the error within the allowable range The greater the parameter is the greater the shape error is The smaller the parameter is the smaller the shape error is 0401 Shape matched limit 5 Setting range 1 0000 999 000 The shape matched limit parameter 401 can be restricted error fluctuation on shape due to the curvature optimization when the speed mating calculation is performed 0402 Speed matched parameter 403 gt D m z x lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 Speed matched parameter 402 is the curvature on curve which shows the radial shape along the normals of each point on the curve to optimize the curvature and smooth the speed The bigger the parameter is the lower the curvature optimization is and the greater the machining speed is the shorter the machining time is The smaller the parameter is the higher the curvature optimization is the longer the machining time IS 0403 The fitting section number of small line block Setting range 0 0020 999 0000 This parameter 4
142. 90 Parameter Y is still use the incremental method 2 Scaling The scaling is always expressed with the absolute method regardless of the current method is G90 or G91 The scaling can be set in parameter other than specifying in program data parameter P330 sets the scaling multiplication of each axis data parameter P331 P333 are separately corresponding to scaling of the 1 2 and 3 axis if the scaling codes are not performed here and when the bit 6 of parameter No 47 is set to 0 the scaling can be performed according to the setting value from the data parameter P330 when the bit 6 of No 47 is set to 1 the scaling is then performed based upon the setting value of data parameter P331 P333 If the parameter value of the parameters P or J and K are negative the 47 Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual corresponding axes are performed the image 3 Scaling setting Whether the scaling function is used by the bit 5 of parameter No 60 Whether the bit 3 of parameter No 47 sets the 1 axis is enabled Whether the bit 4 of parameter No 47 sets the 2 axis is enabled Whether the bit 5 of parameter No 47 sets the 3 axis is enabled bit 6 of parameter No 47 set the specification method of scaling override along with each axis 0 Using P commands each axis 1 Using l Jand K 4 Cancel the scaling After the scaling is cancelled by using the G50 code and when the moveme
143. ADIUS R 0045 FEED MIN DIS SCALING a 000A CIRCUL 0045 SAMPLE ANALYSE Te Press lt OR gt to select JE SAMPLE or ANALYSE E D nnee a E C 85741 PATH 1 RIGIDITY CIRCUL RETURN Fig 3 3 5 3 3 1 Note Measure the synchronism situation of the current each feed axis by the roundness testing tools after the rigid grade and parameter optimization function debugging are performed The roundness testing of each plane is within 6u which is regarded as the synchronism of current each servo axis is better the parameter debugging is successful accordingly 3 3 5 4 Double drive Debugging Tool The double drive offset generates during the operation of the system adjust some one axis for the double drive by the DOUBLE DRIVE DEBUGGING TOOL at last adjust the double drive parallel by observing whether the motor feedback current of the double drive is consistent or perform the parallelism 3 3 5 4 1 Double drive Function Setting When using the DOUBLE DRIVE DEBUGGING TOOL the data parameter P380 should be set to 1 3 1 The 4 axis is synchronic with the X axis 2 The 4 axis is synchronic with the Y axis 3 The 4 axis is synchronic with the Z axis also the bit 0 of parameter No 0 should be set to 1 which is treated as the bus transition method of the drive and it is necessary to debug in the MPG mode 3 3 5 4 2 Enter to Double drive Debugging Function SYSTEM In the double drive de
144. AL CURRENT MODAL Gao G49 F 500 GOO G49 F BIz G80 S 200 Giz G80 S G90 G98 M 05 09 G90 G98 M 30 G94 G15 T G94 61S T 0000 G54 G50 H 2000 G54 G5 H 2000 Gat G69 D 0000 G21 G69 D 2000 G40 G64 N 4 G40 G64 N al DATA PO Cs s C C C dY C 185 27 46 PATH 1 ooo RSTR oo Sooo SE RETURN Ta Fig 10 1 9 1 4 Shift to lt MDI gt mode enter the CUR MOD interface by pressing the CUR MOD softkey input the corresponding modal code and M code based upon the preload modal value in the Fig 10 1 9 1 D PROG RESTART 5 In the mode of returning the lt AUTO gt press the on the panel and then press the the program moves to the start That is the intervention point of the previous block of the interruption block according to the sequence before the coordinates 1 2 and 3 based upon the dry run speed and the machining is restarted again Explanations 1 The 1 2 and 3 before the coordinate syste is movement sequence of which each axis moves to the restart position of the program and its sequence is determined by data parameter P376 2 The single block is switched on when the coordinate system restarts the position movement the tool may stops after completing a axis direction movement The intervention can not be performed by shifting to the MDI mode during the execution 3 The movement method along Z axis can be controlled by bit O of parameter No 49 0 GOO 1 G01 N
145. ANDBY Poo fo Toes oao K ws CS Pos fo 0007 Pos fo Tooo K PATH 1 Co Fig 3 3 5 2 1 2 3 3 5 2 2 Modification and Setting of Spindle Parameter 1 Select the lt MDI gt operation mode ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z SETTING 2 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by _j set the parameter switch to 1 SYSTEM 4 Press the sr and then enter the parameter display screen by H SPINDLE PARAMETER softkey 4 Move the cursor to the selection axis parameter 0 input the password 315 Parameters 0 160 can be viewed and altered download the drive parameter to the system by input button and the servo parameter can be modified by SPINDLE PARAMETER interface 5 Move the cursor to the position where to be modified the parameter number Method 1 Display the page to be set the parameter by page up down or move the cursor by direction buttons and the position the parameter position where to be modified Method 2 Press the to position after inputting the parameter number 6 Input the new parameter value by numerical buttons Modify the parameters with different levels and the password authority of the corresponding level should be input accordingly 238 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting INPUT 7 Confirm it by men the parameter value is then input and the state column displays Successful for drive parameter download SAVE 8 Servo
146. Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List compensation along Z axis of the machine tool is performed Default 1 0 Setting range 0 50 0185 The friction compensation method along Z axis of 1 machine tool Setting range 0 50 0 Disabled 1 Up 2 Down 3 Up or Down 0186 The friction compensation value along Z axis of 0 5 machine tool mm Setting range 0 0 5 0187 Reverse interval compensation condition along Z 1 axis Default 1 Setting range 0 50 0188 Reverse interval compensation accumulation distance along Z axis Default 0 02 Setting range 0 0 5 0189 Reverse interval compensation condition along Z 0 0100 axis Default 1 gt E v m z x lt Setting range 0 0001 1 0000 mm Set a p 189 x 0 0001 after the feed is reversed single servo period feed value is more than a and the reverse interval compensation begins Ttherefore when the excircle outline with bigger radius is machined the least accuracy should be set for guard against that the compensation position does not deviate position of the pass quadrant In the machining curve surface to avoid each tool path is performed the reverse interval compensation at a fixed position so that a raised ridge occurs and therefore the bigger accuracy should be set to evenly distribute the interval compensation within a specified width 0190 The reverse interval compensation value of the 1 0 0000 axis Setting range Metric
147. Arc Helical interpolation G02 G03 nnnnnnnnnnnennneeeeeeneeneennnenneesnnnnnsssssssssssssssssssssssssserreens 28 4 2 4 Absolute Incremental Programming G90 G91 sseesenssnnnnnnnnnsennnenseeeresererrrerererrrrrrrsrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrereen 34 Ja ye Me GOA aes Salerno ic Race ee nae Seale taeda an Dated aia A 35 42 0 Single Direction Positonine G60 renses a a a O NA E A OANE TARE 36 42 1 system Parameter On Line Update as tex eecstuetvedes a aa ENEE a EA EEA a7 4 2 8 Workpiece Coordinate System G54 C5 dranie ol hoses aracsrededstete a senda tonsenued tadsneatuutinticual dees 38 4 2 9 Additional Workpiece Coordinate System cccccccccccssscceceeecececeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesseeeeeeeess 4 42 10 Machine Coordinate System Selection G53 ranei emae ieena a EEE E REE TE A 4 ADAM Floating Coordinate System 92 caaeaae ei Eeng EAE aE Eea AERE T TEE 42 AA Plane selection GIVIT S GITO an na e E E EA A E E ETEEN 44 4AT Polar Coordinate Stary Cancel G TOGT orrian inana e aE E REEERE EE nan 44 Akata Scaling Within Plane Go UG eaea e E a A D EEEE 46 AZAS Coordinate Systemi Rotation CO 8 GOO iarrar ai na eena ea EE E ESEA ED EEA EER ER 50 EO S E ON Gr aina a A E ETER TADE 54 A 2I7 Toch Metric Conversion Gi20 G21 2 8 c2 ceshatartteacs a e E E A R 56 4 2 18 Optional Angle Chamfering Corner Arc ccccccccccccccccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeess 56 A3 REIErence POSION G CO
148. Auto mode when the symbol locates at the beginning of the block the 317 ll SAINN TOA O U m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual program followed with the will perform the correction function regardless of whether the skip function is started or not 10 1 1 Establishment of Program 10 1 1 1 Automatic Generation of Sequence Number The Automatic sequence number sets to 1 based upon the Section 3 4 1 in OPERATION Refer to the Fig 10 1 1 1 1 PAR SWITCH 0 OFF 1 ON PRG SWITCH 0 OFF 1 ON KeyBoard 0 218MC H 1 218MC V 2 218MC IN UNIT 0 MM 1 INCH I O CHAN 0 Xon Xoff 1 XModem 2 USB AUTO SEQ 0 OFF 1 ON SEQ INC 1000 SEQ STOP PROGRAM NO SEQ STOP SEQUENCE NO DATE 2011 y 07 m __12 D TIME 10 H solm i3 s A INPUT 10 50 13 PATH 1 EWORK EDATA PASSWORD Fig 10 1 1 1 1 In this case the system will automatically insert a sequence number among blocks when the program is edited and the number incremental value of the sequence number can be set in the series number incremental value 10 1 1 2 Input of Program Content Z 1 Enter the Editing operation method by 2 Enter the program page display by Refer to the Fig 10 1 1 2 1 318 Chapter Ten Edit Operation G88 G90 GO XB YO ZO AQ G1 A 50 F500
149. Basis CHAPTER TWO PROGRAMMING BASIS 2 1 Controllable axis Table 2 1 1 Basis controllable axis number 3 axes X Y and Z Extension controllable axis number Up to 5 axes total Occasionally there is not alternative other than to use a additional axis because the structure design requirement for some machine tools such as the revolving worktable rotation worktable etc SINN TOA This axis can be set as both linear axis and rotation axis GSK218MC can be set each axis as linear y J O Q D gt Z Q oen or rotation one 2 2 Axis Name The names of the 3 basic axes are X Y Z and A by default The number of the controlled axes is set by data parameter P005 and the name of each additional axis such as A B and C is set by P175 P179 Note If the inputted axis name is repeated the system may automatically initialize as X Y Z Aand B 2 3 Axis Display When the additional axis is set as rotation one and the unit of the rotation axis displays as deg if it is set as linear one the display is identical with the basis 3 axes X Y and Z and its unit is mm The following figure shows that the 4 axis is regarded as the linear one and the 5 is treated as the rotation one SINN IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual FEED mm min PRG SPEED O WWW fF oven 200 a 46 88 120 168 200 Fo 25
150. Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code When K is used to specify the number of repeats the M code is executed for the first hole only for the second and subsequent holes the M code is not executed Note 1 In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement Note 2 When the bit 1 of parameter No 43 is 0 and there is no cutting value in peck drilling G73 G83 the alarm does not issue in this case fail to specify the code parameter Q or the Q is set to 0 the system performs the hole position at the X Y plane instead of executing the drilling operation When the bit 1 of parameter No 43 is 1 the alarm generates if there is no cutting value in peck drilling G73 G83 that is fail to specify the code parameter Q or the Q is set to 0 the system alarm prompts 0045 fail to find address Q or the Q value is 0 G73 G83 If the Q value is specified as negative the system then performs the intermittent feed based upon the absolute value Note 3 Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with r
151. Chapter Three Component Program Configuration The address is one of the English letters A Z which specifies the meaning of its following numerical value In this system the usable address and its meaning as well the resolution range are as the Fig 3 1 3 1 Occasionally one address owns different meanings based upon the variable preparation functions If two or more same addresses are displayed at a same code which is determined by bit parameter No 32 6 to alarm or not Table 3 1 3 1 Resolution range range Function meaning meaning A B a It is set ee data parameters Axle name address P175 179 Radius offset number DO is regarded as O 255 O by default user can neither set nor modify it pt use Notuse yet 0 001 99999 999 es 0 001 0001 500 mm Feedrate rev a 00 99 Preparation function a ae 99 Calculation symbol in G65 H Length offset number HO is treated as 0 O 255 by default User can neither set nor a mee The relative start of circular center is at 99999999 99999999 mm the X axis vector Circular arc helix interpolation Zoom in out shouls be more than the current G22 G23 groove radius inside circle tool radius Cutter radius lt 1s99999 999mm it is the G24 G25 G26 G32 finish milling radius absolute value when in the of the circle negative gt Data parameter P269 setting value cutter radius Width of G33 G34 rectangle
152. Control Area mo o eee gs m Ton gt om A D e g HAHU DOSAH F a nakd eS wm E AUTO f moi aa MPG BMANUAL STEP E onc Ecoounce LIGHT nx sonno Joe STOP 5 E RAPID g m g gr Op Pte D DILD AN FZ B iwx Ix h fel skp E Miaa Est ioxi ORY E sa E aoee foerman fwen aS sokas CCW EA Fig 1 2 6 1 GSK218MC U1 Machine tool control area The usages and function definitions of the basis buttons on the GSK218MC U1 machine tool control area are basically coincided with the GSK 218MC Here we just describe the differences between GSK218MC U1 and GSK218MC 204 Chapter One Operation Panel Remark amp Operation 2 2 99 Tool magazine Tool magazine There is no tool magazine operation button operation ON OFF relevant button from fb 4 218MC U1 T INFEED T RETRACTION Manual M a n u a i lifThere is no tool releasing clampin releasing clamping releasing clamping button g switch switch from 218MC U1 There is no manual tool Manual tool Complete th elchange button from change manual tool change 548MC U1 The shifting of Channel machining channel There is no function selection button This function does button for 218MC U1 not perform yet Auto MDI Mechanical Rapid override Rapid override Zzero MPG Single step manual single Manual and DNC The AN WU100 apyo4 i button function of 218MC R overrioe TUNI A
153. E Fig 3 7 4 Operation record can be display 34 pages and history alarm information can be shown 9 pages such as the alarm time alarm number alarm information page etc which can be viewed by page up down button 274 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting The record of history and record can be deleted The password level is the debugging or more DELETE than the debugging level by button 3 8 Program Control Display PLC Enter the program control display page by and there are 5 display interfaces in the page INFO HIPLCGRA HIPLCPAR PLCDGN and HJPLCTRACE which can be shifted by the corresponding softkey The concrete content is shown below Refer to the Fig 3 8 1 3 8 5 EXT FILE Ladder i MT MODEL 850 VERSION MC8 00 CONTRIVER GSK FILE NAME SIZE Steps LEY1 LEY2 MODIFY DATE ladder 155718 4414 117 4297 2011 06 10 15 11 O E Ic 5m 5 DATA 17 06 25 a oriras PATH 1 EPLCGRA amp PLCPAR PLCDGN PLCTRA Fig 3 8 1 y Faas 1 Faae 1 Faas 1 Faas 1 Faas 1 Kae 1 KOSA Faae 1 N MEA mT Emergency Stop DATA 7 16 24 49 PATH 1 INFO HPLCPAR PLCDGN HPLCTRACE Fig 3 8 2 215 GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual i l ESE Ee g DATA S18 25 089 PAH 1 3 8 Fig 3 VOLUME II OPERATI
154. ER PLC 00 01 11 20 35 0 01 28 07 03 OPARA PLC 00 01 11 20 41 00 01 01 04 42 O PARAMETER 00 01 01 04 46 0 01 20 05 58 O CUTTER COMP 2539 0 01 20 05 58 O PITCH COMP 581364 1 28 05 58 OMACRO YAR MACRO PRG PART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE 15 19 47 DATA Rd PATH 1 Fig 3 4 4 1 Operation method 1 Set the corresponding level password in the password interface by PASSWORD ll SINNIOA softkey Refer to the Setting and Modification of Password Authority in the Section 3 4 5 O U m gt O Z for the corresponding password level of each data operation 2 Enter the data treatment operation interface by HI DATA twice refer to the Fig 3 4 4 2 FILE NUM FILE ELSt CUR DISK CNC DISK LADDER PLC 92 90 01 20 07 03 OPARA PLC 488 00 01 01 04 42 549 00 01 01 04 46 O PARAMETER 298 90 01 20 05 58 2599 0 01 20 05 58 O CUTTER COMP 581364 00 01 20 05 58 OPITCH COMP OMACRO YAR OMACRO PRG PART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 080001 20 32 33 copy TO USB DISK New Name PATH 1 Fig 3 4 4 2 261 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Enter the next page L BA All Roow ALL our ue ner ALL a S i The function of each operation items are shown below Table 3 4 4 1 Table 3 4 4 1 Operation Function Explanation Item Separatly perform the data
155. Ethernet Setting range 0 99999 0364 Backup the consecutive times Unchangeable 0 without MDT package of the Ehternet Setting range 0 99999 0365 Backup the connection state Unchangeable without MDT package of the Ehternet Setting range 0 99999 0371 The reverse position tolerance along the 1 axis 0 0150 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0372 The reverse position tolerance along the 2 axis 0 0150 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0373 The reverse position tolerance along the 3 axis 0 0150 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0374 The reverse position tolerance along the 4 axis 0 0150 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0375 The reverse position tolerance along the 5 axis 0 0150 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm gt E v m z gt lt When the reverse interval compensation values P0190 P0193 set by one axis is more than the inversion position tolerances P0371 P0374 set by this axis one single unit end speed before the reverse interval compensation beginning of this axis reduces to the lowest speed so that the other axes within the interval compensation period moves a lesser position to ensure that the compound path is lesser deviated from the true path 401 er Jd Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0376 Each axis sequence moves to the program restart 12345 position Setting range 0 99999 Set the synchronized axis with the 4 one 0 no synchron
156. Fig 3 4 3 1 1 B Boss or groove 251 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual WORK MEAS MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE COORDINATE SEL S ABSOLUTE x a OPERATER STEP MANUAL MODE 1 WHEN MOVE TO P1 4 PRESS lt MEASURE gt Y an 2 PRESS lt START gt SET IT TO COORDINATE Z mm A G54 Pix a Ply CENTER Cx g Pax g Pay CENTER Cy g X mm P3x o P3y o 00A Y mm Pax Pay a Z mm A 15 21 49 PATH 1 SETTING WORK HIDATA PASSWORD Fig 3 4 3 1 2 Manual center operations A Option explanation 1 Measurement method 0 Manual 1 Auto 2 Workpiece type ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z 1 Hole or external circle 2 Boss or groove 3 Coordinate system selection S G54 G59 G54 P1 P50 Set the center to the desired coordinate system after the measurement is completed 4 Measure point A When the workpiece type is hole or external circle there are 3 measurement points P1 P3 and the measurement will perform without particular order wherein if there are 3 points are overlapped one of the point is regarded as the center coordinate if there are 3 points are shared with a same straight line the center coordinate can not be calculated and it is necessary to measure one of the point or the overall points again B When the workpiece type
157. GS eiciia nns E S EE E N 57 AS Reference Positon Remm G28 hersein eina E A E 58 4 3 2 2 43 and 4 Reference Position Retrun G30 ccccscscscscscscscscscseccecescecececscecacscasececscavavevavevevevens 59 4 3 3 Automatically Return from Reference Position G29 cccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees es 60 4 3 4 Reference Position Return Check G27 csiciec cassatacthiccieciataselewtinstheveleseiecasativetaselnsiasteatastiauaGaeavats 61 4 4 Canned Cycle G COO einen a A agi A A dese secdseashancasabnsedontsaates una Resieasa 61 4 4 1 High speed Peck Machining Cycle G73 ccccccccccccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeess 68 4 4 2 Drilling Cycle Spot Drilling Cycle G81 ioc secdcests eiessatecetocstesteteatesehesesGekisanestiorderte eavietebe Gativets 69 4 4 3 Drilling Cydle Counter Boring Cycle G82 cccccccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 71 Gr Wisi GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation BAA Peck rile Cy Cle G85 senses sansasucnindersn taut esaastnnndtercantaanWtasona EE E eed eneaaoanaaneee 73 dA Tappne C yele Gai Or GSA feoai ene Neon ORT RO Oa Nn PEON ena ene ee ee en eC 75 AAO Pine Dorna Cycle OTO Vacina a a earn A a a a a 79 7 We BONE YE E GS ea a a e a a ae eee en eee 81 A so OPMIN CY CLG C1 a ate ETA E EEE A E AE sea site E E AN ET A TE EA O A 82 AAO HoleCycle Back Borne Cycle G8T umainn a e e EE
158. GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual A X Y Z B I J K l X gt 1 Y gt J Z gt K X gt The least command incremental unit Y J gt The least command incremental unit Z K gt The least command incremental unit Fig 2 6 2 Establish or change the forbidden area by parameter When the forbidden area is set by setting the data parameter P76 P83 the data should be offered the distance output increment to the machine tool coordinate with the least command incremental unit 2 When the program is used G12 prohibts the cutter to enter the forbidden area G13 allows the cutter to enter the forbidden area Each G12 in program should be specified by a separated block the following commands are used for establishing or changing the forbidden area F m on gt om o G12 X YZ IJK A X Y Z B 1 J K X gt 1 Y gt JN Z gt K X I gt The least command incremental unit Y J gt The least command incremental unit Z K gt S The least command incremental unit Fig 2 6 3 Establish or change the forbidden area by program The distance input increment in the machine tool coordinate system is specified by the least input incremental unit based upon the setting of the G12 The programmed data is the digit value of the least code unit converted from the least incremental unit and this value is then set in the parameter Example The
159. INN 1IOA O U m gt O Z FEED mm min MPG INC 8 001 FEED OYRD 188 o mm 40 98 120 160 200 Fa 25 5A 100 aaa ee J SP 8 rpm Y Y UUW soo m 100 5A 66 78 88 396 108110120 cs Z 0 0000 jam COMMAND T NO T 000 OFFSET H 808 DAOA G G17 G90 G94 G21 G40 G49 654 PART CNT 0014 0014 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 00O 0O a E 50 510 E PATH 1 a ABS ALL PMONI MONI Fig 9 2 1 2 Select the X Y Z 4 or 5 axis to be returned the mechanical zero the zero return direction is determined by bit 0 4 of parameter No 7 3 Machine moves along with the mechanical zero point The machine moves The movement 311 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual speed is determined by data parameter P100 P104 P100 P104 rapidly before the deceleration point The data parameters P342 P346 are set the zero return speed along each axis after touching the deceleration switch The speed of FL It determines by data parameter P099 moves to mechanical zero that is reference point after departing from the stopper The coordinate axis stops to move and zero return indicator lights on after returning to the mechanical poont For example The 1 axis common incremental zero return is regarded as an example the 1 axis begins to impact the stopper with the higher speed F4000 Data parameter P100 sets as 4000 and then pass the stopper based upon
160. INPUT 5 Confirm that the numerical value is input and displayed by wu 3 3 4 Display Modification and Setting of Ptich Compensation 3 3 4 1 Pitch Compensation Display ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z Enter the pitch compensation interface by PITCH COMPENSATION softkey the pitch compensation interface is as follows Refer to the Fig 3 3 4 1 1 ME a E a ooga 0001 0002 0003 0004 0086 0007 8088 ws o o 0010 on o o gt v InpuT 10 49 87 ey a 3 Fig 3 3 4 1 1 231 ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 3 4 2 Modification and Setting of Pitch Compensation 1 The pitch error compensation number of each axis is set by data parameters P216 P220 the pitch error compensation interval is set by data parameters P226 P230 2 In the lt MDI gt input the compensation amount of each point in turn Note Refer to the INSTALLATION amp CONNECTION of the Chapter Four in GSK218MC CNC System PLC amp Installation Connection Manual for the setting of the pitch compensation 3 3 5 Display Modification and Settong of Bus Servo Parameter SYSTEM Enter the system page by sr display the E BUS CONFIGURATION sub interface by its corresponding softkey shifting Refer to the following figure Fig 3 3 5 1 BUS OR NOT 1 AXIS EX CARD ENCODER TYPE GRATING TYPE MAX
161. IRI 1 The 1 axis feed directionisreverse 0 The 1 axis feed direction is positive DIR2 1 The 2 axis feed direction is reverse 0 The 2 axis feed direction is positive DIR3 1 The 3 axis feed direction is reverse 0 The 3 axis feed direction is positive DIR4 1 The 4 axis feed direction is reverse 0 The 4 axis feed direction is positive DIR5 1 The 5 axis feed direction is reverse 0 The 5 axis feed direction is positive Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 004 SKO STME TMES TMES 1 Tool setter is already installed 0 Tool setter does not install STME 1 Tool length measurement value can be written into the reference offset 0 Tool length measurement value can not be written into the reference offset gt SKO 1 SKIP is regarded as signal input when it is set to O a 0 SKIP is regarded as signal input when it is set to 1 m g Standard setting 0000 0000 gt lt System parameter number 0 0 5 DOUS HSRZ ISC ISC 1 The least movement unit 0 0001mm amp deg 0 00001inch 0 The least movement unit 0 001mm amp deg 0 0001inch HSRZ 1 High speed zero return is enabled 0 High speed zero return is disabled DOUS 1 Dual drive tool uses the grating position 0 Dual drive tool does not use the grating position Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 06 MAOR ZPLS SIOD SJZ AZR
162. JAX MOD ZRN 348 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 1 Reference point does not establish specify the code other than G28 in Auto operation system alarms 0 Reference point does not establish specify the code other than G28 in Auto operation system does not alarm ZMOD 1 Zero return mode selection Before the block 0 Zero return mode selection After the block 1 The control axis at the same time of the manual reference point return Gi single axis 0 The control axis at the same time of the manual reference point return multiplication axes AZR 1 The G28 command when the reference point does not establish Alarm 0 The G28 command when the reference point does not establish Use the block SJZ 1 Reference point memories 0 Reference point does not memory 1 Mechanical zero return deceleration signal performs via PLC logic oer calculation 0 Mechanical zero return deceleration signal directly reads ZPLS 1 Zero return method selection with one turn signal 0 Zero return method selection without one turn signal MAOB 1 Zero return method selection without one turn signal B method 0 Zero return method selection without one turn signal A method Standard setting 1110 0001 System parameter number 010 7 pen ZMI4 ZMI3 ZMI2 ZMI1 ZMI1 1 Set the 1 axis reference point return direction gt a mi z x lt 0 Set the 1 axis
163. L2 PXYZAB Setand alter the external zero offset value or the workpiece zero offset value G10L10P_R_ Set or alter the length offset value G10L11 P_R_ Set or alter the length wore value G10L12P_R_ Set or alter the radius offset value G10L13P_R_ Set or alter the radius wore value G10L20P_X_Y ZA B _ Setoralter the additional workpiece zero offset value Note 1 In the parameter input method do not specify other NC statements other than the note one Note 2 The G10 should be separately specified in block otherwise the alarm may occur It is necessary to cancel the parameter input method by G11 after using the G10 so as not to affect the normal use for the program Note 3 The parameter value altered by G10 should be met the range of the system parameter if does not the alarm will issue Note 4 It is essential to cancel the modal code of the canned cycle before operating the G10 otherwise the system may alarm Note 5 The parameter should be restarted after the power is turned off that can not be modified by G10 Note 6 G20 G21 can not be used the on line alteration by G10 Note 7 G10 on line alters the external zero offset value workpiece zero offset value additional workpiece zero offset value and tool offset value when it is modified in the G91 modal the commanded offset and the current one will be overlapped by system in the G90 modal it is modified based upon the specified offset value Note 8 Cancle G10 modal when
164. M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded 70 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Example M3 S2000 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G81 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 10 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to initial position plane y G80 A O lt G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference position T O Cc M5 Spindle rotation stop gt zZ 2 lt m M30 s e Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G81 command the system then performs the G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is reg
165. O Q 7 gt Z Q Explanation Cancel the overall canned cycles and then perform the normal operation at the same time the point R and Z are cancelled as well the other drilling boring data are eliminated too Example M3 S100 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to the point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to the point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to the point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to the point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to the point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to the initial position plane G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference position and then cancel the canned cycle M5 Spindle rotation stop M30 For example The following figure uses the tool length compensation which are expressed the usage of the canned cycle totally 113 SINN 1IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Reference position Unit mm A 1 6 drill 10 hole 7 10 drill O20 hole 11 13 bore 095 hole x Position return 250 Start position X Unit mm 30 0 Fig 4 6 7 1 The value of offset No 11 is 200 No 15 is 190 and No 31 is 150 which are separately set as the offset The program are shown below N001 G92 X0 YO ZO
166. OD 1 CUR NXT and LIST which can be viewed and altered Enter the program page display by the k by the corresponding softkeys refer to the Fig 3 2 1 is as follows 1 Program display Enter the program display page by H PROGRAM softkey in this page the program at the page of the block is being performed that displays inside the memory Refer to the Fig 3 2 1 221 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G92 XB YO ZO N1 2 G G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 51500 M8 N1808 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 11 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 M30 DATA aal 09 08 06 PATH 1 ee o oojo m Fig 3 2 1 Press the H PROGRAM again the editing and modification pages of the program are shown in this interface Refer to the Fig 3 2 2 G92 X0 YO ZO N1 2 G G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 51500 M8 N1808 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 11 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X
167. ON a E 25 28 PPT 1 4 8 Fig 3 276 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting SAMPLING MODE TIME CYCLE SIGNAL TRANSITION RESOLUTION 8 8ms 1000ms TIME 819290 1080 ms 81920ms STOP CONDITION NONE BUFFER FULL TRIGGER TRIGGER ADDRESS unknown MODE RISING EDGE FALLING EDGE BOTH EDGE SAMPLING CONDITION TRIGGER ANY CHANGE TRIGGER ADDRESS MODE unknown RISING EDGE FAIIING EDGE BOTH EDGE ON OFF DATA fed 17 08 05 PATH 1 Fig 3 8 5 The modification methods and relevant information for the PLC ladder diagram are shown in the GSK 218MC CNC System PLC amp Installation Connection Manual 3 9 Help Display Enter the help display page by there are eight display interfaces in this page L SYSTEM INFORMATION J OPERATION TABLE JK ALARM TABLE J G CODE TABLE J PARAMETER TABLE MACRO COMMAND JI PLC AD I COUNTER which can be viewed by its corresponding softkey The displayed content shows below Refer to Fig 3 9 1 3 9 12 1 System information interface Enter the system information interface by SYSTEM INFORMATION softkey in lt HELP gt interface refer to the Fig 3 9 1 IFY DATE NAME VERSION NO eesmenm vs warowne ven yas INTERPOLATION ver oeoo pc sormmare vea MDL KEYBOARD VER OPRAT KEYBOARD VER DATA f 17 08 27 PATH 1 241 ll SINNIOA O U m gt
168. OWware Overtravel DETEDSE vaicadhssicscansecsed versione eseueshtrssoieeseesed oe ones EEE EE I EEEE E A ei 210 293 Releasing of Overtravel Alaf Meerssen aS Guat sone Go 211 20 STOKE IMSDSCUOM uena a a a a a E 211 CHAPTER THREE INTERFACE DISPLAY amp DATA MODIFICATION AND SETTING 215 S1 Postion Display oeereronan a E S E E 215 3 1 1 Four Methods of Position Page Display scccciscccscscvccevccesvessecewcstensis Vensu tee cvvvanbsesstebecadesseteiosesabecavseedes 215 3 1 2 Display Machining Time Component Numbers Programming Speed Override and Acutal Speed Ee manosa a N O ves faaeioer tema oneetea a 217 3 1 3 Relative Coordinate Clearand Middleeigromnsrn o a a a a 219 3 4 Bus Monitonne Position Pace Display esimes a a a ai 220 22 Program DIS 9 1 eee a a e a 221 3S OV Ce A DISP a V ae E A E A TS 225 3 3 1 Display Modificationand Seting of OSet e a a 229 Soki DISpayV OP ONSE aina a A a OO 225 3 3 1 2 Modification and Setting of Offset Value oo cccccccessssececeeesseeeceesssseeeeeeessseeeeeens 227 3 3 2 Display Modification and Setting of Parameter cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 221 S321 Parameter Display acaron enn a E E T OA 227 3 3 2 2 Modification and Setting of Parameter Value cece ccccssseccceeessseeeceeessseeeeeeessseeeeeens 229 3 3 3 Display Modification and Setting of Macro Variable cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 229 3 3 5 1 Displ
169. Operation O System in Moving E Block end position along X Workpiece axis ABSIO coordinate Block end position along Y system 5002 axis ABSIO Tool Compensation Value Take no consider of the tool point position 151 SINN TOA 2 ry O Q D gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Block end position along Z program 5003 axis ABSIO specified Block end position along 4 osition 5004 i j axis ABSIO enna Block end position along X axis ABSMT Block end position along Y Machine axis ABSMT tool Block end position along Z coordinate axis ABSMT system Block end position along 4 axis ABSMT Block end position along X axis ABSOT Block end position along Y axis ABSOT Block end position along Z axis ABSOT Block end position along 4 axis ABSOT coordinate Block end position along X 5016 system axis ABSKP Block end position along Y 5017 axis ABSKP Can Block end position along Z 5018 axis ABSKP Block end position along 4 5019 axis ABSKP Tool length compensation 5021 Can not value along X axis Tool length compensation 5022 value along Y axis Tool length compensation 5023 value along Z axis Tool length compensation 5024 EA value along 4 axis 5007 5008 5009 Can not 5011 Conside of the SINN TOA 5012 tool reference y ry O Q D gt Z Q poi
170. Programming amp Operation Manual The power of machine tool should be cut off immediately in case of emergency during the operation of the machine for avoiding an accident However it is very important to note that the system coordinate may offset to the actual position after the power is turned off and therefore the operations such as the zero tool setting etc should be performed again Note Refer the operation for cutting off the machine power based upon the Machine Tool User Manual manufactured by the factory 2 3 Safety Operation 2 3 1 Resetting Operation The system is on the resetting state after pressing 1 The movement of overall axes are stopped 2 M function stops 3 Modify the bits 1 7 of parameter No 35 and bits 0 7 of parameter No 36 set whether the G codes of each group is reserved after resetting 4 Modify the bit 7 of parameter No 34 set whether cleans the F H and D codes after reseeting 5 Modify the bit of parameter No 28 set whether delects the compiled program after resetting in the MDI mode 6 Modify the bit 3 of parameter No 10 set whether cancels the relative coordinate system after resetting 7 Modify the bit 7 of parameter No 10 set whether the resetting cursor turns to the beginning of the program in the non compiled method 8 Modify the bit 7 of parameter No 52 set whether cleans the macro program local variable 1 50 after resetting 9 Modify the bit 6 of parameter No 5
171. RT PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 000001 28 32 33 copy TO USB DISK New Name PATH 1 CNC USB COPY DEL RETURN Fig 11 2 2 3 d If the CNC program file does not need to be renamed it can be directly copied by lt INPUT gt button If the CNC program file should be renamed input the new program number For example O10 0100 by lt CANCEL gt and the CNC program file then can be copied by lt INPUT gt again If the system disk stores at the program file with a same name the system may prompt RENAME AGAIN therefore it is necessary to input the new program numbers for example O10 0100 and then the CNC program file can be copied by lt INPUT gt button Note The LADCHI TXT file is disabled after transferring to the system it can be enabled after the power is turned off gt U v m z x lt 3 Delete a file from system disk U disk a Move the cursor by or select the CNC program file in the system disk U disk to be deleted b Confirm deleting the current file prompts at the botoom of the interface by DELET Jsoftkey cancle the file deletion by lt CANCEL gt the file is deleted by lt INPUT gt button 11 2 3 USB DNC Machine Operation Steps 1 In the lt Setting gt interface set the I O channel to 2 Refer to the Section 3 4 1 in OPERATION for details 2 Insert the U disk 3 The system shifts to DNC mode by lt DNC gt button in this case pro
172. Refer to the Fig 10 1 1 G92 XO YO ZO N102 G G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 230 M3 51500 M8 Nipo Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 817 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 M3 PATH 1 BSED B6END CHECK SAVE REUN gt Press P to enter the next page O 4 O OREPLADE OUT COY PASTE RETURN gt Press gt to enter the next page 3 Pres lt lt to enter the next page REPLACE OUT COPY PASTE RETURN gt Fig 10 1 1 gs m Jc A O T o Each operation such as the replacement cutting copy paste and restart etc can be performed by pressing the corresponding softkey Before the program is compiled the editing operation can only be performed by opening the program switch Refer to the Section 3 4 1 for details Note 1 The top lines of single program file are 100 thousand lines Note 2 Refer to the Fig 10 1 1 when the initial symbol of the block is more than 1 the system still skips this block even if the skip function does not start Note 3 The other methods can not be shifted during the correction is performed in the Auto mode otherwise the unexpected circumstance may occur Perform the correction function in
173. Repeated times if required 75 SINN 1IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or IS GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G74 G98 G74 G99 Initial point plane positive Spindle negative Initial point plane r a Spindle negative Spindle positive Point R plane Spindle R positive P Spindle negative P Point R plane Spindle negative lt q Spindle positive Fig 4 4 5 1 When specifying the G74 spindle performs the tapping CW When specifying G84 the spindle is CCW the dwell is performed when it reaches to the bottom of the hole then the spindle is rotated along with a reverse direction simultaneously the feedrate specified by program retracts the tapping axis so that the screw occurs Example G94 M29 S1000 G43 G44 H10 G90 G99 G74 G84 X100 Y110 Z 50 R5 P3000 F100 topoint R Y150 76 Feed min Spindle exact stop specify the spindle speed Call the tool length compensation Positioning tapping hole 1 then return Positioning tapping hole 2 then return topoint R Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G91 X50 K5 It performs along with X axis based upon the reference point X100 Y150 50mm means that the incremental unit performs the tapping for 5 times G98 Y 750 Positioning tapping hole 8 then return to the initial point G80 Cancel the tapping cycle G2
174. Selection button in manual single step mode Selection button in manual mode Selection button in MPG mode Selection button in DNC Optional switch in block Single block switch Enter the editing operation method Enter the Auto operation method Enter the MDI operation method Enter the mechanical zero operation method Enter the manual single operation method Enter the manual operation method Enter the MPG operation method Enter the DNC operation method Whether the at the beginning of a block is skip the indicator is ON when opening program then skips Program single block consecutive operation state shifting it is single operation when he indi ris ON Shift to the editing method in Auto MDI and DNC operation mode the system decelerates to stop after operating the current block System selects the internal memory program Shift to the MDI mode in Auto the system decelerates to stop after operating the current program hift to zero mode in Auto he system is immediately decelerated to stop Shift to the single mode in Auto the system is immediately decelerated to stop Shift to manual mode in Auto the system is immediately decelerated Shift to the manual method in Auto the system is immediately decelerated to the system decelerates to stop after performing the current block Auto MDI DNC Auto MDI DNC Chapter One Operation Panel Remark amp
175. Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Tool center path Programmed G42 k N5 G01 G91 X500 Y 700 N6 G41 G02 J 500 N7 G42 G01 X500 Y700 In this case tool center path is not an arc instead of section arc from P1 to P2 In some conditions the alarm may be checked out due to the interference If we hope that the tool moves along the whole circle it is necessary to specify it with section Fig 4 7 3 10 6 Compensation cancellation in dwell In the compensation mode when the G28 G30 code can be specified by bit 2 of parameter No 40 whether the compensation is cancelled temporarily at the intermediate point a G28 automatic reference position return SINN TOA In the compensation mode if the G28 is commanded and the compensation will be cancelled at the intermediate point the compensation mode is automatically recovered after the y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q reference position is turned G28 s Origin Programmed Tool center path path Fig 4 7 3 11 b G29 automatically returns from reference origin In the compensation mode if the G29 is specified and the compensation will be cancelled at the intermediate point the compensation mode is automatically recovered when returning the specified point by G29 Immediately specify it followed with G28 G28 Intermediate point G00 Fig 4 7 3 12 134 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code
176. T RETURN Fig 3 4 2 1 Additionally there are 50 addition workpiece coordinate systems can be used other than 6 standard workpiece coordinate systems G54 G59 Refer to the Fig 3 4 2 2 Each coordinate system can be checked or altered by page up down button The operation of the additional coordinate system refer to the Section 4 2 9 Additional Workpiece Coordinate System in PROGRAMMING MACHINE G58 G59 X om X mm x mm Y min Y mm Y mm Z ee Z mm Z mm EXT G54 P 1 G54 Pa2 x af XQ BBO m X Q Y o yi mm Y mm Z rin Z mm Z mm INPUT 10 50 34 PATH 1 BAUTOMEAS INPUT INPUT RETURN Fig 3 4 2 2 249 ll SAIN TOA O 9 m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 2 There are two methods of coordinate input 1 After entering this interface in any mode move the cursor to the coordinate system to be changed and press the axis name from the desired setting value and then confirm it by INPUT m the value of the current machine coordinate system sets to the origin of the G coordinate system for example press X then or X0 and then again The system may then automatically input the X axis machine coordinate of this point in INPUT addition for example input X10 X 10 then press the w it means the X machine tool coordinate value is 10
177. TL 1 The interlocking of the overall axes are enabled 0 The interlocking of the overall axes are disabled ZRS 1 The zero point signal is subject on the machine coordinate 0 The zero point signal is subject on the absolute encoder MAPC 1 Select the absolute encoder Multi coil 0 Select the absolute encoder Single coil APC 1 Use an absolute encoder 0 Do not use an absolute encoder UHSM 1 Directly set the machine zero by manual 354 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0 The machine zero can not be directly set by manual Standard setting 1000 0000 System parameter number 02 1 APZ5 APZ4 APZ3 APZ2 APZ1 APZ1 1 The current machine position of the 1 axis sets to zero 0 The current machine position of the 1 axis does not set to zero APZ2 1 The current machine position of the 2 axis sets to zero 0 The current machine position of the 2 axis does not set to zero APZ3 1 The current machine position of the 3 axis sets to zero 0 The current machine position of the 3 axis does not set to zero APZ4 1 The current machine position of the 4 axis sets to zero 0 The current machine position of the 4 axis does not set to zero APZ5 1 The current machine position of the 5 axis sets to zero 0 The current machine position of the 5 axis does not set to zero Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 2 2 DAL DAL 1
178. The deceleration method in spindle stop is determined by the machine tool manufacturer Generally it is the energy consumption brake 172 Chapter Five Miscellance Function M Code 5 1 3 Cooling ON OFF M08 M09 Code M08 control the ON of the cooling water pump M09 control the OFF of the cooling water pump In the Auto mode the water pump control code does not execute if the miscellaneous function locking is performed 5 1 4 AAxis Releasing Clamping M10 M11 Code M10 A axis releasing M11 A axis clamping 9 1 5 Tool Control Tool releasing Tool Clamping M16 M17 Code M16 tool releasing control M17 tool clamping control SINN TOA 5 O Q D gt Z Q 5 1 6 Spindle Orientation Cancellation M18 M19 Code M18 spindle orientation cancels M19 spindle orients for using the tool change positioning 5 1 7 Tool searching Code Command M21 M22 Code M21 the tool searching code in cutter return M22 the tool searching code in capturing a new tool 5 1 8 Tool magazine Return Code Command M23 M24 Code M23 tool magazine swings to the code of spindle position M24 tool magazine swings to code of original position 5 1 9 Rigid Tapping M28 M29 Code M28 cancel the rigid tapping M29 rigid tapping 173 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 5 1 10 Helical Chip removal Con
179. The general precautions for compensation a Command compensation value The compensation value is specified the compensation value number by D code The D code is always enabled till another one is specified or cancelled the compensation once it is specified D code also is not only used for specifying the compensation value to the cutter compensation but also for the offset value of tool offset b Compensation value alteration Usually when the tool change is performed the compensation value should be altered in the cancellation mode If the compensation value is changed in the compensation mode a AS new compensation value will be calculated at then end of the block a6 Compensation Compensation E e value Yn value a calculation in calculation in m block N6 fa block N7 gt O N Programmed path Fig 4 7 3 24 c The of compensation and tool center path The G41 and G42 in the program will be exchanged if the compensation value is negative If the tool center moves along the workpiece outer side the compensation value may move along the inner side vice versa The following figure shows that the compensation value is when the program is performed When the tool path Fig a is programmed if the compensation value is negative and the tool center moves as Fig b vice versa Therefore the male form or female form can be cut at the same program and its interval can be adjusted by
180. The start position of X Y plane Z Machining depth it is absolute position in G90 it is the position related to the R reference 105 SINN 1IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual surface in G91 R R reference surface position it is the absolute position in G90 it is the position related to the start of this block in G91 I Fine milling circle radius J The distance between the fine milling start and the circle edge D Tool compensation number take out the corresponding tool compensation value based upon the offered series number K Repeated times If required Cycle processes 1 Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Descend to point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 The transition arc 1 is regarded as path to perform arc interpolation from the start 5 Perform the whole circle interpolation based upon the path of the arc 2 and 3 6 The transition arc 4 is regarded as path to perform the arc interpolation and then return to the start 7 Return to initial point plane or point R plane based upon the different specifications of G98 or G99 Code path G26 Excircle fine milling cycle CCW G32 ene tenn cycle CW Y Excircle boundar K Cutter center path Cutter center path Fig 4 6 3 1 Explanation The interpolaton both the tr
181. ZO N102 G G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 51500 M8 N108 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 X74 608 Y 48 274 Z 26 DATA Co l ra Fig 7 11 1 Enter the program background editing interface by B EDITING softkey the editing of the program is indentcial under the editing mode Refer to the CHAPTER TEN PROGRAM EDITING OPERATION of the OPERATION MANUAL save and retreat from this interface by B EDITING ll SAIN IOA O 5 a 5 O Z editing program Note 1 It is suggest that the background editing file size is less than 3000 lines otherwise the machining result may be affected Note 2 The background editing can be opened the foreground program instead of editing or delecting the foreground program Note 3 The background editing can not compile the operating foreground program 305 er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual ll SAIN IOA O U m gt O Z 306 Chapter Eight MDI Operation CHAPTER EIGHT MDI OPERATION System can be both performed the MDI parameter modification or offset etc and offered the MDI operation function in the MDI mode and it can
182. a hole simultaneously it retreats from the hole at the rapid traverse during feed and then eliminate the cutting chip The operation schematic shows in the figure 4 4 1 1 Explanations X Y Hole position data Z Incremental programming means specify the distance form point R to the bottom of a hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of a hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of the point R Q_ Depth of cut for each cutting feed F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Number of repeats G73 G98 G73 G99 Initial point plane SS l Fig 4 4 1 1 Z R Parameters both the Z and R at the bottom of a hole will be simultaneously absented when performing the 1 drilling and then the system executes the operation along Z axis Q When the code parameter Q is specified the above mentioned intermittent feed is then performed In this case the system is retracted based upon the clearance d Fig 4 4 1 1 set in the data parameter P270 Each time for feed the tool intermittently performs the retraction of that distance d at the rapid traverse rate When the G73 code and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first positioning operation The system then proceeds to the next drilling operation 68
183. able page Enter the user variable interface by USER VARIABLE softkey Refer to the Fig 3 3 3 1 1 229 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0o00 foots a OT Poo Cf ce a o fos os o SSS S K ns 207 mt soos Ci ooo fe 2010 fo ee n NOTE ALWAYS NULL profs 16 56 48 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 3 1 1 2 System variable page Enter the system variable page by SYSTEM VARIABLE Refer to the Fig 3 3 3 1 2 ll SINN TOA O 9 m 5 O Z 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1013 1021 1011 NOTE INPUT INTERFACE SIGNAL INPUT fd 18 57 03 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 3 1 2 Refer to the Section 4 7 2 Macro Variable in PROGRAMMING for the explanation and usage of the macro variable 230 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting 3 3 3 2 Modification and Setting of Macro Variable 1 Select the lt MDI gt operation mode SYSTEM 2 Press the sr then E MACRO VARIABLE softkey to enter the macro variable display page 3 Move the cursor to the position where the variable number to be modified Method 1 Display the page to be set the variable by page up down button move the cursor bu direction buttons and then position the variable place to be modified Method 2 Press the to position after inputting the variable number 4 Input a new numerical value by number buttons
184. aceaue e a e E 336 TEZ WUSBECOMmNaNCa UON aoe E A E E E 338 E D TSR a Oa a a a a a a A T 338 12 2 USB Component Program Operation Steps cietais eenei a a ee aae Ea A Ea aa 339 11 23 USB DNC Machine Operation Sieps ssi ices ele ee ee 341 E24 Retreat inom U Disk Operation Miter acean a e a a ea E tices 342 AFF ENDIK oa E E O T ER 343 APPENDIX ONE GSK218MC SERIES PARAMETER LIST eeesseeccccssccccccoseseccccssccccccsecccccsseee 345 XIV Gr Wisi GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Parameter Explanation Se eee eT ee ee TTL Te ae ee ET eR Ne ER Ne AT eae eee TT eT Se eRe EEE A ee 345 DIES hid cron ish O ene me eRe ER Ree eee A ee ween Oe Eee ER as en Oe a te Pee Et AOE Teen ee eee ie 346 OPED Fei ce 20 oc ee AE OE EE Oe Te Ne a eee Ee Be nL EEA EAA EEN E SEE PRE ROL E 368 Appendix Two Alarm List SINN TOA ry O Q D gt Z Q VOLUMEI PROGRAMMING Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q XVII ChapterOne Summary CHAPTER ONE SUMMARY 1 1 Product Brief GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System is a kind of upgraded product of GSK218M which uses the high velocity spline interpolation calculation the machining velocity accuracy and the fineness of the surface are greatly enhanced accordingly the newly designed man machine interface is more beatiful friendly and useful w
185. adius performs in program and when the machining of this section difference is specified by arc machining the normal tool center path of compensation then becomes opposite to the program direction In this case the initial vector is omitted and the tool moves to the 2 vector linearly Single block stops here The automatic operation may continue if the machining is performed regardless of the single mode If the section difference is straight line the alarm will not issue instead of cutting correctly but the end of cutting section may be remained Linear movement Single block end Tool center _ path Programmed Arc center path The over cutting may E occur if the initial vector The initial vector is does not omit omitted SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Fig 4 7 3 28 Cutter compensation start and movement along the Z axis Generally when the machining is started and after the cutter compensation is enabled tool moves a section of distance from the workpiece along with Z axis If the movement along the Z axis is divided into rapid feed and cutting feed based upon the above mentioned conditions refer to the following programs If it is the block N3 movement code along Z axis It is divided into as the follows N1 G91 G00 G41 X500 Y500 D01 N3 Z 250 N5 G01 Z 50 F1 N6 Y100 F2 N6 Y100 F2 N6 also enter to the buffering area when performing N3 The correction N3 Movement compensa
186. ae This manual describes the various matters concerning the operations of this CNC system as much as possible However it is impossible to give detailed descriptions to all the unnecessary or unallowable operations due to space limitation and product specific applications Therefore the matters not specially described herein should be considered as impossible or unallowable ae This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights are reserved It is illegal for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability 4 this User Manual is suitable for the GSK CNC EQUIPMENT CO LTD Gr Wisk GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation The following CNC System are manufactured by GSK LCD dimension is default as 10 4 inch LCD dimension is default as 8 4 inch GSK218MC GSK218MC U1 LCD dimension is default as 10 4 inch GSK218MC H2 LCD dimension is default as 10 4 inch GSK218MC V LCD di default as 8 4 inch Wherein GSK218MC GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V are provided with three kinds of communication interfaces such as the RS232 USB and network which are set at the front face of the host GSK218MC U1 owns only two communication interfaces such as the RS232 and USB USB interface sets on the front face of the host and RS232 sets at the back of the host Security W
187. alue H input by mm 999 999 mm 999 999mm Compensation value H input by inch 39 3700 inch 39 3700 inch Offset No 00 means that HOO is corresponding with the offset value 0 which can not be set in i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q system Notice When the offset value is changed due to the offset number only the new offset value replaces the old one instead of adding For example POTo e eE offset value 20 PLO ARE E A EE O T offset value 30 G90 G43 Z100 H01 naaa Z moves to 120 G90 G43 Z100 H02 _ Z moves to 130 3 The effective sequence of offset number The current offset number will be immediately enabled once the length offset modal is set up However the new offset value will immediately replace the old one if the offset number is changed Oxxxxx G43 Z10 H01 1 Offset number H01 is enabled G44 Z20 H02 2 Offset number H02 is enabled Z30 H03 3 Offset number HO3 is enabled G49 4 Cancel the tool offset at the end of this block M30 4 Cancel the tool length compensation 117 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Cancel the tool compensation by G49 or HOO The system will immediately cancel the tool length compensation after G49 is specified The compensation axis address and compensation should be compiled followed with the HOO otherwise the tool length compensation can not be cancelled Notice 1 The method B of tool length offset i
188. an 175 S20 Propran Optional Dwell CMO ieee a a aa 175 5 2 4 Program Calls Subprogram Code Command M98 cccccccsssessesssessssesseeeeeessesssssssssssssessseaaags 175 5 2 5 Program nds and Riis M99 Jiasi addudeneat sot oedeae Meee eauaeind Haaeteengateaoes 175 CHAPTER SIX SPINDLE FUNCTION S CODE sessssssceccccssssccceccccssssccceososssssececeoossssseceesoossso 177 Ol Spindle Analog CONTO erae e A A EA eonacssessaettanauss 177 6 2 Spindle Switch Value Control aani a AA adel tadett A A 177 6 3 Constant Surface Cutting Speed Control G96 G97 ee cccccccceesssseeeeeessseeceeesssseeeeeessseeeeeens 178 Llist CHAPTER SEVEN FEED FUNCTION F CODES 0 cssssssssseccccccrssssccssccccscccsssssssscooees 183 Tal TRADIG AWAY CSOs cdesthdetcu cies A EEA 183 2 CUNO DEE ae a E E EE awe cranes E EAE T 183 T22 Feed per Rey Olio GOD oeie A a E A 184 7 0 Tangential Speed GContol erriren hasn E A ETE E e E T E 185 LA Feedrat e Ov ride BUNOM eroriren nn E E E 186 7 5 Automatic Acceleration Deceleration cc ccsssccsssccsssccssrccsstecseccssccesnsessnccesasenseceneassensccesacsees 186 7 6 Acceleration Deceleration Treatment at Corner Of BIOCK oe ccc ceseeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeens 187 CHAPTER EIGHT TOOL FUNC TION siisiusccasevsscssceesccasicieerecstetcccsdaveccesanseccddavescesepetccsddeniecsaseesee 189 Oat OO aUGNCULOM seere scenectasen cn lace te are nacataatcie seeeadaes tanatee se cue
189. an the R plane 0049 In the canned cycle Z plane should be lower than the R plane 0050 The position should be moved when changing the canned cycle method Improper movement operation or move distance is specified in block followed 0051 with the chamfering round angle or chamfering oblique angle Modify the program The canned cycle in milling groove can not be used the image function Incorrect chamfering oblique angle or chamfering round angle command 0054 DNC transmission error 0055 Fail to complete the chamfering movement gt Ma pe m z x lt D gt gt O O1 Q3 0 0 M99 can not be shared a same block with the macro program command G65 Modify the program 052 053 0056 0057 Fail to write the file It is necessary to restart after the power is turned off nage In an arbitrary chamfering oblique angle or chamfering round angle block a specified axis is not within the selected plane Modify the program In an external program number search a specified program number was not 0059 found or a specified program is being edited in background Check the program number and external signal Or discontinue the background editing 411 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 00 msme Check the sequence number 0061 The 1 axis is out of the reference position 0082 he 2 ele i ofertas pon OOO 0063 The 3 axis is out
190. and perform the hole machining for G89 method G01X Y Eliminate the hole machining method and data A The absolute value code and incremental value code G90 G91 of canned cycle The G90 and G91 are changed along with the distance of the drilling axis refer to the Fig 4 4 2 Generally program is performed using G90 if the G91 is used the Z and R will be treated based upon the of the command 65 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G90 Absolute command G91 Incremental command Point R Z Point R A No I Point Z Point Z Absolute Relative A B Fig 4 4 2 EEO B The plane return code G98 G99 of canned cycle y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Tool can be returned to the point R plane or initial position plane after the tool is arrived to the bottom of a hole The tool can be returned to the initial point plane or point R plane based upon the different of G98 and G99 Usually the G99 is used for drilling at the 1 time and the G98 is at the last The initial plane invarible even if the machining is performed by G99 The operations of G98 and G99 are shown below G98 is regarded as the system default G98 Return to the initial G99 Return to the point point plane R plane Initial point Initial point plane plane Point R Fig 4 4 3 The explanation symbols of each canned cycle refer to the follow
191. and speed Cursor positions at the S00000 Spindle speed after pressing the direction button in the relative absolute coordinate page in this case the S value can be modified the alteration range is the setting value from O to data parameter P258 TOOOO The tool number specified by T code in program Note The machining numbers are memorized after thw power is turned off The zering method of machining number cutting time 1 Shift to the position interface then select the MDI mode Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting 2 Cursor positions to the machining number column after controlling the direction button the data can be input and then press the to confirm the machining numbers will be cleared if directly press the 3 Shift to cutting time by up down buttons 4 Press the Cutting time clears Note 1 There is no alternative other than to install the encoder on spindle when the actual speed of the spindle is displayed Note 2 Actual rate the F value of programming rate x override In the GOO the operation speed of each axis is set by data parameter P88 P92 which can be adjusted by rapid override and the dry run speed can be determined by data parameter P86 Note 3 The programming rate display of feed per revolution It displays that the block contains each feed per revolution is being performed Note 4 The machined total components can be set by data param
192. ansition arc and the fine milling arc are inconsistent when the finish milling is perfirmed at the excircle the interpolation direction in the code explanation is the interpolation direction of the fininsh milling arc For example The fine milling is performed for the roughed circle groove by canned cycle G26 code refer to the following figure 106 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Point R plane position Z 5 Excircle boundary Cutter center path Fig 4 6 3 2 G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G26 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 I50 J30 D1 F800 Canned cycle start Excircle fine milling cycle performs at the bottom of a hole lt G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Cancel the canned cycle return from the point R plane O Cc M30 m Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G26 G32 YNININVYDOUd command the system then executes G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command positioning tool radius offset is ignored call the specified cutter compensation by program in the procedure of in feed 4 6 4 Rectangular Groove Rough milling G33 G34 Code format G33 G98 G99 Xx Y Z RL JIL W Q V UDF K G34 Function Start from the center of the rectangle the specified parameter data is regarded as the linear cutting cycle till the rectangular groove is machinied based upon the progra
193. anual MPG Single step mode spindle rotates CW 4 2 3 Spindle Stop O SES In the Manual MPG Single step mode spindle stops rotation by pressing this button 4 2 4 Automatic Shift of Spindle Select the spindle whether is the frequency control or I O point control by bit 2 of parameter No 1 When NO 1 2 0 the spindle speed is controlled by S speed command to carry out the automatic shift at present the system can be performed 3 shift control and its corresponding top rotation speed is set by parameter P246 P247 or P248 When NO 1 2 1 the automatic shifting of the spindle speed is controlled by I O point at present the system can be both performed 3 shift control S1 S2 or S3 and modified the shifting addition output of the ladder diagram The system may automatically perform the corresponding shifting selection after executing the S speed command 289 ll AIWN TOA O U m gt O Z ll ANN IOA O U m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Spindle motor speed Max speed 10V The Max clamping speed of the spindle motor The Min clamping speed of the spindle motor rian command S Top rotation Top rotation Top rotation command speed of speed of speed of gear 1 gear 2 gear 3 Fig 4 2 4 1 Note The automatic shifting is enabled detect the spindle shift and perform the S code by the shifting in position sig
194. ardless of the cutter compensation 4 4 3 Drilling Cydle Counter Boring Cycle G82 Code format G82 X_Y_ Z RPF K Function This cycle is used for normal drilling Butting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole At the bottom a dwell is performed then the tool is retracted in rapid traverse Explanations X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance of the specified point R to the bottom of a hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of the bottom of a hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R F_ Cutting feedrate P_ Dwell time at the bottom of a hole K_ Repeated times 71 SINN 1IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G82 G98 G82 G99 Initial point plane i Point R plane g Fig 4 4 3 1 After positioning along the X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R Drilling is then performed from point R to Z when the bottom of the hole has been reached a dwell is performed The tool is then retracted in rapid traverse The miscellaneous function M code rotates the spindle before specifying G82 When the G82 and M codes are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1 positio
195. arning amp Precaution Il Gr Wisk GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation PREFACE Dear Users It is our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this machining center CNC system of GSK218MC series produced by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd This book is Programming amp Operation Manual which introduces the programming and operation of the machining center CNC system of GSK218MC series in detail To ensure the product works in a safe and efficient state please read this manual carefully before installation and operation SECURITY WARNING improper operations may cause unexpected accidents Only the person who owns the qualified professional can operate this system Special prompt The power supply fixed on in the cabinet is exclusively used for the CNC system made by GSK Never attempt to use this power as other purposes Otherwise the enormous hazard may occur Llist SAFETY PRECAUTIONS E Transportation and storage Do not pile up the packing boxes over 6 layers Never attempt to climb the packing box neither stand on it nor place heavy objects on it Do not drag or move the products using the cables connected with the product Avoid impact or scratch to the panel and screen Packing box should be protected from dampness insolation and drench E Open package inspection Confirm the product is the one you purchased after opening the package Check whether the
196. art eESP eExternal reset signal eExternal power ON OFF eGSK 218MC GSK 218MC V system uses the color 10 4 inch LCD with the resolution 800x600 eGSK 218MC H GSK 218MC U1 system uses the color 8 4 inch LCD with the resolution 800x600 Display elt provides 5 kinds of interfaces such as the Chinese English Russian Spanish and Turkey which can be selected by parameter ePosition information eUser program eSystem setting ePLC eDiagnosis parameter eFigure eAlarm information eHelp eActual feedrate spindle speed eReal time wave diagnosis eSystem operation SINN TOA time NC command and state information y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Program capacity 57M up to 400 programs can be stored eProgram preview eProgram edit eBackstage edit PLC treatment velocity 3us step up to 4700 steps basis command 10 pieces Program edit 35 function commands ladder diagram on line edit IO unit input output 48 48 extendible Support the RS 232 series port USB network communication interface file PLC Function Communication S nci transportation available DNC machining function series port network and unction USB on line machining function Adapted drive DA98 Series GS Series GE Series Digit AC Servo etc 1 3 Product Type Definition GSK218 M C a H 1 1 0 0900 amp 6 ChapterOne Summary Code Explanation Product type main charact
197. ast value if it more than the P282 parameter setting value and it is operated based upon the most value Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Axis switching Cancel the canned cycle before the boring axis can be shifted Boring machining In a block that does not contain X Y Z or other miscellaneous axes is not 87 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual performed Example M3 S2000 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial position plane G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference position M5 Spindle rotation stop SINN TOA Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 i
198. at S __ Explanations 1 One S code can be specified in a block 2 The spindle can be directly specified by the address S and its following data its unit is rev min r min For example M3 S300 means that the spindle operates based upon the 300 rev min 3 When the movement code and S code are shared with a same block which are performed simultaneously 4 The spindle can be controlled by the S code and its following numerical values 6 2 Spindle Switch Value Control When the SPT of the bit 2 of parameter No 1 sets to 1 the spindle speed can be controlled by the address S and its following 2 digit switch value When the spindle speed is controlled by selecting a switch value the system then can offers 3 level spindle mechanical gear shifting Refer to the manual made by the manufacturer for the corresponding relationships and the spindle shifing levels provide by machine tool of S code and spindle speed Code format S01 S1 S02 S2 S03 S3 Explanations 1 At present there are 8 shiftings for the software but the ladder diagram is only 3 When the above mentioned codes other than the S codes are specified the system then displays the The miscellaneous function is being performed 177 ry O Q D gt Z Q SINN TOA Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 2 If the 4 digit followed with S are specified the later 2 digit are then enab
199. ation and easy to learn use and debugging It spports the RS232 USB and network 3 kind communication interfaces which carries out the file transmission DNC machining USB on line machining t supports the GSK LINK Ethernet bus function for convenient connection and strong extension and supports the 17 bit absolute encoder with high accuracy SINN TOA against to zero return which can be carried out the full closed loop control Optional y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 1 2 Technology Specification Controllable axis and linkage axis the standard configuration is 4 axis Movement control 3 linkage the 4 axis 4 linkage can be matched Each axis can be regarded as linear axis or rotation one Interpolation method Positioning G00 straight line G01 circular arc G02 G03 and helix interpolation Position command range Metric 99999 999mm 99999 999mm the least command unit 0 001mm Inch 9999 9999inch 9999 9999inch the least command unit 0 0001 inch Electric gear Command multiplication coefficient 1 65536 command frequency devision coefficient 1 65536 Rapid traverse rate Up to 60m min rapid override FO 25 50 and 100 4 level real time adjustment Cutting feedrate Up to 15m min G94 or 500 00mm r G95 Feedrate 0 200 21 level real time adjustment wave section control available Chapter One Summary MPG feed 3 gear 0 001 0 01 and 0 1mm single feed 4 gear 0 001
200. ative direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 Machine stroke detection the absolute position of the 4 axis encoder along positive direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 gt a mi z x lt Machine stroke detection the absolute position of the 5 axis encoder along negative direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 Machine stroke detection the absolute position of the 5 axis encoder along positive direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 407 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual gt D mi z gt x lt 408 Appendix Two Alarm List Appendix Two Alarm List Alarm No Content 0000 The parameter must to be cut the power once that is altered 0001 Fail to open the file 0002 The MDI data exceeds its range 0003 The copied or renamed program No exists so A number or the sign _ was input without an address at the beginning of a block Modify the program aoe The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was followed by another address or EOB code Modify the program Sign input error Sign was input followed with an address which it can 0006 CG te CC te not be used the or two or more signs were input Modify the program Sign input error Sign Was input in an address which it can not
201. ay Of Macro Variable serienn E E E T O honda eae 229 3 3 3 2 Modification and Setting of Macro Variable 0 00 cccccccccccessseccceeessseeeceesssseeeeeeessseeeeeens 231 3 3 4 Display Modification and Setting of Ptich Compensation cccccccccccccceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 231 3 3 4 1 Pitch Compensation Display ccccccssscccccessscccccesssseccccesssseeeceesssaceeceesseeeecesseseeeeeeens 231 3 3 4 2 Modification and Setting of Pitch Compensation i ccecccccessseccceessseeeeeeessseeeeeens 232 3 3 5 Display Modification and Settong of Bus Servo Parametet cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 232 3 0 5 1 Servo Parameter DIS Play ssseicosciv cseescccsasescad csssasatisa sos e EE E E EE A EA E 234 S 010 2 Spinde Paramete aoea na aA ENE AA A etna eines 237 3 39 99 Servo Debugging Tool STT oerien a E ites E N EAA N 240 Gr Wisi GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation 3 3 5 4 Double drive Debugging TOOL ccc ccsssscccccesssssscceccceessssseeeecccesssesaeeeeecessneeaaeeeeees 245 Ok OGUN DISO IV era cos csacacaasssesoadessaaasbecs todoncisacosaauecuacssacacuuesesousonesassbeuss iacusateanndardoudenteau assem aonccasesas 247 SEE SCE PAE oe ER a E ee 247 3 4 2 Workpiece Coordinate Setting Pape eironi l e aleta i aaaea 249 J4 Center and Tool setine FPUnCHON aisseta e a e A R a Taoa 250 3 4 3 1 Center Function Introduction amp Operation Explanation
202. backup such as the ladder diagram PLC parameter PLC system parameter value cutter Data backup compensation value pitch compensation value and system macro variable etc in the system disk The system will generate bak backup file after the data backup is executed Separatly perform the data recovery such as the ladder diagram PLC parameter PLC system parameter value cutter ata recovery compensation value pitch compensation value and system macro variable etc in the system disk The system recovery operation is read and recovered the backup file from system The data output operation can be output the data in the system disc to Data output the external storage device The data input operation can be input the data in the external storage Data input device to the system disc ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z One Touch aaa Simultaneously backup the multiplication data to the system disk backup One Touch Simultaneously recover th e backup file for the multiplication data recovery items One Touch Simutaneously copy the file for the multiplication data items in the One Touch Simultaneously copy the multiplication file in the U disk to the 3 Select the destination file by or direction button Shift the data item list and file list table by or 4 The operations such as the data backup data recovery data output data input one touch backup one touch recovery one touch output and one touch input
203. be operated by directly inputting the code based upon this function The MDI data parameter modification or offset etc describes in the Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting in CHAPTER THREE as well the MDI operation function is also introduced in this chapter 8 1 MDI Code Input There are two input methods in MDI mode 1 MDI can be consecutively input multiple block program 2 CUR MOD can be input only one program In the MDI mode the program input is same as the same editing mode refer to the PROGRAM EDITING OPERATION in CHAPTER TEN The following will introduce the input in the CUR MOD For example Input a block G00 X50 Y100 from the CUR MOD 1 operation page the operation steps are shown below 1 Enter the MDI operation mode by PROGRAM 2 Enter the program interface by roa then enter the CUR MOD operation page by the CUR MOD softkey refer to Fig 8 1 1 INPUT 3 After inputting the G00X50Y100 on keyboard in turn confirm it by w in this case you can view that the program is already input to the interface Refer to the following figure Fig 8 1 1 307 F m eT an gt om ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z er JJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual CURRENT MODAL Gao 300 Y G17 1500 Fa G90 a8 G94 000 G54 000 G21 000 G40 G49 ABSOLUTE G11 Baa X 1 727 mm iL F G15 Y 47 897 m
204. be viewed by its corresponding software Refer to the Fig 3 6 1 ee e m o2 00000 0 oo Fois a aa S O O Fooo F001 Foo2 F003 OIS S S S S O S o S e s e s S e s 5 8 9s 9s s 8 9 98 e 8 s 9 9 Cy Cy Cy Cy 8 s 9 e 8 9 9s e Fos oeooi10e Foos o Fos o 00000 a Foo5 1 1 Foi7 o o Foo7 20000000 FoI9 oooogo1l1g Fone FOo9 Fo1l 200002000 Foes 0380000820 wa id PATH 1 G SIGNAL X SIGNAL SIGNAL EWAVE Fig 3 6 1 267 F m r an AE om a GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual i l ESE Ee g Diagnosis Data Display 3 6 1 Signal Parameter Display 3 6 1 1 softkey The content of this interface is shown Enter the signal diagnosis interface by SIGNAL below Refer to the Fig 3 6 1 1 1 Fig 3 6 1 1 4 Enter the diagnosis NC PLC interface by F SIGNAL in the lt DIAGNOSIS gt interface Refer to the Fig 3 6 1 1 1 F signal interface 1 Q 1 Q Q FQ12 F013 Q 1 Q Q Q Q Q F 1
205. bugging tool interface after the interface is selected by the srr button on the controllable panel enter to the parameter page display by E BUS CONFIGURATION Jsoftkey 245 O U m gt O Z ll SAIN TOA Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual and then enter the double drive debugging tool interface after selecting the DOUBLE DRIVE TOOL again Refer to the Fig 3 3 5 4 2 1 323211 63f eee ERROR 0 000 00A J se PULSE 52362 DATA 14 35 6 PATH 1 FISY PARA ISP PARA EISTT pou ortve RETURN Fig 3 3 5 4 2 1 ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z 3 3 5 4 3 Operation Explanation If the parallelism verification should be performed by double drive tool the following steps are necessary 1 Shift to the MPG mode by controllable panel 2 The step length of the MPG is adjusted to 0 001 3 Set the CALIBRATION SWITCH to 1 in this case the synchronism axis does not performed at the same each axis can be adjusted by MPG movement 4 The MPG movement can be performed based upon the CURRENT OFFSET when the MPG movement exceeds 1mm of VERIFICATION LENGTH the system may alarm it may be moved again after the resetting cancels an alarm 5 Set the VERIFICATION SWITCH to 0 in this case the double drive synchronism is enabled judge the motor s current feedback Alternatively open the parallelism is parallel by moving t
206. c 4 1 Coordinate Axis Movement In the manual operation mode each axis can be separately performed by the manual feedrate or manual rapid traverse rate 4 1 1 Manual Feed In the lt MANUAL MODE gt press the feed axis begins moving and its movement speed can be changed by adjusting the feedrate the axis the corresponding axis movement stops after releasing the button the same as the Y axis and Z axis This system lt O Cc m temporarily does not support the multi axis movement at the same time instead of the simultaneous O z m gt O Z zero return along each axis Note The manual feedrate of each axis is set by parameter P98 4 1 2 Manual Rapid Traverse e WAU RAPID Press the the indicator is on then enter the manual rapid traverse state and then each axis operates at the rapid traverse rate pressing the button of the feed direction axis Note 1 The manual rapid traverse rate is set by P170 P173 Note 2 The bit 0 of parameter No 12 can be set whether the manual rapid traverse is enabled before the reference position return 4 1 3 Manual Feed amp Manual Rapid Traverse Rate Selection In the manual feed select the manual feedrate by band switch total 21 levels 0 200 In the manual rapid traverse rate 218MC 218MC H or 218MC V can be selected override of the 285 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual o
207. c and logic operation om o a o Sum i j k Difference i j k Product i j k Quotient i j k Sine i SIN J Arcsine i ASIN j Cosine i COS j Arccosine i ACOS Tangent i TAN Arctangent i ATAN j k Square root i SQRT Fj Absolute value i ABS j Rounding off 1 ROUND j Rounding up i FUP j Rounding down i FIX j Nature logarithm i LN J Exponential i EXP function An angle is specified in degree 90 30 means 90 5 degrees 7 A O lt ge Sc zZ sS m e i j OR k A logic operation is i j XOR k performed based on i j AND k binary numbers bit by bit Conversion from i BIN BCD to BIN It used to the signal Conversion from i BCD exchange for PMC BIN to BCD Explanations 1 Angle unit The units of angles used with the SIN COS ASIN ACOS TAN and ATAN functions are degrees For example 90 30 is represented as 90 5 degrees 2 ARCSIN i ASIN j 2 ARCSIN i ASIN Solution ranges from 90 90 When j is beyond the range of 1 to 1 system alarm is issued 164 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code A constant can be used instead of the j variable 3 ARCCOS i ACOS j 3 ARCCOS i ACOS Fj The solution ranges from 180 to 0 When j execeeds the range of 1 to 1 system alarm is generated A constant can be used instea
208. cccccesesssssseeeeeessesseees 311 9 3 Operation Steps for Mechanical Zero Return Specified by Program cccccceeesseceeeesseeeeeens 312 9 4 Bus Servo Zero Return Function Setting ec ceccccccesssscecceesssseeceeeesseeceeeesseeeceeessseeeeeeestseeeeeens 312 DAN Commoner o Turi ean e E sana seeeseatatieetas 313 O42 High speed Increment Zero REUT orcii E ate Ei 313 94 3 Multi Core Absolute Zero Setting ici cccicccssesascissatasdsesesssousdoatsnvndesheseeesurdscedesteoeeasetisesdethesesdestedoeseoense 314 CHAPTER TEN EDIT OPERATION vererien ieaie rE ANE 317 101 Edr OT I FOAM susclsn ch esais ies wits os bezniss ba cicsu ees craseibiasiaees a sadtoas eens 317 PO Tstablishivient of Procran c3 i i552 cca clad i ias cad ica a a a 318 10 1 1 1 Automatic Generation of Sequence Number occ ccccceessscccccecessesssseeeeceeeseeseees 318 IOE INPUT OT Program Comenten a A A T A 318 10 1 1 3 Index of Sequence Number Word and Line NUMbE eceecseesrerrreseerrrrrrsserrrrre 320 10 1 1 4 Positioning method Of CUPSOF eee cccssscccceessscceceesssceeceesssseeccesesseeeceesesseeeceeesaeeeeeens 321 10 1 1 5 Insertion Deletion and Modification Of Word 00 00 00 ceeccccccceeccccccceeccccccaeceeccceaeeeccees 322 10 1 1 6 Deletion of Single BlOCK 00 ec ccccssccccssssscecceesssceeccesssaeeeceessseeeceeessseeeceessaeeeeeens 322 101 1 7 Deletion of Multi BIOK a bicicsacustissecsadietscustaosiatehteiswstascbausdususcustasseodststa
209. ce 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm gt U v m z gt lt 0053 The 4 axis coordinate value of the 2 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 312 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0054 The 2 axis coordinate value of the 5 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0055 The 1 axis coordinate value of the 3 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0056 The 2 axis coordinate value of the 3 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0057 The 3 axis coordinate value of the 3 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0058 The 4 axis coordinate value of the 3 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0059 The 5 axis coordinate value of the 3 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0060 The 1 axis coordinate value of the 4 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0061 The 2 axis coordinate value of the 4 reference 0 0000 p
210. ce zero offset value tool compensation value the scale unit of MPG and the movement distance in the incremental feed are specified by F code When the power is turned on the G code is the same as that held before the power was turned off Notice 1 The tool compensation value should be preseted based upon the least input incremental unit when the inch shifts to metric or the metric converts into inch 2 The 1 G28 code is identical with the same reference point return from the operation of the intermediate point when the inch shifts to metric or the metric converts into inch SINN TOA 3 When the least input incremental unit is different with the least command incremental unit y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q the most error is an half of the least command unit and this error does not accumulate 4 Whether the program is input the inch or metric can be determined by the bit 2 of parameter No 00 5 Whether the program is output the inch or metric can be determined by the bit O of parameter No 03 6 It is essential to specify the G20 or G21 within the single block 4 2 18 Optional Angle Chamfering Corner Arc Code format L_ Chamfering R_ Corner arc Function When the above mentioned codes are added to the end of a block that specifies linear interpolation G10 or circular interpolation G02 G03 a chamfering or corner arc is automatically inserted during machining Blocks specifying chamerfering and corne
211. celeration can be set by data parameter P125 P128 The Max cutting speed is set by data parameter P96 The Min cutting feed is determined by data parameter P97 if the cutting feed is higher the Max restriction value it will be restricted at the upper limit value if the cutting speed is lower the Min restriction value it will be restricted at the lower limit value The cutting feedrate in the Auto mode when the power is turned on is determined by data parameter P87 The cutting speed can be specified by the following two methods A Feed min G94 Specify cutter feed value per minute after F B Feed rev G95 Specify the cutter feed value of the spindle per revolution after F Code format G94 F_ Function Feed amount per minute Unit mm min or inch min Explanations 1 After specifying G94 in the feed per minute mode the feed amount of tool per minute is SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q directly specified by the numerical value followed with the F 2 G94 is a modal code Once a G94 is specified it is enabled until G95 is specified It is regarded as the feed per minute by default and the default cutting feedrate is set by data parameter P87 3 The feed min can be debugged by override adjustment button or wave band switch buttons on the operation panel the override is from 0 to 200 Feed amount per minute mm min or inch min Workpiece Working table Fig 7 2 1 1 Feed per minute
212. celeration deceleration before interpolation in the forecasting control method Setting range 0 2000 mm s 0135 The acceleration deceleration constent before S type 100 in the forecasting control method Setting range 0 400 ms 0136 The linear acceleration deceleration time constant followed with the acceleration deceleration in the gt a mi z x lt 381 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual forecasting control Setting range 0 400 ms The exponential acceleration deceleration time constant followed with the acceleration deceleration in the forecasting control Setting range 0 400 ms 0138 The exponential type acceleration deceleration FL 10 speed of the cutting feed in forcasting control mode Setting range 0 400 ms 0139 Outline control accuracy of forcasting control mode 0 01 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0140 Merger block section in the forcasting control mode LO e Setting range 0 10 0141 In position accuracy in the forcasting control mode 0 05 Setting range 0 0 5 mm gt U v m z gt lt 0142 The condition for sampling length in the forcasting 5 control mode Setting range 0 30 0143 The condition for sampling angle in the forcasting 10 control mode Setting range 0 30 The critical angle between two blocks of the automatic corner deceleration in the forcasting control mod
213. ck MDI 1 Non editing mode resetting cursor returns to the start position of the program 0 Non editing mode resetting cursor does not return to the start position of the program Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 0 1 1 OUT2 LZR BFA Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0 1 RPD LRP RFO TDR FDR 2 BFA LZR Pour 1 Prohibit entering the external area of the 2 stroke limit 0 Prohibit entering the internal area of the 2 stroke limit 1 Perform the stroke detection after the power is turned on till to the manual reference point return 0 Do not perform the stroke detection after the power is turned on till to the manual reference point return 1 The alarm occurs followed with the overtravel when the overtravel code issues 0 The alarm occurs before the overtravel when the overtravel code issues System alarm range is previous 5mm of each boundary for the prohibition gt U v m z gt lt area RDR FDR TDR RFO LRP RPD 1 Manual rapid is enabled from the power on till to the reference point return 0 Manual rapid is disabled from the power on till to the reference point return 1 Positioning G00 interpolation type is straight line 0 Positioning GOO interpolation type is non straight line 1 Rapid feed it stops when the feedrate is Fo 0 Rapid feed it does
214. ck tapping i Standard peck tapping o Initial point plane SINN TOA gt Point R 2 Point R position aa n J O Q D gt Z Q Table 4 5 3 1 It is high speed peck tapping cycle Peck flexible tapping when NO 44 5 1 cycle bia a a It is standard peck tapping cycle when NO 44 5 0 It is high speed peck tapping cycle when NO 44 5 1 It is standard peck tapping cycle when NO 44 5 0 Peck rigid tapping cycle NO 46 1 1 and NO K007 7 1 Two peck tapping cycles are available High speed peck tapping cycle and standard peck tapping cycle which are determined by bit 1 of parameter No 46 Peck flexible tapping cycle 97 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or IS GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual When bit 1 of parameter No 46 equals to 0 and bit 7 of parameter No K007 equals to 0 which are the flexible peck tapping cycle In the peck flexible tapping method the high speed peck tapping cycle and standard peck flexible tapping cycle are available which can be set by bit 5 of parameter No 44 High speed peck tapping cycle It is the high speed peck tapping cycle when bit 5 of parameter No 44 sets to 1 rapid traverse to point R after positioning along with the X and Y axes From point R cutting is performed with depth Q depth of cut for each cutting feed then the tool is retracted by di
215. code definition shows at the lower left corner of the interface Refer to the Fig 3 9 4 If you want to know the concrete format and usage of the G code press the HOME on the panel after selecting the G code and then return by refer to the Fig 3 9 5 Rapid positioning GHB lt O Cc m Instruction format 690 691 GAG X Y_Z_ O 2 m gt O Z Function G46 instructions tool traverse via linear interpolation to workpiece coordinate system position specified by absolute or incremental instruction Explanation In absolute programming parameter represents programming final coordinate in incremental programming parameter represents axes moving distance and direction Restriction G codes of GG GH1 G82 or GBS are not allowed in a same block P 1 58 PATH 1 SYS INFO OPRT ALARM PARA gt Fig 3 9 5 The format function explanation and restriction of the code are detailed in this interface as for the unfamiliar or unclear code can be searched and compared in this page 5 Operation table interface Enter the help information Parameter Diagnosis table page by PARAMETER TABLE softkey in lt HELP gt interface refer to the Fig 3 9 6 279 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual NO MEANING parameters related to SETTING bit par 080 0002 num par 080 0004 l parameters related to axis contr
216. compiled in main program to call the performance of subprogram Refer to the following format M98 PLLLIL LUTI Siny a agai calling times The called subprogram series number Fig 5 2 4 1 5 2 5 Program Ends and Rturns M99 1 In the Auto mode if a M99 uses at the end of the main program which returns to the beginning of the program to automatically perform when the program operates to M99 the following programs will not execute and the workpiece machining number does not accumulate 2 Using M99 at the end of subprogram the program will return to main program after operting this block and then continue executing by calling the next program of the subprogram 3 M30 is treated by M99 in the DNC mode and the cursor stops at the end of the program 175 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 176 Chapter Six Spindle Function S Code CHAPTER SIX SPINDLE FUNCTION S CODE The code signal conveys to machine tool after converting into analog signal by the S codes and its following numerical values which is used for the spindle control of the machine tool S is regarded as modal value 6 1 Spindle Analog Control When the SPT of the bit 2 of parameter No 1 sets to 0 the address S and its following numerical value can be controlled the spindle speed byanalog voltage refer to the operation manual for details Code form
217. coordinate systems can be used other than the 6 workpiece coordinate systems from G54 to G59 Format G54 Pn Pn Codes specifying the additional workpiece coordinate systems The range of Pn 1 50 The setting and restriction of the additional workpiece coordinate system is consistent with the workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 G10 is available to set a workpiece zero offset value in an additional coordinate system The methods are shown below Code G10 L20 Pn XYZ n 1to50 Additional workpiece coordinate code X Y Z Set the axis address and offset value offset by workpiece zero the specified value is a new offset one For an incremental value code G91 specified value addes the current offset value and gains a new offset value G10 command is available for separately changing each workpiece coordinate system 4 2 10 Machine Coordinate System Selection G53 Format G53 X_Y_ Z_ Function The tool is positioned to the cooresponding coordinate below its coordinte system at a rapid traverse rate Explanations 1 When the G53 is used within the program its following code coordinate should be the coordinate value below the machine tool coordinate system and then the machine tool will position to a specified place at a rapid traverse 2 G53 is one shot modal code is only enabled at its current block regardless of the previous defined coordinate system Restriction Select a machine coordinate system G53 When a command is specif
218. coordinate value of the point R Q _ Cutting depth of each cutting feed F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Repeated times 73 SINN 1IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G83 G98 G83 G99 Point R plane Fig 4 4 4 1 Q It represents the depth of cut for each cutting feed It must always be specified as an incremental value In the second and subsequent cutting feeds rapid traverse is performed up to a point d just before where the last drilling ended and the cutting feed is performed again The value of d is set by parameter P271 as the Fig 4 4 4 1 shows Be sure to specify a positive value in Q Negative values are ignored and the system is still treated by positive Specify Q in the block of drilling if it is not specified in the block without drilling Q is registered as the modal data Use a miscellaneous function to rotate the spindle M code before specifying G83 When G83 and M codes are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1 hole positioning operation The system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note 1 In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perfor
219. csssccccccccsssccceccossosccceccossssscececessssscceeessssoe 285 4 1 Coordinate Axis Movement osrrsssir non iie ri aE A E E E E ER 285 Arek Mangal TGC ceca pian i T E I Aol Fi een Ral add dla 285 kka Manual Rapid Traverse lt 6 secu ssn eile sears a a a E 285 4 1 3 Manual Feed amp Manual Rapid Traverse Rate Selection ccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 285 Aeka Manual Tatev CHCl oN eiss a a a a e 286 dko Workpiece Correcto aati a r e 287 AZ SPURTE C OM tO unea a a a a 289 AL SpudeEPosi Verene a eN 289 A Dek Pade ING AV Cee E a 289 ADS OPOE SOD ieee eee etn ee a ee ee a 289 ADA AMOSO SPIN E eiea NE aon ccueane aeeee concen E oor eel Pees 289 A Other Manual OPE ratoN Sce fis sotacenteds exaiaysts a a A a sbi atetataa taneatile 290 Aod Coolant Omir Ole eeir E E E A A 290 A352 Lob ca oC ONTO enie e E ee E E 290 Aao Chip removi Contro l coccaso2tc oy Sacaen A A 290 ADA Wortkoine indicator Conto xg 225 occa tse 2a see E E a 291 CHAPTER FIVE SINGLE STEP OPERATION cccccccccsssssssssscsssccccccccssscssscccsscsessscsess 293 Sig ME 91 S 1c 21 81m 2 21 0 aa Grr PRET Onn e RTE ner E T eT ne oe er ee 293 Solel IMovemcil AmMmOunl Selecione ina a a eae 293 5 1 2 Selection of Movement axis and Movement Direction cccccceeseeeeeseeseeesesseseseseeseeseeeeeeesseaas 294 Dales Sne leste p F eet Explanada onsena 294 5 2 Single step nter UDOM srerenrsunsiseannane a a a a 294 5 3 A
220. ction 0 Do not use the MPG single step interruption function 1 The movement along each axis is identical with the MPG revolving HNGD direction 365 er Jd E GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0 The movement along each axis is different with the MPG revolving direction Standard setting 1000 0001 System parameter number 0157 PLW5 PLW4 PLW3 PLW2 PLW1 PLW1 1 The 1 axis pulse width changes along with the speed 0 The 1 axis pulse width fixes at 1ms PLW2 1 The 2 axis pulse width changes along with the speed 0 The 2 axis pulse width fixes at 1ms PLW3 1 The 3 axis pulse width changes along with the speed 0 The 3 axis pulse width fixes at 1ms PLW4 1 The 4 axis pulse width changes along with the speed 0 The 4 axis pulse width fixes at 1ms PLW5 1 The 5 axis pulse width changes along with the speed 0 The 5 axis pulse width fixes at 1ms Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 015 9 LEDT LOPT RHPG RHPG 1 Use the electric MPG drive function 0 Do not use the electric MPG drive function LOPT 1 Operation panel locking singal is enabled gt E v m z gt lt 0 Operation panel locking singal is disabled LEDT 1 External program locking signal is enabled 0 External program locking signal is disabled Standar
221. d after the predictive control PLAC interpolation Exponent type 0 The acceleration deceleration method after the predictive control interpolation Linear type isi 1 The automatic corner deceleration function of the predictive control Velocity difference control 0 The automatic corner deceleration function of the predictive control Angle control PPCK 1 Predictive control performs the in position detection 0 Predictive control do not perform the in position detection pije 1 The overlapping interpolation of acceleration deceleration block is enabled before the predictive control 352 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0 The overlapping interpolation of acceleration deceleration block is disabled before the predictive control Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 016 ALS FLLS FBLS FBOL FBOL 1 Rapid operation mode Backward acceleration deceleration Q Rapid operation mode Forward acceleration deceleration FBLS 1 The acceleration deceleration before the rapid traverse S type 0 The acceleration deceleration before the rapid traverse Linear type FLLS 1 The acceleration deceleration after the rapid traverse Exponent type 0 The acceleration deceleration after the rapid traverse Linear type ALS 1 Automatic corner feed function is enabled 1 Automatic corner feed function is disabled Standard setting 0000 0010 System parame
222. d cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Axis shifting Cancel the canned cycle before altering the drilling axis Boring machining Fail to perform the boring maching in the block without X Y and Z or othere axes Example M3 S500 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G76 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 Q5 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R move 5mm when the orientation is performed at the bottom of ahole and stops 1s Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 and then return to the initial position plane G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stop Restriction Fail to specify the G code From G00 to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G76 command the system then performs the G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation Note 1 The in feed axis and the in feed direction are canned in this command and the in feed direction is regardless of the rotation of the G6
223. d is set by data parameter P155 The single step feedrate does not be controlled by the feedrate rapid override 5 2 Single step Interruption When the program is operated in the Auto MDI and DNC mode shift the single step mode to perform the single step interruption function after dwells Single step interrupition coordinate system is same as the MPG one and the operation function is also similar as the MPG The electric MPG is ll SAINN TOA O U m gt O Z the Hand Pulse Generator MPG similarly hereinafter one refer to the Control of MPG Interruption Operation in Section 6 2 of OPERTION 5 3 Auxiliary Control in Single step Operation It is same as the manual operation mode refer to the Section 4 2 and 4 3 in this manual 294 Chapter Six MPG Operation CHAPTER SIX MPG OPERATION 6 1 MPG Feed Enter the MPG mode by MFG the machine tool movement can controlled by MPG in this feed mode 6 1 1 Selection of Movement Amount amp WFO VWv25 VU50 0 001 0 01 0 1 and the movement e VWu50 0 1 increment can be displayed on the page for example press the the MPG increment 0 100 Select a movement increment by any of the O lt v displays in the lt POSITION gt interface Refer to the Fig 6 1 1 1 n O Cc gt o MPG INC 9 901 Z FEED OVRD 100 x Y amp YOO DO m a 46 66 128 168 cha FA 25 50 100 eMM Y B e BBm s o0 m 1 50 68 78 88 908 100 110 120 SEE Z
224. d of the j variable 4 ARCTAN i ATAN j k 4 ARCTAN i ATAN j k Specify the length of two sides separated by a slahs The solution range from 0 to 360 For example When 1 ATAN 1 1 is specified 1 225 A constant can be replaced by j variable SINN 1OA 5 Nature logarithm i LN j i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q When the antilogarithm j is zero or smaller the system alarm occurs A constant can be replaced by j variable 6 Exponential function i EXP j When the result of operation exceeds 99997 453535 j is about 11 5129 an overflow occurs and the system alarm issues A constant can be replaced by j variable 7 ROUND function ROUND function rounds off at the 1 decimale position For example When 1 ROUND 2 is executed where 2 1 2345 the value of variable 1 is 1 0 8 Round down and round up With CNC when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer Conversely when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is less than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer Be particularly careful when handing negative numbers Examples Suppose that 1 1 2 2 1 2 When 3 FUP 1 is execu
225. d setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 060 SCL EPW EPW 1 The Max quantity of the position switches are 16 0 The Max quantity of the position switches are 10 SCL 1 Use the scaling 0 Do not use the scaling Standard setting 0010 0000 System parameter number 06 1 FALM LALM EALM SALM AALM SSC 366 SSC AALM SALM EALM LALM FALM Use the constant peripheral speed control Do not use the constant peripheral speed control Ignor external user alarm Do not ignore external user alarm Ignore the spindle drive alarm Do not ignore the spindle drive alarm Ignore the ESP alarm Do not ignore ESP alarm Ignore hard limit alarm Do not ignore hard limit alarm Ignore feed axis drive alarm Do not ignore feed axis drive alarm Standard setting 0000 0000 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 367 gt E v m z gt lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 2 Data Parameter Parameter No Parameter definition Default value 0000 I O channel input output equipment 2 0 Xon Xoff 1 XModem 2 USB Setting range 0 2 When CNC is performed the communication with the PC machine by the RS232 interface set it as the O or 1 and it is set to 2 when connecting with the U disk 0001 Communication channel Baud Rate
226. data Two data types and its enabled range of the data value Data Enabled data type range The default value provided by system can be modified its Pavia setting based upon the user s requirements It determines The default range and value provided by system can be Data type based upon the modidified its setting based upon the user s requirements data range 1 Each data consists of 8 digit for the bit parameter and each bit owns different meanings 2 In the above mentioned table generally the data value range of each data type is the enabled range Actually the concrete parameter value range is different Refer to the detailed explanations for each parameter Example gt 1 The meaning of bit parameter U 5 m z Data No BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO gt lt 2 The meaning of data parameter 0 21 Data No Data Note 1 The null position in parameter explanation and the parameter number on the screen but without recording in the parameter table are backup for the extend in the future so it is necessary to set as 0 Note 2 The 0 or 1 in the parameter does not specify the concrete meaning 1 YES 0 NO Note 3 INI sets to 0 parameter that sets the unit linear axis is mm mm min when the metric input is performed the basis unit of the rotation axis is deg deg min INI sets to 1 parameter that sets the unit linear axis
227. de 0 G96 spindle speed clamps before the spindle override Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 360 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0 3 8 PG2 PG1 FERE FLR SAR SAR 1 Detect the spindle speed arrival signal 0 Do not detect the spindle speed arrival signal Te 1 In the spindle speed fluctuation check the unit both the allowable rate q and fluctuation rate r is 0 1 0 In the spindle speed fluctuation check the unit both the allowable rate q and fluctuation rate r is 1 FLRE 1 Spindle speed fluctuation check is enabled 1 Spindle speed fluctuation check is disabled PG2 PG1 The gear ratio between the spindle and position encoder 00 is 1 1 01 is 2 1 10 is 4 1 and 11 is 8 1 Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number Ju A O G S O O S TLC 1 Select the type of the tool length compensation Type B 0 Select the type of the tool length compensation Type A Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0140 ODI CCN SUP SUP 1 The start type in the cutter compensation Type B gt a mi z gt x lt 0 The start type in the cutter compensation Type A 1 G28 G30 commands are moved to the intermediate point and then cancel CCN the radius compensation 0 G28 G30 commands are moved to the intermediate point and then retain the radius compensation ODI 1 Se
228. de of the internal operation which can be specified within the same block 5 2 1 Program End and Return M30 M02 In the Auto operation program stops the automatic state when operating to M30 M20 the followed program will not perform and the spindle and cooling operation will stopped according the workpiece machining number adds 1 M30 can be controlled whether it returns to the beginning of 174 Chapter Five Miscellance Function M Code program by bit 4 of No 33 M02 can be controlled whether it returns to the beginning of program by bit 2 of No 33 If the M02 and M30 are performed at the end of the subprogram return to program of the subprogram calling and then continue perform the following blocks 5 2 2 Program Dwell MOQ In the Auto mode the automatic state dwells when program operates to the MOO In this case the previous modal information will registered and it continues by the repeated start button The function equals to the feed hold button by pressing 5 2 3 Program Optional Dwell M01 In the Auto mode the optional dwell automatic operating state when program moves to the M01 SINN TOA if the Optional stop switch is turned on the M01 shares same effect with MOO if the Optional stop 5 O Q D gt Z Q switch is turned off regardless of the M01 code Refer to the Operation Manual for details 5 2 4 Program Calls Subprogram Code Command M98 M98 code can be
229. deceleration S type time constant before the 2 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 0112 Acceleration deceleration S type time constant before the 3 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 0113 Acceleration deceleration S type time constant before the 4 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 0114 Acceleration deceleration S type time constant before the 5 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 0115 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant after the 1 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 400 ms 0116 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant after the 2 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 400 ms 0117 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant after the 3 axis at the rapid traverse rate gt a mi z x lt Setting range 0 400 ms 379 er Jd Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0118 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant after 80 the 4 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 400 ms 0119 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant after the 5 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 400 ms 0120 Acceleration deceleration E type time constant after the 1 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 400 ms 0121 Acceleration deceleration E type time constant aft
230. der single loop count overflow 0438 Drive alarm 38 Encoder multi loop count overflow 0439 Drive alarm 39 Encoder battery alarm gt mi z gt x lt 0440 Drive alarm 40 Encoder battery power shortage 0441 Drive alarm 41 Unmatched motor type a a a T o Hine e A en eer oe po a S a 0443 Drive alarm 43 Encoder EPPROM verification alarm 0449 Fail to initialize the Ethernet Check the hardware 0450 Drive OFF check whether the hardware is correctly connected 0451 The 1 axis drive alarm 0452 The 2 axis drive alarm 419 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0453 The 3 axis drive alarm 0454 The 4 axis drive alarm LT 0455 The 5 axis drive alarm 0456 Spindle drive alarm 0500 The 1 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG releasing along 0501 The 1 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG releasing along 0502 The 2 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG releasing along 0503 The 2 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG releasing along 0504 The 3 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG releasing along 0505 The 3 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG releasing along 0506 The 4 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG releasing along 0507 The 4 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG re
231. dle extensive card 0 Without extensive card 1 With extensive card Note Set whether the spindle drive is used the bus control method by the bit 1 of parameter No 1 7 Multi coil absolute zero setting b In the MDI mode set the Whether it is bus to 1 in the bus configuration interface set the Encoder type to 1 set the machine zero position moving each axis manually c Move the cursor to the press the lt INPUT gt twice based upon the prompts F m r en AE om a the zero return indicator is ON the record of the motor absolute encoder along eac axis at the current position is regarded as machine zero the system is restarted after the power is turned off and the zero return indicator is still ON Manually set the negative positive boundary based upon the Max stroke of the actual machine tool so that move the current machine tool an offset value forward or backward lastly the bit 6 of parameter No 61 is set to 1 the positive negative is then enabled Setting range 99999 9999 99999 9999 alternatively the positive negative boundary along with each axis can be directly set by data parameters P450 P459 D Whether configure the griding Separatly set whether each axis is configured with a griding 0 Without 1 With Alternatively individually set it by bit 3 and 7 of parameter No 1 4 Confirm it by Note 1 After the machine tool zero is set if the zero return direction feed axis m
232. e Setting range 2 178 Degree 0145 The lowest feedrate of automatic corner deceleration 120 in the forcasting control mode 382 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List Setting range 10 1000 mm min The allowable error of each axis for the deceleration function with the speed difference mode in the forcasting control mode Setting range 60 1000 0147 Cutting accuracy level in the forcasting control mode 2 Setting range 0 8 0148 The acceleration limit out of the circular arc 1000 interpolation Setting range 100 5000 mm s 0149 The low speed lower limit of the acceleration clamping at the circular arc interpolation Setting range O0 2000 mm min 0150 The acceleration clamped time constant of the 50 cutting feed Setting range 0 1000 ms 0151 The Max clamped speed in the MPG incomplete 2000 operation mode Setting range O0 3000 mm min 0152 The linear acceleration deceleration time constant of MPG Setting range 0 400 ms gt a mi z x lt 0153 The exponential acceleration deceleration time constant of MPG Setting range 0 400 ms 0154 The acceleration clamping time constant of MPG 100 Setting range 0 400 ms 383 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0155 The top clamping speed of single feed 1000 Setting range 0 3000 mm min 0156 The linear acceleration deceleration time cons
233. e D value of imaged tool length value in programming and the tool length value used in the actual machining are set in the offset register in advance and therefore the component machining can be performed by the tool with different length based upon changing the tool length compensation value instead of altering the program G43 and G44 are specified different offset direction and the offset number can be specified by H code 1 Offset direction G43 Positive offset It is the most common offset method G44 Negative offset 116 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code The specified axis in the program moving with the command end coordinate value addes the offset value It is set at the offset register specified by H code regardless of the absolute value code or incremental value code In G44 deduct the offset value specified in H code and then its coordinate value calculated is regarded as the end coordinate value G43 and G44 are modal G codes which are enabled before encountering other G codes in the same group 2 The specification of offset value The offset length offset number is specified by H code the corresponding offset value of the offset number adds or subtracts to the code value moving with Z axis in program and then becomes the new Z axis movement code HOO H255 can be specified according to the offset numbers The setting range of the offset values are shown below Table 4 7 1 1 im SINN 1OA Compensation v
234. e does not change in MPG interruption Machine tool coordinate value The change value of the machine tool coordinate value is shifting value caused by MPG rotation Note The movement amount of MPG interruption is cleared when manual reference position return along each axis is performed 6 3 Auxiliary Control During MPG Operation Its operation method is absolutely same as the Manual refer to the Section 4 2 and 4 3 in this User Manual 6 4 Electric MPG Drive Function The component program operation can be controlled by rotating the MPG with hand the mechanism is operated along the tool path specified by machining program command this function is used for workpiece trial cutting and machining program detection Operation method The electric MPG drive function is enabled by setting the bit 1 of parameter No 59 In the Auto mode open the dry run each axis of the system will not move after pressing the lt CYCLE START gt button in this case the operation of the component operation can be controlled by rotating the MPG the faster the MPG rotation is the faster the speed executed by program is the slower the MPG rotation is the slower the speed executed by program is Note 1 The dry run is enabled after using the electric MPG drive function Note 2 In the single mode the executiong of the single dwell is enabled 298 Chapter Seven Automatic Operation CHAPTER SEVEN AUTOMATIC OPERATION 7 4 Selection of A
235. e initial position at a rapid traverse rate The feedrate and spindle override are regarded as 100 when tapping is being performed Rigid method In the position mode bit 1 of parameter No 46 is set to 1 K parameter No 7 7 sets to 1 to perform M29 S before the tapping code can be specified the rigid method Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Screw leading In the feed min mode the relationships among the screw leading feedrate and spindle speed are shown below Feedrate F screw tap pitch x spindle speed S For example tap the M12x1 5 screw hole in component optional parameter S500 500 r min F 1 5x500 50mm min In multiple thread the F value can be calculated by multiplying by the numbers of thread head In feed rev mode the thread leading equals to the feedrate 94 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code For example Feed min Fee rev Spindle speed 1000r min Spindle speed 1000r min Thread leading 1 0mm Thread leading 1 0mm Then feedrate of Z axis 1000 1 1000mm min Then feedrate of Z axis thread leading 1 1mm r G94 Feed min G95 Feed rev GOO X120 Y
236. e number of interpolation control point w SP interpolation task completion times DSP x1946 error alarm S O 0 O O O 0 mw DSP x1944 error alarm S al ARM buffer capacity DSP sign for task completion DSP buffer capacity O O O I S S J O OiNIOQ Il O l OS DSP fitting point quantity 009 DSP x19e signal acquisition pata FS E 0 28 PATH 1 _ em ee ee Fig 3 6 1 4 1 3 6 1 5 Fluctuation Parameter Display O gs m Jc A om o Enter the fluctuation interface by FLUCTUATION softkey Refer to the Fig 3 6 1 5 1 AXIS ALL 1 1st 2 2nd 3 3rd 4 4th 5 5th WAVE TYPE 0 Speed 1 Acc 2 Acc Acc HOR SCALE 5 VER SCALE DATA 10 50 88 PATH 1 Fig 3 6 1 5 1 274 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Axis selection Select the axis to be performed the fluctuation diaganosis Fluctuation selection Select the content of the diagnosed fluctuation Proportion of horizontal axis vertical axis Select the drawn proportion INPUT Data In any mode input the corresponding data then confirm it by m Signal monitoring performs by lt START gt button and stop it by lt STOP gt button 3 6 2 Check Signal State DIAGNOSIS 1 Select the corresponding display interface by 2 The corresponding address explanation and meaning at the lower left of the screen when moving
237. e program is input by keyboard in the editing mode the system will automatically insert the sequence number The incremental values of the sequence numbers among each block are set by data parameter P210 7 Sequence number increment The incremental value when the automatic sequence number insertion is set its range is O 1000 8 Stop sequence number This function can be set some one program that performs the single block dwell to the specified block which can be enabled when the program number and the block sequence number are specified at the same time For example 00060 Program number is program number O00060 00100 Sequence number is block number N00100 Note When the stop sequence number is automatically set to 1 after the program operates to the object block and the single block dwell will not perform 9 Date and time User can set the system data and time at this position 248 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting d Control the 3 4 2 Workpiece Coordinate Setting Page 1 Enter the coordinate system setting interface by H WORKPIECE COORDINATE the content of this page is shown below Fig 3 4 2 1 MACHINE G54 G55 X Q an X B BOD m x Q Y Y a Y aa Z mn Z mv Z ih EXT G56 G57 X A x aa x a Y E Y a Y a Z a Z ODO mm BOO mm Neut P O S 1 5 34 em il WORK INPUT INPU
238. e rapid traverse rate 3 Helical cutting W distance based upon that the radius compensation value miltiples the SINN TOA value of data parameter No 269 is regarded as the diameter y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 4 Feed to the rectangular center position 5 The rectangular surface milled increasing by L value for each time where from center to outside 6 Z axis returns to R refernce surface at the rapid traverse rate 7 Positioning to helix cutting start position along the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 8 Z axis descends to the distance from the unprocessed plane V 9 The cutting Q V depth downward along Z axis 10 Repeat the operations from 4 to 9 till to the total cutting depth on the surface is machined 11 Return to initial point plane or point R plane based upon the different specifications of G98 or G99 Code path G33 rectangular groove rough milling CCW G34 rectangular groove rough milling CW L Note 1 is the coefficient of L helical cutting radius Cutter center _ Cutter center path path Rectangular Rectangular groove boundary groove boundary Fig 4 6 4 1 108 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Notice It is suggested to change the bit 1 of parameter No 12 into 1 when using this code For example The rough milling is performed within a rectangle groove by canned cycle G33 code refer to the following figure Start
239. e rough milling 41 GN er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 Lis more than the witin the rectangle groove in the finish milling 4 Lis more than the J witin the rectangle groove in the finish milling The cutter diameter is excessive big the alarm reasons are shown below 1 Cutter diameter is more than in the interior circle groove rough milling 2 Cutter radius is more than the I J in the interior circle groove fine milling 3 Cutter radius is more than J in the exterior circle groove fine milling 4 Cutter diameter is more than within the rectangle groove in the ig fine rough milling 5 Cutter diameter is more than J within the rectangle groove in the fine rough milling 6 Cutter radius is more than U within the rectangle groove in the fine rough milling 7 The cutter coefficient or the D is excessive big in helix Modify the value of the data parameter No 269 or the radius compensation value U is excessive big the alarm reasons are shown below 0188 1 Twice as much as U is more than in the rectangle groove complex cycle 2 Twice as much as U is more than J in the rectangle groove complex cycle 0195 D does not define or regards to 0 gt D mi z x lt In the constant surface cutting speed control it is incorrect to specify an axis 0198 Refer to the parameter No 254 The command P of the specified axis is with the illegal data Modif
240. e system by G92 Note 2 When however there is no alternative other than to cancel the cutter compensation before using the G92 code 43 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 4 2 12 Plane Selection G17 G18 G19 Format G17 G18 G19 Function Select the planes for circular arc interpolation cutter compensation or drilling and boring In this case the plane selection can be performed by G17 G18 G19 Explanation Without command parameter the system is regarded as G17 by default when starting up Also set the bit 1 2 and 3 of the parameter No 31 to determine the default plane after starting up The corresponding relationships between codes and planes are as follows G1 XY Plane G18 ZX Plane G19 YZ Plane The plane is invariable when the G17 G18 and G19 are not belonged to the specified block Example G18 X_ Z ZX plane GO X_ Y_ Plane invariable ZX plane Additional the movement code is regardless of the plane selection For example the following code shows that the Y axis is out of the ZX plane and the Y axis movement is regardless of the ZX plane G18Y_ Prompt At present only the canned cycle in the G17 plane is supported For the specification s sake it is better to define the specified plane in the corresponding block when the programming is performed specially when
241. eCommand MOS iis cassastetaneoleaigata reeds ei en a ea a ag an Ha enna 172 Si Coating ONOFF MOS MOY forarea r a o e a a e e e a aceon 173 5 1 4 A Axis Releasing Clamping M10 NEY sss tudiiictanaaseadidiiesawatinitvaaedesnaduatanshe ein neadnsecabhies suet esects 173 5 1 5 Tool Control Tool releasing Tool Clamping M16 M17 cccccseeesssesseseeeeeesesssesssessssseesseaaaas 173 5 1 6 Spindle Orientation Cancellation M18 M19 sci cictctenaishinsawatunseaaahica vuatarteata aranatntvaad estos 173 57 Toolesearchine Code Command M21 M22 Vrsnisinore irii i E TETE ea ccuadinteaan dies saaac ns 173 5 1 8 Tool magazine Return Code Command M23 M24 ccccceccccccccctccceesssssssssssssssssssesseeeeeaeas 173 D219 Reid Tappine M28 M297 she ate ia ct eal ack e anced a amin R neaneeaes 173 5 1 10 Helical Chip removal Conveyor ON OFF M35 M36 ccccscsssssssssssesssesessessesseseeseeeesseessaaas 174 5 1 11 Punching Water Valve ON OFF M26 M27 ccccssssssssssssssssssssessessessesessesssesssssesseeeeseeeeeeeeegs 174 5 1 12 Spindle Blowing ON OFF M44 M45 00 irinetan aariaa Eaei a aE EEEE E i ia a A A ea 174 5 1 13 Automatic Tool change Start End M50 M51 ccccsssssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseseeeaaaas 174 5 2 M Codes for Controlling Programisto i aE A a A O A A a 174 52 1 Program End and Rewo M30 M02 Jorit EEE ETETE E E 174 S22 Propran Dwel MOO eusa a A E duane tena ated imental a
242. each parameter 228 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting 3 3 2 2 Modification and Setting of Parameter Value 1 Select the lt MDI gt operation mode SETTING 2 Enter the lt SETTING gt page by the parameter switch set to 1 SYSTEM 3 Press sve then the PARAMETER softkey lastly enter the parameter display page 4 Move the cursor to the position where the parameter number to be modified Method 1 Display the page to be set the parameter by page up down button move the cursor bu direction buttons and then position the parameter place to be modified Method 2 Press to position after inputting the parameter number 5 Input the new parameter value It is necessary to input the password authority of the corresponding level when different levels parameter are modified by numerical button INPUT 6 Press the veo to confirm the parameter value is input and then displays 7 Close the parameter switch after the overall parameters setting are completed 3 3 3 Display Modification and Setting of Macro Variable ll SAIN TOA O 9 m gt O Z 3 3 3 1 Display of Macro Variable Enter the macro variable page display by H _ MACRO VARIABLE softkey there are two sub interface within the macro variable page USER VARIABLE SYSTEM VARIABLE which can be viewed or modified by its corresponding softkeys refer to the following concrete descriptions 1 User vari
243. eal time Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G73 command SINN 1OA i ry O Q 70 gt Z Q the system then performs the G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation Example M3 S1500 Cause the spindle to start rotating G90 G99 G73 X0 YO Z 15 R 10 Q5 F120 Position drill hole 1 then return to point R Y 50 Position drill hole 2 then return to point R Y 80 Position drill hole 3 then return to point R X10 Position drill hole 4 then return to point R Y10 Position drill hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y75 Position drill hole 6 then return to the initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference position M5 Spindle rotation stop M30 Note When the 2 6 hold machining are performed in the above mentioned example although the Q is omitted the chip removal operation still performs 4 4 2 Drilling Cycle Spot Drilling Cycle G81 Code format G81 X_Y_Z R F_K_ 69 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Function This cycle is used for normal drilling cutting feed and performed to the bottom of the hole The tool is then retreated from the bottom of the hole at the rapid traverse rate Exp
244. easured When the tool length offset No H in the registered is already regarded as the nominal tool length the value may not be input This parameter value is cleared after the tool No T is altered Note 1 When the measurement mode is selected as the length carlibration this length should be input and regarded as the standard tool Refer to the mandrel length 7 Measurement depth Z The depth from the prober surface to the diameter measurement position Default value 5 0mm 0 20 inch negative value means the downward 8 Overtravel value R amp Q gs m eT on gt om gZ m The overtravel value and the radial interval moving to the prober side downward Default value 4 0 mm 0 16 inch Note 2 It is the overtravel value along the length direction when the length measurement is performed it is the radial overtravel value in the diameter measurement and the overtravel value along the length direction and the radial overtravel value are same when the length amp diameter measurement are executed 9 Worn mark tool offset number A null tool offset number is used as the position of the tool wore mark 10 Wore allowrance tolerance I Cutter dimension adjustment compensates the cutting state of the tool The positive value brings that the actual radius is less than the specified value for example 01 means that the tool radius is less than 0 01 Also set the nominal cutter radius value to O by inpu
245. ecelerates and stops eventually after touching the limit switch the system then prompts the overtravel alarm information Decelerates till stops Limited switch Fig 2 5 1 1 Detailed explanations The overtravel in the Auto mode In the Auto mode when the tool touches the limit switch moves along one axis the overall axes operations may decelerate and then stop simultaneously the overtravel alarm occurs and the program stops at the overtravel block The overtravel in the Manual mode In the manual operation as long as any axis of the machine tool touches the limit switch the operations of the overall axes will be immediately decelerated then stopped 2 5 2 Software Overtravel Defense The software stroke range is set by data parameter P66 P73 and the machine tool coordinate value is regarded as the reference value If the movement axis exceeds the soft limit parameter setting the overtravel alarm may occur The bit 6 of parameter No 11 sets whether the stroke inspection 0 No 1 Yes is performed after the power is turned on till to the manual reference position return When the bit 7 of parameter No 11 sets the soft limit overtravel the overtravel 0 Before 1 After alarms The overtravel moves the axis reversely in the lt Manual gt mode the alarm is then released after moving out of the overtravel range 210 Chapter Two System ON OFF amp Safety Operation 2 5 3 Releasing of Overtravel Alarm The method
246. ed General purpose for overall axes when gaining the Z pulse signal Setting range 1 60 mm min 0100 Reference position speed return along the 1 axis 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0101 Reference position speed return along the 2 axis 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0102 Reference position speed return along the 3 axis 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0103 Reference position speed return along the 4 axis 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0104 Reference position speed return along the 5 axis 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min gt U v m z gt lt 0105 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant before the 1 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 0106 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant before the 2 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 0107 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant before the 3 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 0108 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant before the 4 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 378 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0109 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant before the 5 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 0110 Acceleration deceleration S type time constant 100 before the 1 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 3 400 ms 0111 Acceleration
247. ed hold and then perform the MPG interruption function refer to the Fig 6 2 1 2 for MPG interruption coordinate system gs m eT on gt om a RELATIVE ABSOLUTE MACHINE 1 727 mm 727 m 1 727 mm 47 897 mm 47 897 mm 47 897 mm 5 48 mm 5 48 mm 5 48 mm HANDLE INTR SUBSPEED REM DIST a mm a mm a mm a mm a mm a mm a mm a mm mm Pe REL ABS a PMONI Fig 6 2 1 2 The operation steps of MPG interruption coordinate system clear Move the cursor to MPG interruption coordinate system X flash by the X button the coordinate system is cleared by A and the Y Z axis shares with the same operation When the zero return operation is performed the coordinate system is then automatically cleared 297 ll SAIN TOA O z m gt O Z er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Note When the alarm or resetting is generated during the coordinate system is adjusted by using the MPG interruption function the MPG interruption is then cancelled 6 2 2 Relationships Between MPG Interruption and Other Fucntions Table 6 2 2 1 Display Relationship Machine lock MPT interruption movement machine tool is disabled after the machine locking is enabled Absolute coordinate value Absolute coordinate value does not change in MPG interruption Relative coordinate value Relative coordinate valu
248. ed times will be regarded as 1 Example M98 P1002L5 The subprogram No 1002 is consecutively called for 5 times e The performance sequence calling from main program to subprogram Main program 3 Subprogram N0010 010100 N0020 N1020 N0030 M98 P10100L3 N1030 NOO40 N1040 e N0050 M98 P10100S N1050 NOO60 N1060 e e M99 Fig 3 2 2 2 Calling the subprogram in the subprogram is same as the calling in the main program Note 1 When the specified subprogram number by address P can not be indexed the alarm occurs Note 2 The subprogram from No 90000 to 99999 are the system reserved The system can be performed the content of the subprogram instead of display the content when user calls these subprograms Note 3 Up to 4 layers can be nested for the subprogram calling 3 2 3 Program End Program begins from its name which is ended by M02 M30 or M99 Refer to the Fig 3 2 2 2 If the program end code is detected in the execution of the program M02 M30 or M99 The program is performed and then becomes to restting state when M02 M30 code ends Whether the bit 4 of parameter No 33 for controlling the M30 returns to the beginning of the program Whether the bit 2 of parameter No 33 for controlling the M02 returns to the beginning of the program If M99 code ends return to the beginning of the program and then the program is circularly performed If the M99 M02 and M30 are ended i
249. eedrate uses the system ON default F value Refer to G01 X200 Y100 F200 Note The speed of each axis direction G01 Xa YB ZyFf In this block the data parameter P87 for the setting Program example Refer to the Fig 4 2 2 1 Feedrate of X axis direction ou A O lt ge Sc zZ sS m e Feedrate of X axis direction Feedrate of X axis direction T itt d 3 Fig 4 2 2 1 Notice 1 The code parameters other than the F are the positioning parameter Set the upper limit value of the feedrate F by the data parameter P96 If the actual cutting feed The feedrate after using the override exceeds the upper limit which is then restricted at the upper limit Its unit is mm min If the actual cutting feedrate The feedrate after using the override is lower than the lower limit which is then retricted on the lower limit and its unit is mm min 2 The tool does not move when the G01 is not specified the positioning parameter The system is only changed the modal of current tool movement which is the G01 Wheter the system default mode is GOO When the parameter value is 0 or G01 When the parameter value is 1 can be set when the power is turned on by changing the value of the bit O of the parameter No 31 4 2 3 Circular Arc Helical interpolation G02 G03 A Circular arc interpolation G02 G03 28 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Both G02 and G03 are specified as follows The circular arc in
250. efer to the Fig 11 1 3 8 Send File Dialog File list File path File Name Par State C Documents and Setti 000003 txt user Sent Only send the edited file 1 file Add File Cancel Fig 11 1 3 8 gt a a z X lt Note 1 It is necessary to ensure the Baud rate setting is correct before the data transmission the series port cable connection is reliable Note 2 Never attempt to perform the system shifting or page oerate otherwise the serious error may occur Note 3 LADCHI TXT file is disabled after introducing to system it can be enabled after the power is turned off 11 1 4 Series Port DNC ON Line Machining Operation steps 1 CNC port setting 1 Enter to the setting page by J set the I O channel to 0 or 1 2 Select the lt DNC gt operation method in this case the system prompts DNC is already performed 336 2 The setting of series port communication software 1 Click the series port menu and then set the baud rate in the Series port setting dialog frame the Baud rate set to 38400 2 When the system I O channel sets to 0 the DNC agreement in the Transmission method drop down menu should be selected the Xon Xoff When the system I O channel sets to 1 the DNC agreement in the Transmission method drop down menu should be selected the XModem 3 Open the CNC program file The program file can be opened by the Open but
251. ely or reversely based upon the velocity from the data parameter P393 of which this distance is determined by data parameter P392 Check whether the motor is vibrative or abnormal noisy by repeatedly controlling the AXIS SHIFTING and AXIS SHIFTING softkeys before entering the optimizing schedule the motor s character can not be gained by pressing the AXIS SHIFTING and AXIS SHIFTING softkey movement axes consecutively once entering the optimizing schedule Note 1 Press the AXIS SHIFTING Jand AXIS SHIFTING Jsoftkey movement axes and collect the data after entering the optimizing schedule Note 2 Never attempt to change the data parameters P392 and P393 without the professionals otherwise the optimization may not succeed INPUT D vest button Confirm the operation or enter the next step button Cancel some one operation or return to the previous operation F Ea button Reset operation return to the initial operation step SAVE G button Save operation save the optimized parameter Operation schedule refer to the following figure 242 Chapter Three Enter the rigid grade adjustment and optimization interface Step1 Press KH or BE to Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting adjust the rigid i No continue grade adjusting the grade by direction buttons ether en to the next step No P
252. em Programming amp Operation Manual b Input the last character of the block to be copied SHIFT SAVE c Press buttons the program between the cursor and character input are copied SHIFT INSERT d Move the cursor to the position to be pasted press the buttons or PASTE softkey the paste is then completed The copy and paste of the block also can be performed in the program editing page Refer to the Fig 10 1 1 1 Cusor moves to the start of the block to be copied 2 Input the last character of the block to be copied 3 Press the COPY softkey the program copy is completed between the cursor and character input 4 Cursor moves to the desired paste position the paste is then completed by PASTE softkey Note 1 If there are several same completed characters should be copied in program copy the program between the completed character and cursor character with the search sequence downward Note 2 If the copy method is performed by N sequence number in program the program of line is copied between the cursor start and N sequence number The N sequence number should be located at the beginning of the block the copy is unsuccessful in other places Note 3 Up to 100 thousand lines of the block copy ll SAINN TOA O U m gt O Z 10 1 6 Cut and Paste of Block The operation steps of block cut a Enter the program editing page Refer to Fig 10 1 1 b Cusor moves to the start of the block to be c
253. en area the forbidden area can be set by the overlapping method Refer to the following figure 213 er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual the forbidden area of tool Fig 2 6 5 Set the overlapped forbidden area The unnecessary limit should be set out of the stroke of the machine tool 5 When bit 6 of parameter No 11 0 the enabled time of forbidden area after the power is turned on the manual reference position return is performed or the automatic reference point return is performed by G28 the forbidden area bundary is then enabled inmmediatly When the bit 6 of parameter No 11 1 after the power is turned on if the reference position is within the forbidden area it may alarm immediately It is only enabled in the G12 mode in the stored stroke limit 2 6 Alarm releasing If it enters the forbidden area and the alarm occurs the tool is only moved toward the reverse direction In order to eliminate the alarm the tool moves along its negative direction till retreating from the forbidden area and the system is then reset The tool can be moves forward or backward after the alarm removes Refer to the Section 2 5 2 in this operation lt O m C m maual for detail O U m gt O Z 7 The alam may immediately occur in forbidden area when G13 converts into G12 8 The bit 1 of parameter No 10 sets the movement whether performs the stroke inspecti
254. ent position Delete this area Fig 10 1 1 7 1 ll SAIN TOA O 9 m gt O Z PROGRAM In the lt EDIT gt mode enter the program display screen by position the cursor at the object start position Refer to the above mentioned character N100 to be deleted and the input the last complete character in the multi block to be cleared for example the S02 Refer to the Fig 10 1 1 7 1 and then press the The program between the cursor and address mark can be deleted Note 1 Up to 100 thousand lines of the block deletion Note 2 If there are several same completed characters should be deleted in program delete the program between the completed character and cursor character with the search sequence downward Note 3 When multiple blocks are deleted with N sequence number the N sequence number start position of destination deletion should be located at the initial line of this block 10 1 1 8 Deletion of Multiple Code Word Delete to the specified code word from current displayed one 323 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual N100 X100 0 M03 S2000 G01 X50 0 Y100 0 N2233 S02 Cursor current position Delete this area Fig 10 1 1 8 1 In the lt EDIT gt mode enter the program display screen by position the cursor at the object start position Refer to the above mentioned character N100 to be deleted and the input the last complete character in
255. er the 2 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 400 ms 0122 Acceleration deceleration E type time constant after the 3 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 400 ms 0123 Acceleration deceleration E type time constant after the 4 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 400 ms 0124 Acceleration deceleration E type time constant after the 5 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 400 ms 0125 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant before the cutting feed Setting range 3 400 ms 0126 Acceleration deceleration S type time constant before the cutting feed gt U v m z gt lt Setting range 3 400 ms 380 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0127 Acceleration deceleration L type time constant after 80 the cutting feed Setting range 3 400 ms 0128 Acceleration deceleration E type time constant after the cutting feed Setting range 3 400 ms 0129 Acceleration deceleration FL speed of the 10 exponential type Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0130 Interpolate the Max incorporative block numbers in adance Setting range 0 10 0131 Cutting feed position accuracy 0 03 Setting range 0 001 0 5 mm 0132 Circular interpolation control accuracy 0 03 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0133 Interpolate outline control accuracy in advance 0 01 Setting range 0 01 0 5 mm The acceleration of the linear ac
256. er part GSK218 series Function Machining object configuration It expresses by Capital English Letters M Milling machine Series continuation It is indicated by Capital English Letters Without Initial version Sub series continuation or improvemen number It expresses by Lowercase English Letters such as a b c Without Initial version ee HYPE Structure type It separately expresses by Capital Letters U H V and B or dedicated U Integral H Horizontal Vertical B Cabinet type Dedicated type It expresses by Capital Letter P LCD dimension LEC dimension It expresses by one number 1 9 structure or 1 8 4 inch 2 10 4 inch 3 9 Gedicatea code Dedicated type It expresses by two numbers 01 99 Example GSK218MC H 218MC Series Horizontal structure 8 4 inch LCD Defualt dimension GSK218MC H2 218MC Series Horizontal structure 10 4 inch LCD GSK218MC U1 218MC Series Integral structure 8 4 inch LCD GSK218MC P01 218MC Series No 01 dedicated machine GSK218MCa P25 218MCa Series No 25 dedicated machine 4 1 4 Bus Function Explanation This system adds Ethernet Bus Communication method from the beginning of the system software version V1 4 The functions described in this manual are suitable for the Bus and Pulse transmission methods For the former the new addition function for this system will particularly explain Refer to the following description when selec
257. erator arare noanean sanremo o dynamic modification and cutter compensation Tool magazine does not use fail to open the parameter Tool change command MO6 can not be used E PRA The scaling rotation polar coordinate does not support metic inch input shifting 0221 Tool chang macro program does not support the metic inch input shifting T Reference position return has not been performed before the automatic operation starts Any of the following errors occurred in the specified format at the programmable parameter input ee 1 Address N or R was not entered 2 Parameter number was not specified 3 Address P in the bit parameter input L50 does not specify 4 N P and R exceed its range Modify the program a i a T gt mi z x lt 0232 Three or more axes were specified as the helical interpolation axes 0233 Other operations are being used the equipment connected with the RS 232 C interface 0235 The record end symbol was specified 0236 The parameter for specifying program restart is not set correctly 0237 The command that should be specified the decimal point does not specify the 417 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual decimal point The same address appears more than once in a block Alternatively a block contains two ore more G codes belonging to the same group An illegal G code is specified at the pre read control m
258. eter P356 the desired machining total components can be set by data parameter P357 3 1 3 Relative Coordinate Clear and Middle The relative coordinate position clears the operation steps are shown below 1 Enter any interface with the relative coordinate display Refer to the Fig 3 1 3 1 FEED F mm min PRG SPEED per FEED OVRD 100 amp mm 46 126 168 2a FA 25 50 100 l SP 5 Orpm Y A 89 Cm Seo000 i 100 56 66 70 88 98 108 116 120 i C Z 25 e A8BUm Tool T COMMAND T NO T 008 OFFSET H 0 DAO0A G G17 G90 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 00O 0O 0O DATA a EAE PATH 1 n ee eee Fig 3 1 3 1 219 ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 2 Clearing operation The X flashes by the X button then press the L in this case the relative coordinate value towards to the X is already cleared Refer to the Fig 3 1 3 2 FEED F mm min PRG SPEED FEED OVRD 100 mm 446 686 128 168 Ha a Fa 25 5A 100 eo a rpm Y f RI fm 500000 M 100 58 66 78 88 98 188118 120 C Z o B m Tool T COMMAND T NO TO0OO OFFSET H 008 DOAA G G17 G9 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 00O OO DATA bo o S ooa PATH 1 E ABS ALL PMONI F
259. ethod an index axis is specified in the pre treat control method the Max cutting feed parameter 0239 sets to 0 the parameter of acceleration deceleration before interpolation sets to 0 Correct the setting parameter 0241 MPG pulse abnormality 0250 Axis name repeated Modify the parameters No 175 179 0251 ESP alarm after the alarm cancels it is better to return the zero 0252 Program illegal end CNC transmission velocity is slow reduce the feedrate DSP interpolation axis pulse command speed is excessive big it is better to perform the zero return by resetting performed again after controlling the reset button apes DSP initialization mark 5555 abnormality Zero return is performed again NO NO O oO 0 after controlling the reset button performed again after controlling the reset button ee eee button gt D m z x lt 0270 That the DSP evenly divides the interpolation point length is excessive small oa That the DSP accepts the interpolation data is excessive small zero return is performed again after pressing the ESP T Se 0273 DSP ardvare dara mernans anomaly Command pe tare DSP hardnaredianicfange aromaty Oaa e J 2275 Tre rerio vey mutinpzaion On e Woh seed modes 020 Each as sou st ist when sg the oorsee anton Re Shift to the SETTING TOOL SETTING MIDDLE interface when using the tool setting function 0282 Check whether the tool setter is
260. ethod G64 This function is always enabled once specifying before G61 G62 or G63 is specified Tool does not decelerate instead of executing next block at the end of the block Explanations 1 Without parameter format 2 G64 is the default feed mode of the system the end of the block does not decelerate instead of executing next block 3 The destination of the in position detection in exact mode is check whether the servo motor is reached within the specified position range 144 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 In the exact stop mode the tool paths are different between the cutting and tapping methds Refer to the following Fig 4 8 1 1 yes Position check lt Tool path in exact stop mode 1 Tool path in the cutting or tapping mode Fig 4 8 1 1 Tool path from block 1 to block 2 4 8 2 Automatic Corner Override G62 Format G62 Function Once the Auto corner override method G62 is specified this function is always enabled before G61 G62 or G63 is specified When the tool moves along the inner corner during the cutter compensation the cutting feed override is performed to restricting the cutting value within the unit time in this case the fine surface accuracy can be machinined accordingly Explanatins 1 When cutter compensation is performed the movement of the tool is automatically decelerated and reduced the load on the cutter at an inner corner and internal circular arc area so that it
261. ets to O without stopping the actual rapid traverse rate is set by parameter P93 General purpose for overall axes amp S amp oor on In the Auto mode select the rapid traverse rate by inetd cal ee l the rapid override can be carried out four step adjustment Fo 25 50 and 100 GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V CNC System can be selected the feedrate by its feed override wave band switch and the feed override can be carried out 21 level real time adjustment oO r PEA WM Wo0 Wh GSK218MC U1 is performed the feed override trimming by F OVERRIDE F OVERRIDE anq F OVERRIDE and 303 O U m gt O Z lt O m Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual p W Vu100 W performed the rapid traverse override for trimming by P overnilE AUXI and A OVERRIDE its operations are same as the above mentioned Note 1 The value set by F in feed override trimming program Actua feedrate The value set by F x feed override Note 2 The calculation of the rapid traverse speed value gained at the eventually trim by data parameter P88 P89 and P92 and the rapid override X axis actual rapid traverse speed The value set by P88 x rapid override The calculation method of the actual rapid traverse rate of Y and Z axes are shown as the above mentioned 7 10 Spindle Speed Trimming in Auto Mode In the Auto mode when the spindle speed con
262. eturn method can be used in the version of the system configuration DA98B GE2000 series increment method Zero return along each axis is enabled in the zero return mode The concrete operation steps are basically identical with the pulse servo zero turen refer to the Section 9 2 Operation Steps of Pulse Mechanical Zero Return 9 4 2 High Speed Increment Zero Return Set the bit parameter No 0 0 1 and No 5 4 0 the system is performed the zero return based upon the high speed one which can only be selected the one turn signal zero return method and this method can be used in the version of the system configuration GE2000 series increment method Each axis zero valid in zero mode Set the bit parameter No 20 7 0 No 20 6 1 No 20 5 0 to configure the GE2000 series single core absolute multi core absolute version The setting of parametr value of the data parameter P347 P351 can be modified the single core zero signal postion of the absolute encoder Zero turn along each axis is enabled in the zero return method Zero return steps 1 Enter the mechanical zero return operation method by ZERO in this case the Mechanical zero return displays at the right corner of the LCD 2 Select the X Y Z 4 or 5 axis of the desired mechanical zero return its direction of zero return is set by bit parameters NO 7 0 NO 7 4 3 Machine tool moves along with the mechanical zero direction at the rapid traverse rate its moveme
263. ever the performed after the parameter is operation of this file oe relevant parameter of the altered gs m eT on gt om system does not set The system alarm after one touch The ladder diagram and The transmission is Operation is completed The the parameter update of executed the power 3 parameter that should be cut off the ladder diagram are D should be turned on the primary power source is performed it is better to again modified power on again Interrupt input output Fail to read the file File error operation Interrupt input output Fail to write the file File error operation Interrupt input output Fail to copy the file File error operation File excessive big it is better to Component program is Interrupt input output use DNC more than 4M operation Interrupt input output The remainder space is absent Adequate space operation 6 The LADCHI TXT file is disabled after transiting the system which can be enabled after the power is turned on again 263 Or JJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 4 5 Setting amp Modification of Password Authority GSK218MC system provides authority setting function to avoid the machining program or CNC parameter is maliciously modified password divides into 5 levels the 1 level System factory the 2 level Machine tool factory the 3 level Sys
264. f the tool when the interpolation machining is stored within the tool offset number 5 Experience value tool offset number E The tool offset number is already registered the experience value E and T will not assign the same value when programming 6 Rough center coordinate Cx The absolute coordinate value of the rouch center of the workpiece along X axis If the current point is set to rough center directly press lt INPUT gt key to input a null value 7 Rough center coordinate Cy The absolute coordinate value of the rouch center of the workpiece along Y axis If the current point is set to rough center directly press lt INPUT gt key to input a null value 8 Measure point coordinate Z The absolute position of the Z axis during measuring If the current point is the measurement point directly press lt INPUT gt key to input a null value 9 Profile dimension tolerance H 253 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual The measured profile dimension tolerance value 10 Radial interval R When measuring the external profile the probe head is the distance from the destination surface before the Z axis moves The default is 8mm 0 3149inch when the power is turned on 11 Measure head overtravel distance Q The overtravel value of the measure head Input a value by programming the measure head that uses this value to find a surface is regarded as the extra
265. for releasing the hard limit overtravel In the manual or MPG mode firstly press the p gt VERRA On the panel then move out the axis For example if it is positive overtravel it moves out toward to negative vice versa reversely 2 6 Stroke Inspection Two cutter forbidden areas can be specified by stored stroke detection 1 and 2 I J K 1 The interior is forbidden area 1 The exterior is forbidden area the forbidden area of cutter Fig 2 6 1 Stroke inspection When the tool exceeds the stored stroke limit the alarm displays and the machine tool decelerates then stops When the tool enters the forbidden area and alarm occurs the tool can be moved along the reverse direction when it enters Detailded explanations 1 Stored stroke detection 1 This boundary can be set by data parameter P66 P73 the exterior of this area is forbidden one The manufacturer usually sets this area as the Max stroke of the machine tool 2 Stored stroke detection 2 Data parameter P76 P83 or the program code can be set this boundary the area within this boundary or out of the boundary can be set as the forbidden area which is set by bit O of parameter No 11 0 The forbidden area is inside 1 The forbidden area is outside 1 When the parameter setting forbidden area is used the points A and B should be set in the following figure 211 O Z m gt O Z lt O 4 Cc m er JJJ Sy j
266. g 3 6 1 3 3 1 Display Modification and Setting of Offset 3 3 1 1 Display of Offset Enter the offset display page by EJOFFSET softkey the offset interface is then shown below Refer to the Fig 3 3 1 1 1 225 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual o 0 000 0 000 000 mm 0 OAA mm 0 OAA mm deg DATA td 12 40 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 1 1 1 Press the HJOFFSET softkey in the above figure then enter the operation interface Refer to the Fig 3 3 1 1 2 o1 0 002 0 003 o A BAL 00A ll SINN TOA O 9 m 5 O Z 0 B00 B00 B00 B00 0 a 7 0 7 BOOmm AAAmm AAAmm 10 49 10 wer OOOO PATH 1 Fig 3 3 1 1 2 The compensation value can be directly input or performed the addition subtraction operation with the value at the current position Shape H means the tool length compensation Wear H means tool length abrasion and wear Shape D meand cutter compensation Wear D means cutter radius abrasion and wear 226 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting 3 3 1 2 Modification and Setting of Offset Value The methods for setting the tool offset in the offset interface 1 Enter the offset display interface by HJOFFSET 2 Move the cursor to the position where to be inputted the compensation number Method 1 Display the page to be modified the compensation
267. groove cutter radius 2 Se iene cae along with the X axis direction Cutter radius under the helix lt 1 2 cutter radius 15 SINN TOA ry O Q D gt Z Q Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Resolution range Function meaning O lt I lt 99999 999mm it is the Width of G35 G36 G37 G38 rectangle absolute value when in the ee groove along with the X axis direction negative The vectior of the circular arc center 99999999 99999999 mm relative start along with the Y axis Arc helix interpolation and scaling O lt sJS99999 999mm it is the The circle center distance between absolute value when in the G24 G25 G26 G32 _ finish milling start negative and the finish milling circle J gt Data parameter P269 setting value cutter radius Width of G33 G34 rectangle groove cutter radius 2 Oe along with the Y axis direction Cutter radius under the helix lt J 2 cutter radius 0 lt J lt s99999 999mm it is the SINN TOA y ry O Q D gt Z Q Width of G35 G36 G37 G38 rectangle absolute value when in the groove along with the Y axis direction oe negative The vectior of the circular arc center 99999999 99999999 mm relative start along with the Z axis Arc helix interpolation and scaling p 1589999 Fixed cycle repeated times Repeated calling times of subprogram i aea hi cutting
268. he G codes in group 09 when resetting or ESP C10 1 Clear the G codes in group10 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 10 when resetting or ESP C11 1 Clear the G codes in group 11 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 11 when resetting or ESP C12 1 Clear the G codes in group 12 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 12 when resetting or ESP C13 1 Clear the G codes in group 13 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 13when resetting or ESP C14 1 Clear the G codes in group 14 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 14 when resetting or ESP C15 1 Clear the G codes in group 15 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 15 when resetting or ESP Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0 1317 SOC RSC BDP SERN gt D m z gt x lt SCRW 1 Perform the pitch compensation 0 Do not perform the pitch compensation BDP 1 Use the bi directional pitch error compensation 0 Do not use the bi directional pitch error compensation 1 Calculating the reference coordinate of G96 spindle speed is regarded as or current point when the GO is positioned at the rapid traverse rate 0 Calculating the reference coordinate of G96 spindle speed is regarded as en point when the GO is positioned at the rapid traverse rate SOC 1 G96 spindle speed clamps after the spindle overri
269. he coefficient setting of helical cutting radius in the groove cycle should be more than 0 which is set by data parameter P269 For example An inner circle groove is performed by rough milling by canned cycle G22 code refer to the following figure 102 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Start point position Z 50 Point R plane position 5 Z 5 Fig 4 6 1 3 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G22 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 L10 W20 Q10 V10 D1 F800 Incircle groove rough millingcycle is performed G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Cancel the canned cycle then return from point R plane M30 Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G22 G23 command the system then performs the G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command positioning tool radius offset is ignored call the specified cutter compensation by program in the procedure of in feed 4 6 2 Fine milling Cycle of the Full Incircle G24 G25 Code format G24 G98 G99 x Y Z R I J D_ F_ K G25 Function Tool performs a whole circle with fine milling inside the circle based upon the specified radius value and the direction and then return after fine milling is executed Explanations G24 Fine milling cycle inside the whole circle along CCW G25 Fine milling cycle inside the whole circle along CW X Y The
270. he component on the fixture directly eference point Workpiece reference position Fixed distance 2 IdYJOM Tool center movement aims at the KA ee ee sell aed flat Reale te reference position because the tool center can WOUND ee COONAN not directly located at the workpiece point Set command at this place in this case the the workpiece coordinate system specified by workpiece coordinate system is overlapped CNC using the specified distance For with the one of the programming example G92 Fig 2 4 3 2 A machining program sets a workpiece coordinate system selecting a workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system set can be changed by moving its origin There are two methods to set the workpiece coordinate system 1 Using G92 see 4 2 11 for details 2 Using G54 G59 see 4 2 8 for details 2 4 4 Absolute Coordinate Programming and Relative Coordinate Programming There are absolute and relative definitions to define the axis moving amount The absolute definition is a method to program by the coordinate of the end point of the axis movement which is called absolute programming Relative definition is method to program directly by the axis moving amount which is call relative programming also called incremental programming 1 Absolute coordinate value It is the target position coordinate in the specified workpiece coordinate system namely the position to which the tool is moved
271. he data unit to be set is regarded as 10 up to gt U a 1000 override value can be set J x lt 0284 The retraction value or clearance value in the peck tapping cycle Setting range 0 100 mm 0286 The gear s number at the side of the spindle the 1 1 gear Setting range 1 999 0287 The gear s number at the side of the spindle the 2 1 gear Setting range 1 999 0288 The gear s number at the side of the spindle the 3 394 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List gear Setting range 1 999 0290 The gears number at the side of the position encoder side the 1 gear Setting range 1 999 0291 The gears number at the side of the position 1 encoder side the 2 gear Setting range 1 999 0292 The gears number at the side of the position encoder side the 3 gear Setting range 1 999 0294 The top speed of the spindle in rigid tapping the 1 6000 gear Setting range 0 9999 r min 0295 The top speed of the spindle in rigid tapping the 2 6000 gear Setting range 0 9999 r min 0296 The top speed of the spindle in rigid tapping the 3 6000 gear Setting range O0 9999 r min 0298 The linear acceleration deceleration time constant of 200 the spindle and tapping axis the 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0299 The linear acceleration deceleration time constant of 200 the spindle and tapping axis the 2 gear gt a mi z
272. he double drive manually Repeated the above steps 1 4 till the verification is performed 246 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting 3 4 Setting Display 3 4 1 Setting Page 1 Enter the page SETTING Enter the setting information display interface by f there are 5 sub interface in this interface SETTING M WORKPIECE COORDINATE CENTER TOOL SETTING amp DATA Jand PASSWORD check and modification can be performed by the corresponding software refer to the Fig 3 4 1 1 PAR SWITCH __ 0 OFF 1 ON PRG SWITCH 0 OFF 1 ON KeyBoard 0 218MC H 1 218MC V 2 218MC IN UNIT MM 1 INCH I O CHAN 0 Xon Xoff 1 XModem 2 USB AUTO SEQ 0 OFF 1 ON SEQ INC 0 1000 SEQ STOP PROGRAM NO SEQ STOP SEQUENCE NO DATE aoa jy 07 m ___12 p TIME 10 H so Mm 13 5 INPUT 10 50 13 PATH 1 WORK HIDATA PASSWORD Fig 3 4 1 1 F m r an AE om a 2 SETTING interface operation explanation Press the SETTING Jsoftkey check its parameters after the interface is set in the Fig 3 4 1 1 as well the corresponding parameter can be modified The operation methods and steps are shown below a Enter the lt MDI gt operation method b Move the cursor by up down button to the item to be changed c Input O or 1 according to the following explanations or modify it by the left or right key 1 Paramete
273. he end line of its line by j Cursor moves to the end of the program by 10 1 1 5 Insertion Deletion and Modification of Word PROGRAM Select the lt EDIT gt mode press the and then display the program screen lastly position the cursor at the position to be edited 1 The insertion of a word INSERT After the data is input press the the system may insert the inputted content at the left fo the cursor 2 The deletion of a word DELETE Position the cursor to the place to be deleted press the er the system may delete the content where the cursor locates 3 The modification of a word Move the cursor to the place to be modified and then input the modified content then press the ALTER the system replaces the positioned content of the cursor inputted one 10 1 1 6 Deletion of Single Block PROGRAM Select the lt EDIT gt mode press the and then enter the program screen then move 322 Chapter Ten Edit Operation N G the cursor to the initial line of the block to be deleted lastly delete the cursor block by T DELETE Note The can be input to delete The cursor should be placed at the first line the block regardless whether the block is with or without the sequence number 10 1 1 7 Deletion of Multi Block Delete to the block of the specified sequence number from the beginning of the current displayed word N100 X100 0 M03 S2000 N2233 S02 N 2300 M30 Cursor curr
274. he intermediate position 2 The setting and restriction of the G30 code are identical with the G28 the 2 3 and the 4 reference position setting are shown the data parameters P50 P63 3 G30 code can be used together with the G29 code return from the reference position and its setting and restriction are same as the G28 4 3 3 Automatically Return from Reference Position G29 Format G29 X_Y_Z_ Function G29 performs the operation that the appointed point returns from the reference position or current point via the intermediate point specified by G28 G30 Explations 1 The motion of G29 block can be divided into the following steps Refer to the Fig 4 3 1 1 1 Positioning to the intermediate point Point R Point B defined in G28 G30 from the reference position current point at the rapid traverse rate 2 Positioning to the specified point Point B Point C from a new intermediate point at the rapid traverse rate 2 G29 is one shot modal information which is only enabled for the current block Generally it is necessary to immediately specify the code return from reference position following with the G28 G30 3 The optional parameters X Y and Z in the G29 code format are used for specifying the destination point that is the point C in Fig 4 3 1 1 from the reference point return which can be indicated by an absolute value code or an incremental value code For an incremental the code value specifies the increme
275. he lowest feedrate is decelerated by controlling automatic corner using data parameter P145 refer to the Fig 4 8 2 3 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code The feedrate is overridden from point a to b Fig 4 8 2 3 Arc to arc 6 Regarding a program is both from straight line to arc and from arc to straight line the feedrate is overridden from point a to b and from c to d Refer to the Fig 4 8 2 4 Programmed path SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Tool center path Fig 4 8 2 4 Straight line to arc arc to straight line Limitations 1 Override for inner corner is disabled during acceleration deceleration before interpolation 2 Override for inner corner is disbled if the corner is preceded by a start up block or followed by a blocking including G41 or G42 3 Inner cornder is not performed if the offset is zero 4 9 Macro Function G Code 4 9 1 User Macro Program One function carried out by one group code is registered to memory in advance like subprogram This functions can be indicated by one code which can be performed only write the represented code 147 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual in program The group codes are called user macro program body and the represented codes are regarded as User Macro Code The user macro program body sometimes is abbreviated as Marco
276. he other one Table 4 9 5 2 Operators 167 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Greater than or equal to 2 E a Less than or equal to lt gt Typical program The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10 O9500 1 0 Initial value of the variable to hold the sum 2 1 Initial value of the variable as an addend N1 IF 2 GT 10 GOTO 2 Branch to N2 when the addend is greater than 10 1 1 2 Calculation to find the sum 2 2 1 Next addend GOTO 1 Branch to N1 N2 M30 End of program 4 Repetition WHILE statement Specify a conditional expression after WHILE While the specified consition is satisfied the program from DO to END is executed otherwise turn to the block after END WHILE Conditional expression DO m m 1 2 3 If the condition is satisfied Program If the condition is not satisfied y END m When the specified condition is satisfied the program from DO to END after WHILE is executed otherwise it may perform the block after END This kind of command format is suitable for the IF statement The numbers followed with the DO and END are specified the labels of the program execution range The numbers 1 2 and 3 can be used When a number other than 1 2 and 3 is used the alarm may occur Explanation gt Nesting The identification numbers 1 to
277. he system I O channel sets to 1 PC delivers based upon the data packet in this case the dialog frame displays the state of file transmission which 337 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual contains the delivered data packet and the times of the retransmission refer to the Fig 11 1 4 3 DAC Communication State File Hame Sent Eytes Sent time Sent Lines Bytes Sec Fig 11 1 4 2 The system I O channel sets to 0 sending File Hame Fartition Sent Fack Fig 11 1 4 3 The system I O channel sets to 1 Note 1 The series port communication software can not be performed other operations other than the end gt a a z X transmission during the DNC transmission 2 M99 regards as M30 in DNC mode 3 Cancel the operation by after the machining is completed 11 2 USB Communication 11 2 1 Brief amp Precaution Precautions 1 Set the I O channel to 2 in lt SETTING gt interface 2 The suffix name of CNC program should be txt nc or CNC and stored at the U disk root directory otherwise the system will not be read 3 Never attempt to pull out the U disk when transmitting the communication by USB to avoid the 338 product fault or unexpected result 4 The U disk can be pulled out when the indicator of U disk does not flash after the U disk communication operation is completed to guarantee that the data trans
278. hen performs the G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation 4 4 8 Boring Cycle G85 Code format G86 X_Y Z RF K Function This cycle code is used for boring machining cycle omit the dwell operation at the bottom of a hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Repeated machining times 82 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G86 G98 G86 G99 Spindle positive Initial point x plane Spindle positive Point R plane Spindle stop L Fig 4 4 8 1 Rapid traverse to point R after positioning along the X and Y axes and then perform a boring from point R to Z tool retracts at a rapid traverse rate when reaching to the bottom of a hole Before specifying G86 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle When the G86 and the M code are specified at a same block perform the M code at the time of performing the 1 hole position operation and then the system then proceeds the next
279. hich supports the GSK LINK Ethernet bus function and the connection is more convenient as well it supplies the statement macro program Macro B so that the programming is briefer It can be adapted with the Milling Machine Center High velocity CNC engraving and milling machine grinding machine and hobbing machine etc SINN IOA ry O Q D gt Z Q DABO Og Bee is FIER M ME m e M a a rI HAECABAE OCERETAH i i paacedsz i High velocity amp high accuracy complicated curve surface machining efficient velocity 8m min optimal machining velocity 4m min Top position velocity 60m min the Max feedrate150m min Up to 1000 for the pretreatment sections it owns the prospect function high velocity high accuracy and good smoothness The installation structure divides into integral horizontal and vertical which is Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual separately used the 8 4 10 4 inch high resolution color LCD the newly designed man machine interface is more beatiful friendly and useful It supports the Chinese English Russian Spanish and Turkey etc t supports the functions such as the PLC on line monitoring editing compiling and signal trace It supports many kinds of tool magazines for example the turntable disk and servo one It supports the statement macro program Macro B Abundant help prompt inform
280. hich is nothing to do with the workpiece coordinate system 1 Before calling a workpiece coordinate system 2 Before the machine tool zero return Generally the G92 floating coordinate system is used for correcting the machining of the temporary workpiece is operated at the beginning of the program or specify the G92 in MDI mode before automatically operating the program 2 There are two methods to confirm the floating coordinate system 1 Coordinate system confirmation based upon a tool nose 42 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Fig 4 2 11 2 The Fig 4 2 11 2 shows that G92 X25 Z23 the tool nose position is treated as X25 Z23 point in the floating coordinate SINN 1OA 2 One fixed point at the tool handle is regarded as the reference point coordinate system i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Reference Fig 4 2 11 3 The Fig 4 2 11 3 shows that the G92 X600 Z1200 is used specify the coordinate system setting When one reference point on the tool handle is regarded as the start And therefore if it is movement according to the absolute code in the program and then the reference position moves to the specified position the tool length compensation should be added its value is the difference from the reference point to the tool nose Note 1 If the G92 setting coordinate system is used in the tool offset The tool offset does not add for the tool length compensation and set the coordinat
281. hip between COM and COME is incorrect alternatively the function command is used between them User ladder diagram exceeds the Max allowable lines or steps O A O O NO O Troubleshooting reduce the compiled NET numbers END2 or END1 and END2 are incorrect 1006 Illegal output in the network Check the output format PLC is without communication due to the hardware fault or the system 1007 interruption error It is necessary to contact the system equipment manufacturer 1008 Function code does not correctly connected 1009 Fail to connect the network horizontal while the ladder diagram is edited The address or data is inconsistent with the format of this function command 1012 The address or data does not correctly input Input again 1013 Illegal characters are specified or the data are exceeded its range 1014 CTR address repeated Select the unused CTR address again Function command JMP does not used correctly the corresponding 1015 relationships between JMP and LBL are incorrect Alternatively the JMP function command is used again between JMP and LBL 1016 Incompleted network structure Change the ladder diagram The network structure does not support at present Change the ladder diagram 1019 TMR address repeated Select the unused TMR address again 1020 The parameter is absent in function command Input the legal parameter PLC performance is overtime the system
282. iable is quoted the address itself is also ignored For example When the variable 1 is 0 and the variable 2 is null the performance result of GOOX 1 Y 2 is GOOXO b Operation lt Vacant gt is the same as 0 except when evaluating by lt vacant gt Table 4 9 2 6 2 1 l 2 lt vacant gt 2 1 5 2 1 5 J 2 0 2 0 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 0 2 0 c Conditional expressions lt Vacant gt deffers from 0 only for EQ and NE 155 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Table 4 9 2 7 When 1 lt vacant gt When 1 0 1 EQ 0 1 EQ 0 i 1 Established Not established 1 NE 0 1 NE 0 i 1 Not established Established 1 GE 0 1 GE 0 J Established Established 1 GT 0 1 GT 0 is 1 Not established Not established aa AJ O lt 3E DC zZ sS lt m 5 e 000d 012 poga amp amp a g 8005 000S 0020 000s rene _ ewe wan o NOTE NULL YARILABLES A 14 30 31 P PATH 1 Fig 4 9 2 2 When the value of a variable is blank the variable is null 156 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 9 3 User Macro Program Call When G65 is specified the user macro program specified at address P is called and the data can be passed to the custom macro program by argument Format G65 P oooooLoooo lt Argument specification gt Numbers of calling The program number of called macro program body
283. ial direction FFF R Fx The speed along the X axis direction Fy The speed along the Y axis direction Fz The speed along the Z axis direction 185 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 7 4 Feedrate Override Button The feedrate in the Manual and Auto modes can be adjusted by the override adjustment buttons on the operation panel which can be used the override between 0 200 10 of each gear total 21 gears In the Auto mode when the override button adjusts to zero the system will then stop the feed and displays the cutting override 0 and then adjust the override button the program can be continued 7 5 Automatic Acceleration Deceleration The system is automatically performed the acceleration deceleration control by moving the motor at the start and end and therefore it can be stably started and stopped Also it can be automatically accelerated or decelerated when the movement speed changes Hernce the acceleration or deceleration does not consider when programming Rapid feed Forward acceleration deceleration 0 Linear 1 S type backward acceleration deceleration 0 Linear 1 Exponential type Cutting feed Forward acceleration deceleration 0 Linear 1 S type backward acceleration deceleration 0 Linear 1 Exponential type Manual feed Backward acceleration deceleration 0 Linear 1 Exponential type The
284. ied spindle speed exceeds the top spindle speed in tapping data parameter P257 the upper limit speed of spindle in tapping cycle the system then alarms the top speed level of the spindle in the rigid tapping is determined by P94 P296 F command If the specified F value exceeds the upper limit value of the cutting feedrate data parameter P96 sets the upper limit value it is subject to the upper limit value P command P is the modal code the minimum value of parameter is set by data parameter P281 the maximum value of parameter is determined by data parameter P282 P is oprated based upon the minimum value when it is less than the parametr setting value of P281 and it is operated based upon the maximum value when it is more than the parameter setting value of P282 Axis shifting Cancel the canned cycle before shifting the tapping axis If the tapping axis is changed in rigid tapping mode the system then shows the No 206 alarm Override The feedrate and spindle rotation feedrate are 100 by default during the tapping the machine tool still operates after pressing the feed hold button till the completion of the operation return Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation Program restart The program restart function is disabled in tapping cycle 78 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 4 6 Fine Boring Cycle G 6
285. ied the position on a machine coordinate system the tool moves to the position by rapid traverse G53 which is used to select a machine coordinate system is a one shot G code that is it is enabled only in the block in which it is specified on a machine coordinate system Specify an absolute command G90 for G53 When an incremental command G91 is specified the G53 command is ignored When the tool is to be moved to a machine specified position such as a tool change position program the movement in a machine coordinate system 41 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual based on G53 Note When G53 is specified temperoarily cancel the current comensation and tool length offset and then recover it at the next compensation axis block to be buffered 4 2 11 Floating Coordinate System G92 Format G92 X_Y_Z_ Function Set a floating workpiece coordinate system Three code parameters are specified an absolute coordinate value of the current tool in a new floating workpiece coordinate system Explanations A G92 floating P coordinate system Mechanical zero achine coordinate system origin Fig 4 2 11 1 1 The above mentioned Fig 4 2 11 1 shows that the cooresponding origin of the G92 floating coordinate system is the value below the machine coordinate system w
286. ifted the panel Alarm No 0087 0091 are the start points of the reference position return wea along each axis of which the reference position return can not be performed due to the alarm numbers are too close to the reference position or it is so gt D mi z x lt slowly The reference position should be departed from the start as far as 412 Appendix Two Alarm List for the reference position return 0092 G27 command can not return to the reference position i 0093 Unmatch motor type e nade A program restart is performed without the reference position return after Power ON or ESP and G28 was found in program aan On the PARAMETER SETTING screen PWE parameter writing enabled E possible Alternatively the reference position should be specified the fast rate E is set to 1 Set it to 0 then reset the system oor Fonero memor daia dorer enue tettre poston soroa Tied Tre mor ype parameter beween the system and arve remeare 070 Bus communication eror Crece rerai otte ree f oo meeen OOO o meane oO oras The ve te inconsistent wie gear toate systern servo parameter oror The parameters bewoon he dive ard system sero wre noorse A 01o Tre poston aata exceeds the alowance range Perom he zero reum The calculation is out of the allowable range 10 to 10 0 and 10 to 0111 ger 0112 Division by zero was specified including tan90 0113 A function command which cannot be used in c
287. ig 3 1 3 2 ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z INPUT 3 Middle Operation The X flashes by the X button then press de in this case the relative coordinate value towards to the X is already divided at the middle The relative coordinate value of this axis is divided by 2 4 Coordinate setting The X flashes by the X button then input the desired data confirming INPUT by 0 the data is inputted to the coordinate system accordingly 5 The clearing method of the Y and Z axes are identical with the above mentioned 3 1 4 Bus Monitoring Position Page Display When the system uses the Ethernet bus communication method enter the position page display by res then the MONITORING interface by its softkey in this interface simultaneously the current machine coordinate multi coil position encoder value grating position motor speed and motor loanding means the percentage of the rated loading can be display It is convenient to debug the machine and monitor the servo current operation state with real time by this interface Refer to the Fig 3 1 4 220 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting 4029 02731 416 16513 4048 30982 e466 48477 Q 00 0 B08 PATH 1 MDI O o m Se A Fig 3 1 4 1 ll SINNIOA O U m gt O Z 3 2 Program Display on the panel there are five interfaces E PROGRAM MDI CUR M
288. igure Graphic page Alarm page Help page PLC page Diagnosis page SYSTEM PROGRAM SETTING System page Position page Program page Setting page Descript Function ion Explanation Graph Enter the corresponding softkey conversion Display the graph parameter and its graph display page by the page graph page The graph parameter sets the graph center display dimension and proportion Alarm Enter the Check different alarm information pages by converting the Help Enter the help Check different help information by converting the corresponding Check the configutration of the relevant version information and NOILVasadO ll SAIN TOA Program Enter system I O port of the PLC ladder diagram by corresponding control program contr softkey conversion simultaneously the PLC ladder diagram can page ol page l be altered in MDI mode l l Enter the l l Diagnosi Check the I O port signal state at each side of system by diagnosis l l s page corresponding softkey conversion page Display cutter offset parameter macro variable and screw System Enter the compensation display pages by the corresponding softkey interface system page conversion Position Enter the Display the relative absolute complex and program monitoring Display the program MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT list display Program Enter the page the multi page program names can be checked by the age rogram page pag prog ji page buttons on the list interface
289. iminating the machine backlash which can be performed the accuracy positioning from one direction by using G60 Explanations G60 which is a one shot G code Set whether it is modal value by the bit 0 of parameter No 48 can be enabled only in the specified block Parameter X Y and Z are indicated as the end coordinate values in the absolute programming and the tool movement distance in the increment programming In the tool offset the path of unidirectional positioning is the one after the tool compensation when the unidirectional positioning is performed The marked overrun in the above mentioned figure can be set by the system parameters P335 P336 P337 and P338 and the dwell time can be set by the P334 as well the positioning direction can be determined by setting the of the overrun Refer to the system parameter for details For example G90 GOO X 10 Y10 G60 X20 Y25 1 36 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code If the system parameter are P334 1 P335 8 and P336 5 tool path is AB dwell 1s BC for the 1 statement B 28 20 A 10 10 Dwell for 1S SINN TOA en 5 a D gt Fig 4 2 6 2 System parameter Table 4 2 6 1 P334 Dwell time for the single direction positioning Unit s P335 Single direction positioning and overshoot along with the X axis Unit mm P337 Single direction positioning and overshoot along with the Z axis Unit mm ES TEET TORE 7 i P3
290. in the case of the available mechnical system 188 Chapter Eight Tool Function CHAPTER EIGHT TOOL FUNCTION 8 1 Tool Function Specify the numerical values up to 8 digits followed with the address T for using selecting the tool on the machine tool In principle two or more T codes can not be specified at a same block If a same codes at a same block is set without alarm it is subject to the following T codes The digit numbers to be specified of address T and the machine tool operation of corresponding by T code can be referred to the manual made by machine tool factory When the movement codes and the T codes are specified at a same block which are performed at the same time When T codes and tool change code M06 are shared with a same block firstly perform the T code and then the tool change code If the T codes and tool change code M06 are not shared with a same block the tool change code detects whether the spindle tool number is consistent with the T code cutter if does the tool change will not be performed The following programs are regarded as examples 000010 N10 T2M6 The cutter on spindle is No T2 N20 M6T3 The cutter on spindle is No T3 N30 T4 The cutter on spindle is No T3 N40 M6 The cutter on spindle is No T4 N50 T5 The cutter on spindle is No T4 N60 M30 The cutter on the spindle is No T4 after the tool change programs are performed 189 SINN IOA y J O Q D gt Z Q O
291. indle negative gt Translation value q Fig 4 4 9 1 Spindle stops the tool after orientation along with the X and Y axes and moves at the opposite direction along the tool nose and movement is performed to the bottom of the hole point R The tool is then shofted in the direction of tool nose and the spindle is rotated negatively Boring is performed in the positive direction along the Z axis until the point Z is reached At point Z the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position again the tool is shifted in the direction opposite to the tool tip then the tool is returned to the initial level The tool is then shifted in the direction of the tool tip and the spindle is rotated CW to proceed to the next block operation Parameter Q specifies the distance of tool retraction The tool retraction direction and its axis can be specified by the bit 4 and 5 of parameter No 42 the Q value should be positive and the sysmbol is still disabled even if using the negative The offset value of the Q at the bottom of a hole is the registered modal value within the canned cycle so it is important to specify it carefully And therefore it also uses for cutting depth of the G73 and G83 Before specifying G87 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle When the G87 and the M code are specified at a same block perform the M code at the time of performing the 1 hole position operation and then the syste
292. ing figure 66 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Positioning rapid traverse GO Cutting feed linear interpolation G1 Manual feed Offset rapid traverse GO Dwell Fig 4 4 4 The comparison table G73 G89 of canned cycle Table 4 4 3 Drilling Operation at the Retraction G code Application Z direction bottom of a hole Z direction G73 Intermittent Intermittent feed Rapid traverse traverse High speed peck machining speed peck machining Dwell a Feed Rapid traverse Counter tapping cycle positive Oriented spindle G76 Feed Rapid traverse Fine boring cycle stop Rapid traverse Drilling bore the stage hole EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q G83 Intermittent Intermittent feed Rapid traverse traverse Peck Peck machining cycle cycle a Feed Feed Tapping negative ee a Feed Spindle positive Rapid traverse p Boing a spindle Manual spindle Feed 7 Boring stop positive Restriction Tool radius offset D will be omitted during the canned cycle positioning 67 SINN 1IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 4 4 1 High speed Peck Machining Cycle G73 Code format G73 X YZ RQF K_ Function This cycle is specially set for performing the high speed peck drilling which is performed the intermittent cutting feed till to the bottom of
293. ing function 4 When the manual intervention is performed it is note that the machining procedure and machining shape to avoid damage the tool or machine tool The manual intervention operation is shown below 286 Chapter Four Manual Operation 1 N1 block cutting workpiece N A N2 j a ey ee ee ee Workpiece N1 Block sat 2 At the intermediate point A of the N1 block the machine stops after controlling the feed hold switch Workpiece 4 After the tool automatically returns to the point A based upon the G00 speed perform the remained section of the N1 program Workpiece 4 1 5 Workpiece Correction In order to guarantee the machining accuracy dimension shape and position precision of the component and surface quality it is necessary to correct the position of the workpiece or the fixture for clamping the workpiece The common correction method contains drawing trial cut etc as for its character GSK 218MC CNC designs the correcting operation method for specially using the tool For example the center of a rectangle workpiece X Y plane is positioned based upon the trial cut halving correction method lIt is also called as Center Correction the operation steps are shown below 1 Start the spindle with a certain rotation speed 2 System shifts to the display interface of the relative coordinate Firstly correct the X direction Position to the one side of the workpiece along X axis based upon the operatio
294. installed or set the bit parameter 1 6 to 1 O 0283 Z axis exceeds the safety position check the tool setter or tool length setting o 418 Appendix Two Alarm List 0286 Automatic tool length measure error perform it again a 0401 Drive alarm 01 Servo motor speed exceeds the setting value i 0402 Drive alarm 02 Main circuit power voltage excessive high i 0403 Drive alarm 03 Main circuit power voltage excessive low o jaoi Drive alarm 04 The numerical value of the position error counter exceeds the setting value 0405 Drive alarm 05 Motor s temperature is excessive high 0406 Drive alarm 06 Speed regulator is saturation for a long time 0407 Drive alarm 07 CCW CW drive prohibition input are OFF nage Drive alarm 08 The absolute value of the numerical value of the position error counter exceeds 230 0409 Drive alarm 09 Encoder signal error 0410 Drive alarm 10 Control power 15V is lower io 0411 Drive alarm 11 IPM intelligent module fault i 0412 Drive alarm 12 Motor s current excessive big 0413 Drive alarm 13 Servo drive and motor overloading Instantaneously heat i 0414 Drive alarm 14 Brake circuit fault LC 0415 Drive alarm 15 Encoder counter abnormality 0420 Drive alarm 20 EEPROM error 0430 Drive alarm 30 Encoder Z pulse error Lo a ee ae re i ET Drive alarm 32 UVW signal exist full high level or full low level a CAE a A E E 0437 Drive alarm 37 Enco
295. int R then stop that the bottom of the hole for 1s Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial positon plane G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference position M5 Spindle rotation stop M30 Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G89 command the system then performs the G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation 4 5 Rigid Cycle G Code 4 5 1 Left handed Rigid Tapping Cycle G74 Code format G74X Y ZR PFK Function In the rigid method the working of spindle motor is a servo motor and this code can be carried out the left handed tapping with high speed and high accuracy Explanation X_Y_ Hole position data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R P_
296. ion G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Reference point return G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Reference point return M30 End of program M30 End of program Restrictions G code When using the G 4 G84 command fail to specify G code in 01 G00 to G03 G60 is 71 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual modal code bit O of parameter No 48 sets to 1 group at the same block the system then shifts to the G60 modal When the G74 G84 and M codes are specified at a same block perform the M code while the 1 hole is performed the positioning operation the next tapping operation is then disposed M code To use the miscellaneous function M code rotates the spindle before specifying the G74 G84 If the spindle rotation does not specify the system automatically rotates based upon the current spindle command speed in the R plane then adjust as the CW G74 CCW G84 When the G74 G84 and the M code are specified at a same block perform the M code at the time of performing the 1 hole position operation The system then proceeds next tapping When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement S command lf the specif
297. ions to all the unnecessary or unallowable operations because there are too many possibilities Therefore the matters not specially described herein should be considered as impossible or unallowable NOTICE The functions and specifications e g precision and speed described in this manual are only for this product itself For those CNC machine tools installing this product the actual function configuration and specifications depend on the designs of the machine tool builders Moreover the function configuration and specifications of the CNC machine tool are subject to the manual provided by the machine tool builder All specifications and designs in this manual are subject to change without notice VI Llist BOOK PROGRAMMING This part introduces the technolog specification production types command code and program format of the GSK218MC BOOK Ii OPERATION This part introduces to the operation of the machining center CNC system of GSK 218MC series APPENDIX This part introduces the factory standard parameter and alarm list etc of the machining center CNC system of the GSK218MC series VU Gr Wisi GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation SECURITY RESPONSIBILITY Security responsibility of the manufacturer Manufacturer should take responsibility for the design and structure danger of the CNC system and the accessories which have been eliminated and or
298. irectly shifted instead of passing the offset cancellation state In this case the tool path is as follows Tool ponie path Ea X Y Programming New Generally it is not straight line New path yeckor vet Start o d old X Y yecto Programming yector Tool center path Start path Generally it is not straight line Fig 4 7 2 6 G1G41D_ X_Y_ G42D X Y G1G42D_X_ Y G41D_X Y D The alteration of offset value 123 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual The alteration of offset value generally is in the offset cancellation state when the tool change performs the position GOO and linear interpolation also can be performed in the offset state its description is shown below Tool center path Tool center path Programming Programming path ath Start c Start Fig 4 7 2 7 The alteration of offset vector E The of offset value and tool center path If the offset value is set as negative value the machined workpiece equals to that the G41 and G42 on the program list are totally changed And therefore the cutting along the external workpiece becomes to the internal cutting and the original internal machinig along workpiece turns into the external machining It is supposed that the offset value is positive value in the common program refer to the follo
299. is determined by parameter for example set F speed in GO code it is the cutting feedrate of the following machining section For example GO X0 Y10 F800 Rapid feed using the speed set by system parameter G1 X20 Y50 Use the feedrate of F800 Rapid positioning speed is adjusted by buttons on the operation panel Refer to the Fig 4 2 1 2 FO 25 50 and 100 FO speed is set by data parameter P93 general purpose for each axis W R OVERRIDE SSS y100 e c amp amp WUFO P25 f 50 foo TLX1 0 0018 0 01 f 0 1 1 a V R OVERRIDE 218MC 218MC H 218MC V buttons 218MC U1 button Fig 4 2 1 2 The button of rapid feedrate Note It is important to note the worktable and workpiece positions when programming to prevent the tool from impacting 4 2 2 Linear Interpolation G01 Format G01X Y Z F_ Function The tool along a line moves to the specified position based upon the feedrate mm min from parameter F 21 n J O Q D gt Z Q SINN TOA Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Explanations 1 X_Y_Z_ isthe end coordinate value It is concerned to the concept of coordinate system refer to the Sections 2 4 1 2 4 4 2 The feedrate specified in F is always enabled unitl a new value is specified The feedrate specified with F code is calculated along with the linear path interpolation If the F code does not specify in program the f
300. is inch inch min when the inch input is performed the basis unit of the rotation axis is deg deg min 345 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 1 Bit Parameter System parameter No 0 0 0 MODE SYEDA SEQ MSP CPB INI INM Feus PBUS 1 The transmission method of the drive is bus type 0 The transmission method of the drive is pulse type INM 1 The least movement unit of the linear axis is inch method 0 The least movement unit of the linear axis is metric method INM sets to 0 and when the metric input executes the basis unit of the linear axis is mm mm min the basis unit of rotation axis is deg deg min INM sets to 1 and when the inch input executes the basis unit of the linear axis is inch inch min the basis unit of rotation axis is deg deg min INI 1 Inch input 0 Metric input INM sets to 0 and when the metric input executes the basis unit of the linear axis is mm mm min the basis unit of rotation axis is deg deg min INM sets to 1 and when the inch input executes the basis unit of the linear axis is inch inch min the basis unit of rotation axis is deg deg min CPB 1 Pulse and Ethernet are simultaneously used 0 Pulse and Ethernet are not simultaneously used MSP 1 Use the dual spindle control 0 Do not use the dual spindle control SEQ 1 Automatically insert the sequence number gt E v m z
301. ization with any axis 1 the 1 axis 2 the 20d axis 3 the 3 axis Setting range 0 3 0381 The top allowable error among the synchronization 200 axes Setting range O0 10000 0382 Set the D value of dual drive reference position 0 0000 Setting range 0 0000 2000 0000 0387 The position value of tool setter in G53 along the 1 aa axis Setting range 999 9999 999 9999 0388 The position value of tool setter in G53 along the 2 ae axis Setting range 999 9999 999 9999 0389 The position value of tool setter in G53 along the 3 aa axis Setting range 999 9999 999 9999 gt U v m z gt lt 0390 The estimated length from the current tool point to the fixture Setting range 0 0000 999 9999 0391 The diameter of automatic prober Setting range 0 5000 999 9999 0392 The movement distance of the servo optimization 50 402 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List Setting range O 100 0393 The movement rate of the servo optimization 2000 Setting range 0 5000 0394 Coordinate system back up along 1 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 0395 Coordinate system back up along 2 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 0396 Coordinate system back up along 3 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 0397 Coordinate system back up along 4 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 0398 Coordinate system back up along 5 axis Setting range 9999 9999 999
302. l compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Thread leading In the feed min method the relationships among the thread leadind feedrate and spindle speed as follows Feedrate F screw tap pitch x spindle speed S For example Tap a thread hole M12x1 5 on component the parameter can be optioned S500 500 r min F 1 5x500 750mm min Multi head thread x head numbers F value In the feed method per revolution thread leading equals to feedrate 91 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual For example Feed min Fee rev Spindle speed 1000r min Spindle speed 1000r min Thread leading 1 0mm Thread leading 1 0mm Then feedrate of Z axis 1000 1 1000mm min Then feedrate of Z axis thread leading 1 1mm r G94 Feed min G95 Feed rev G00 X120 Y100 Positioning G00 X120 Y100 Positioning M29 S1000 Specify a rigid tapping M29 S1000 Specify a rigid tapping G74 Z 100 R 20 F1000 Left handed rigid tapping G74 Z 100 R 20 F1 Left handed rigid tapping G80 Cancel the tapping cycle G80 Cancel the tapping cycle G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Reference position return G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Reference position return M30 End of program M30 End of program Restriction G code Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parame
303. l is delivered to PLC from system its meanings and setting methods of each diagnosis number are shown in the matched GSK 218MC CNC System PLC amp Installation Connection Manual 3 X signal interface Enter the diagnosis MT PLC interface by X SIGNAL softkey in the lt DIAGNOSIS gt interface Refer to the Fig 3 6 1 1 3 xX00 x001 x002 x003 x004 x005 XOG x018 xoo7 00000111 xos X008 X020 xoa ooo ooo oo xo x10 00000000 xoze you 17 04 18 DATA Rd PATH 1 ie ee ee ae Fig 3 6 1 1 3 O O S O S O O O O QS S O OS S O QS S Ss Ss xoz x013 x014 x015 E He E O H eje eje E E Ojele e i O O Pile Io lololol o 8 9 9 9 s 8 9 9 9 9s 8 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 9 98 8 9 9 98 9s 8 9 9 9 9s 8 9 9s 9 9s O io oS i O as i O O O O O S oloo olo o oloo olo o oloo olo jlolelS oleje olo o oloo olo olol oloo oloo o o o ole o O O O O O O O fan O i SO O e This signal is delivered to PLC from system its meanings and setting methods of each diagnosis number are shown in the matched GSK 218MC CNC System PLC amp Installation Connection Manual 4 Y signal interface Enter the diagnosis PLC MT interface by Y SIGNAL softkey in the lt DIAGNOSIS gt interface Refer to the Fig 3 6 1 1 4 gs m
304. lanations X Y Hole position data Z Incremental program means specify the distance form point R to the bottom of a hole absolute program means the coordinate value at the bottom of a hole R_ Incremental program means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute program means the coordinate value of the point R F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Number of repeats if required G81 G98 G81 G99 Initial point plane IWwWNTOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Point R Point R gt 2 b Point Z Fig 4 4 2 1 Z R Either parameter Z or R at the bottom of a hole may be absent when performing the 1 drilling the system changes the modal only instead of performing the operation along with Z axis Rapidly move to the point R after positioning along with the X and Y axes perform the drilling machining from the point R to Z and then tool retracts at the rapid traverse rate Rotate the spindle with the miscellaneous function M code before specifying the G81 When the G81 code and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first positioning operation The system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When K is used to specify the number of repeats the M code is executed for the first hole only for the second and subsequent holes the M code is not executed Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30
305. leasing along 2 0508 The 5 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG releasing along 0509 The 5 axis soft limit overtravel along Manual or MPG releasing along ner The 1 axis hard limit overtravel along Overtravel releasing Manual or m MPG releasing along roe The 1 axis hard limit overtravel along Overtravel releasing Manual or MPG releasing along The 2 axis hard limit overtravel along Overtravel releasing Manual or MPG releasing along SEG The 2 axis hard limit overtravel along Overtravel releasing Manual or MPG releasing along neh The 3 axis hard limit overtravel along Overtravel releasing Manual or MPG releasing along re The 3 axis hard limit overtravel along Overtravel releasing Manual or MPG releasing along aeie The 4 axis hard limit overtravel along Overtravel releasing Manual or MPG releasing along ee The 4 axis hard limit overtravel along Overtravel releasing Manual or MPG releasing along nen The 5 axis hard limit overtravel along Overtravel releasing Manual or gt D m z gt x lt MPG releasing along 8 romea MPG releasing along 0 amenan connection cable 1001 The address of relay or coil does not set I 1002 The function code of input code is absent LL 420 Appendix Two Alarm List Function command COM does not use correctly its corresponding 1003 relations
306. led 6 3 Constant Surface Cutting Speed Control G96 G97 Code format Constant surface speed control code G96 S_ Surface speed mm min or inch min Constant surface speed control code cancellation G97 S_ Spindle speed r min Constant surface speed controlled axis code G96P_ P1 X axis P2 Y axis P3 Z axis P4 the 4 axis Clamp of Max spindle speed G92 S_ S specifies the Max spindle speed r min Function Specify the surface speed relative speed between the tool and workpiece following S The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant regardless of the tool position Explanations 1 G96 is a modal code After a G96 command is specified the program enters the constant EEO surface speed control mode and the S value is regarded as surface speed y J O Q 7 gt Z Q 2 A G96 code must specify the axis along with constant surface speed control is applied A G97 code cancels the G96 mode 3 It is necessary to set a workpiece coordinate system for performing the constant surface cutting feed control so that the center coordinate of rotation axis changes into zero Fig 6 3 1 The controlled workpiece coordinate system of constant surface cutting speed 4 When constant surface speed control is applied a spindle speed higher than the value specified in G92 S_ it is convenient to clamp at the Max spindle speed When the power is turned on the Max spindle speed is not yet set The S is regarded a
307. length of each code word should be less than 79 characters 3 2 General Structure of Program Program divides into Main program and subprogram Usually the CNC moves based upon the indication of the main program if the code for calling the subprogram on the main program the CNC is then operated according to subprogram when meeting the main program code return on subprogram CNC is then returned to the next program for that the main program calls the subprogram block to be consecutively performed The program motion sequence is as Fig 3 21 Main program Subprogram Command 2 Command 2 ubprogram command call Command N M99 main program return Fig 3 2 1 The composition structure of main program and subprogram are consistent When some one fixed sequence exists and occurs repeatedly in the program which can be regarded as subprogram and then save to the register in advance instead of writing again to simplify the program Subprogram can be called in the Auto mode generally the calling can be performed by 18 Chapter Three Component Program Configuration M98 among main programs and also the called subprogram can be called other subprograms The called subprogram from the main program is called as the First Subprogram and there are four subprograms can be called Refero to the Fig 3 2 2 The last block of the subprogram can be returned to the main program by M99 code call the next block of the subprogram to be consecu
308. lick button Alternatively select the Deliver the file in the Transmission mode draw down menu on the GSK Com series port communication software and then the Deliver the file dialog frame is shown refer to the Fig 11 1 3 5 Send File Dialog File list File path File Name Par State Only send the edited file O file Send Ada File Fig 11 1 3 5 Add File 3 Click the button in acceptance file dialog frame and then the selection dialog frame shows refer to the Fig 11 1 3 6 Select Part Dialog gt U v m z x lt f User Part Sys Fart Sys Upgrade Fig 11 1 3 6 4 In the selection dialog The user sub area should be selected when the CNC component program and user program are delivered the system sub area should be selected when the files suchas the ladder diagram PLC parameter PLC system parameter value tool compensation value pitch compensation value and system macro variable etc are transmitted 5 Select the desired file to be accepted Multiple files can be delivered after the sub area is Send selected and then click the aa button the file delivers refer to the Fig 11 1 3 7 335 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Sending File Hame Partition Sent Fack Err oo Fig 11 1 3 7 6 The dialog frame state displays Delivered after the file is performed the delivery R
309. ll SIN IOA O 9 a 5 O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 1 Destination dimension D The diameter of the hole or external circle to be measured This value can not be set to null or O 2 Start angle A The angle by the 1 vector measure calculate from the X direction If it is ignored the alarm issues 3 The 2 angle B The angle of the 2 vector measure calculate from the X direction If it is ignored the alarm issues 4 The 3 angle C The angle of the 3 vector measure calculate from the X direction If it is ignored the alarm issues 7 Note The least D value between any two point angle is determined by 5 in program 009729 the default is 5 If the least D value should be changed modify the 5 i E Vector boss amp groove MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE COORDINATE SEL 5 TOOL OFFSET NO T EMP Val OFT No E CENTER COOR Cx CENTER COOR Cy OPERATER STEP AUTO MODE 2 8247 mm a mm mm 1 INPUT WORKPIECE PAREMETER MEAS PONT COOR Z shen Li 2 SWITCH INTO AUTO MODE SURFACE TOL H Yy 61 5870 mm 3 PRESS lt START gt THEN lt CYCLE START gt RADIAL CLE R 8 00A PROBE EXCEED Q 10 PAAA um WORKPIECE SIZE D START ANGLE A it 34 5667 mm 61 5878 mm mm lhole amp excircle Groove amp boss S ectorhole amp excircle 4Yector groove amp boss i 10
310. lock Program consists of multiple codes one of the code unit is regarded as the block Refer to the Fig 3 1 1 Program end codes are divided into the blocks Rerfer to the Fig 3 1 1 The EOB code will show by the character in this manual The sequence number Refer to the Fig 3 1 1 constituted with the address N and its following 4 numbers can be used at the beginning of the block the front code leading zero can be omitted The order of the sequence number is arbitary Whether to insert the sequence number is set by bit parameter NO 0 5 or directly set in the setting interface refer to the Section 3 4 1 in the OPERATION its intervals can be set as in variety the interval size is determined by parameter P210 Also the sequence number can be specified for either the overall blocks or the important blocks Generally the machining sequence is increasing gradually It is for the convient that the sequence numbers are specified at the important position For example tool change or the worktable index moves to the new machining interface etc Note N code is not regarded as the line number whe it is shared a same block with the G10 3 1 3 Code Word Code word Fig 3 1 3 1 is the essential factor for composing the block which is cosists of the address and its following numbers sometimes the symbol may specify in front of the number X 100 TA Add No Code word Fig 3 1 3 1 the composition of the code word
311. lock Up to 3 M codes in one block can be specified by setting the bit 7 of parameter No 33 However some M codes can not be specified at the same time due to mechanical operation restrictions For detailed information about the mechanical operation restrictions on simultaneous specification of multiple M codes in one block refer to the manual of each machine tool builder SINN TOA 5 1 M Code Control by PLC y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q A M code and a movement code are simultaneously performed when the M code controlled by PLC shares the same block with a movement code 5 1 1 Negative Reverse Code Command M03 M04 Code M03 M04 Sx x x Explanation The positive rotation is observed from negative to position along with the Z axis spindle CCW is regarded as positive and CW is treated as reverse Entering the rotation direction of workpiece based upon the right helix is regarded as positive and the leaving the rotation direction of workpiece based upon the right helix is treated as reverse Sx x x code is the spindle speed is the located gear when the gear is controlled Unit rev min r min Sx x x is the actual speed when the frequency conversion is controlled For example S1000 specifies that the spindle is revolved based upon the 1000r min 5 1 2 Spindle Stopping Code Command M05 Code M05 spindle will stop rotating when performing M05 in Auto method However the commanded speed by S code is reserved
312. ltered by its corresponding softky is as follows 1 Bit parameter page Enter the bit parameter interface by BIT PARAMETER Refer to the Fig 3 3 2 1 1 221 ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0006 MAOB ZPLS xxx xxx x x ZMOD ZRN 0007 A4TP ZMI4 ZMIz ZMIy ZMIx AART 1 0008 AX54 AXSZ AXSY AXSX PLW4 PLWZ PLWY PLWX 0009 xxx APZA APZZ APZY APZX UHSM APC HHH 1 0010 RCUR MSL xxx RHR RLC ZCL SCBM 1 0011 BFA LZR HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH OUT2 1 INPUT 16 56 10 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 2 1 1 Refer to the Appendix One Parameter Explanation for the concrete definitions of each parameter 2 Data parameter page Enter the data parameter page by DATA PARAMETER softkey Refer to the Fig 3 3 2 1 2 ll SINN TOA O U m 5 O Z G88 I O channels select input output device 0001 38408 communication channel baud rate DNC P002 115208 communication channel 1 baud rate 803 STANDBY 2004 system interpolation period mill isecond 3005 CNC controlled axis A0AG 1 o Language Select CH 1 EN 2 RUS 3 ESP 0007 SHO The max error of position Resend times of BUS external workpiece origin point X offset external workpiece origin point Y offset INPUT 16 56 23 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 2 1 2 Refer to the Appendix One Parameter Explanation for the concrete definitions of
313. lue of D code 143 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual y Tool compensation number A Tool compensation value in the absolute value code G90 Tool compensation value in the absolute value code G91 adds the value of the specified tool compensation number The sum is tool compensation value Explanation Available input range of tool compensation value Geometric compensation metric input 999 999mm 999 999mm Inch input 39 3700inch 39 3700inch Wear compensation metric input 400 000mm 400 000mm Evaluate the No 267 data parameter setting Inch input 39 3700inch 39 3700inch Evaluate 1 25 4 of the No 267 data parameter setting Note 1 The maximum value of the wear compensation is restricted by data parameter P267 48 Feed G Code 4 8 1 Feed Mode G64 G61 G63 Format Exact stop G61 Tapping mode G63 Cutting mode G64 Functions Exact stop method G61 This function is always enabled once specifying before G62 G63 or G64 is specified Tool decelerates and performs in position detection at the end of the block and then perform the next block Tapping method G63 This function is always enabled once specifying before G61 G62 or G64 is specified Tool does not decelerate instead of executing next block at the end of the block When specifying G63 both the feedrate override and feed hold are disabled Cutting m
314. m mm 6 448 14 00A Target Dim Ly 34 5667 mm 61 5878 mm Z mm Thole amp excircle Groove amp boss 3Yectorhole amp excircle 4Vector groove amp boss DATA fed 10 85 55 ss PATH cl a ea arse Fig 3 4 3 1 4 1 Destination dimension Lx The profile dimension along X axis direction to be measure The measurement along this axis can not be performed when this parameter option is null or 0 2 Destination dimension Ly The profile dimension along Y axis direction to be measure The measurement along this axis can not be performed when this parameter option is null or 0 O gs m on gt om o Note Lx and Ly can not be set to null or 0 at the same time D Vector hole amp external circle MEASURE MODE 2 8247 mm WORKPIECE TYPE COORDINATE SEL S Y mm TOOL OFFSET NO T EMP Val OFT No E CENTER COOR Cx mm CENTER COOR Cy OPERATER STEP AUTO MODE j 291 7420 am 1 INPUT WORKPIECE PAREMETER WEcen ees ELT 2 SWITCH INTO AUTO MODE SURFACE TOL H 61 5870 mm 3 PRESS lt START gt THENSCYCLE START gt RADIAL CLE R 8 BAA PROBE EXCEED Q 18 PAAA Z mm WORKPIECE SIZE D START ANGLE A SECOND ANGLE B 34 5667 mm THIRD ANGLE C 61 5870 mm Z OAOA im 1hole amp excircle Groove amp boss 3Yectorhole amp excircle 4 Vector groove amp boss DATA Rds 10 86 49 __ PATH 1 serene er EE are leevcere Fig 3 4 3 1 5 255
315. m GOB mm 808 OPERATER STEP MANUAL MODE 1 WHEN MOVE TO P1 3 PRESS lt MEASURE gt 2 PRESS lt START gt SET IT TO COORDINATE gt N lt x Plx a Ply CENTER Cx a A AAG Pex a Pey B CENTER Cy B a mm 0 A mm OOA mm Manual 1 Automatic a 20 39 13 DATA Rd PATH 1 ee srr fen Fig 3 4 3 1 PSx a PSy a gt N lt x lt O 3 4 3 1 Center Function Introduction amp Operation Explanation Center measure There are two center measurements Manual and Auto Wherein only the hole or external circle boss or groove can be performed the center measurement by the Manual mode the hole or external circle boos or groove vector hole or external vector boss or groove can be executed center measurement by Auto mode ll SINNIOA O U m gt O Z I Manual Center Interface display A Hole or external circle MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE COORDINATE SEL 5 S B mm OOA mm GBB mm 000 S 5 gt N lt xX O S 5 OOA mm GOB mm B mm 000 OPERATER STEP MANUAL MODE 1 WHEN MOVE TO P1 3 PRESS lt MEASURE gt 2 PRESS lt START gt SET IT TO COORDINATE ho os O Plx a Ply CENTER Cx a f AAI P2x a Pay B CENTER Cy a a mm A mm O mm 000 Manual 1 Automat ic 20 39 13 DATA MCC PATH 1 haa cee cr en Pax 6 Poy a PN lt X O
316. m J M G50 5 se Z 5 480 mm P F G64 Q H G97 SPRM 06000 L D G13 SMAX 100000 DATA SS 297 27 PATH 1 PRG MDI oieri opi CUR NXT DIR Fig 8 1 1 8 2 Operation and Stop of MDI Code Block After the code block is inputted based upon the Section 8 1 the MDI can be operated by D The code block operation can be stopped by EI during the operation Note 1 The operation of MDI must be performed in MDI operation method Note 2 When the operation program in the MDI and CUR MOD interface is performed in MDI mode firstly treat the inputted program in the CUR MOD interface 8 3 Modification and Clear of Filed Value in MDI Code Block If the error occurs during the field input cancel the input by LI if the error occurs after the input is performed input again the correct content to replace the error one or clear the overall inputted contents by and then input again 8 4 Conversion of Each Operation Mode In the Auto MDI or DNC mode some programs are converted to MDI DNC Auto or Editing 308 Chapter Eight MDI Operation mode during the operation the system stops the program after performing the current block In the Auto MDI or DNC mode the program converts to the single step mode after dwells the single stop function is then performed refer to the single step interruption in Section 5 2 of the OPERATION MANUAL Shift to MPG mode after dwells and then the MPG interruption function is performed refer to the Man
317. m the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement Note 2 When the bit 1 of parameter No 43 equals to 0 there is no alarm without specifying the cutting value in peck drilling G73 G83 in this case the Q does not specify or sets to 0 the system performs the hole positioning along with X Y plane instead of executing the drilling operation When the bit 1 of parameter No 43 equals to 1 the alarm occurs without specifying the cutting value in peck drilling G73 G83 that is the code parameter Q does not specified or sets to 0 the system alarms 0045 the address Q does not find or sets to 0 G73 G83 If the Q value is specified as negative the system then performs intermittent feed based upon its absolute value Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R 74 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Example M3 S2000 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G83 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 Q15 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning drill hole 4
318. m then proceeds the next tapping When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block 85 SINN TOA n J O Q D gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Canned cycle is only performed on the G17 plane Boring machining Fail to perform the boring machining in the block without the X Y Z or other miscellaneous axis Prompt When performing the back boring cycle it is necessary to remember that the values Z and R should be specified Generally the position Z is above the position R otherwise the system alarm may occur Example M3 S500 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G87 X300 Y 250 Z 120 R 150 Q5 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 positioning at the initial position and the
319. mission is executed 11 2 2 USB Component Program Operation Steps In the lt MDI MODE gt move the cursor to CNC component program by direction button or after entering the setting data treatment interface Enter the following operation interface by softkey DATA OUTPUT or DATA INPUT refer to the Fig 11 2 2 1 CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM 8 mE Ss Libs LADDER PLC i 140 1 11 20 35 92 0 01 20 07 03 OPARA PLC 10 09 01 11 20 41 488 00 01 01 04 42 O PARAMETER 549 00 01 01 04 46 A 298 09 01 290 05 58 OCUTTER COMP 2539 1 20 05 58 OPITCH COMP i 581364 8 81 20 05 58 MACRO YAR MACRO PRG PART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE PA A E a Fig 11 2 2 1 1 Copy the CNC program file from system disk to U gt a Shift the cursor to the file list table by direction button gt b Move the cursor by or select the CNC program file in system disk to be copied c The system prompts Copy to U disk New file name by COPY softkey refer to the following figure Fig 11 2 2 2 339 gt E v m z gt lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM 7 FILE LIST LADDER PLC 92 46 61 26 07 03 OPARA PLC A 488 00 01 01 04 42 ALA 549 1 61 64 46 PARAMETER 298 46 61 28 65 58 O CUTTER COMP 2539 1 26 05 58 PITCH COMP MACRO YAR MACRO PRG PART PRGR
320. mm and an angle of 30 G91 Y120 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an incremental angle of 120 Y120 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an incremental angle of 120 G15 G80 Canceling the polar coordinate code In addition when the polar coordinate is programmed it is notice to set the current coordinate plane The polar coordinate plane is related with the current one for example G91 if the current coordinate plane is G17 the X and Y axes components at the current tool position is the origin If the current coordinate plane is G18 and then the Z and X axes components at the current tool position is the origin If the positioning parameter of the 1 hole circle command followed with G16 does not specify the current tool position of the system is regarded as the default position parameter of the hole circle At present the 1 canned cycle code followed with the polar coordinate should be completed otherwise the tool path will incorrect The parameter word of the tool movement command positioning parameter is related with the concrete plane selection modal other than the hole circle followed with the G16 The default current tool position followed with the movement code after using the G15 to cancel the coordinate is the start of the movement code 4 2 14 Scaling Within Plane G51 G50 Format G51 X_Y_Z_P__ X Y Z The absolute value code of scaling center coordinate value P Scling each axis with same proportion The
321. mmed dimension Explanations G33 Rectangular groove rough milling CCW G34 Rectangular groove rough milling CW X Y The start position on the X Y plane Z Machining depth it is the absolute position in G90 it is the positon related to the R reference surface in G91 R R reference surface position it is the absolute position in G90 it is the position related to the start in this block in G91 l The width of the rectangular groove along X axis direction 107 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual J The width of the rectangular groove along Y axis direction L The cutting width increment within the specified plane W Cutting along the Z axis at the 1 time is the downward distance from the R reference surface which should be more than O If the cutting depth for the 1 time exceeds the position at the bottom of the groove it will be directly machined based upon the position of groove bottom Q Cutting depth of each cutting feedrate V The distance from the unprocessed surface during the cutting at the rapid traverse rate U Corner arc radius without corner arc transition if it omits D Tool compensation number take out the corresponding tool compensation value based upon the offered series number K_ Repeated times Cycle processes 1 Positioning to the helical cutting start position along XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Descend to the point R plane at th
322. mpt shows at the bottom of the screen Select the machining file in USB list enter the program interface by lt PROGRAM gt 341 gt U v m z x lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual and then LIST the USB program list table shows select the program to be machined by moving the cursor open this program by lt INPUT gt then press the lt CYCLE START gt and then perform the DNC machining Note In the USB program list page when the character numbers of program name is less than or equals to 6 the start of program can be previewed when the character numbers of program name is more than 6 the start of program can not be previewed When the character numbers of program name is more than or equals to 8 the system is only displayed as abbreviation and can not be previewed the start of program 11 2 4 Retreat from U Disk Operation Interface 1 Pull out the U disk when the indicator of the U disk does not flash Retreat from SETTING DATA TREATMENT interface by RETURN softkey 342 APPENDIX gt a mi z x lt 343 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual gt D mi z gt x lt 344 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List APPENDIX ONE GSK218MC SERIES PARAMETER LIST Parameter Explanation The parameter can be dividied into the following types based upon the types of the
323. n When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement S command lf the specified spindle speed exceeds the top spindle speed in tapping data parameter P257 the upper limit speed of spindle in tapping cycle the system then alarms the top speed level of the spindle in the rigid tapping is determined by P94 P296 F command If the specified F value exceeds the upper limit value of the cutting feedrate data parameter P96 sets the upper limit value it is subject to the upper limit value P command P is the modal code the least value of parameter is set by data parameter P281 and the most value is set by p282 Value P is less than the P281 parameter setting value which is operated based upon the least value if it more than the P282 parameter setting value and it is operated based upon the most value Axis shifting Cancel the canned cycle before shifting the tapping axis If the tapping axis is changed in rigid tapping mode the system then shows the No 206 alarm Override The feedrate and spindle rotation feedrate are 100 by default during the tapping the machine tool still operates after pressing the feed hold and reset buttons till the completion of the operation return Cut
324. n intermediate point by G28 the tool can be automatically moved to the appointed point along with the specified axis in code via an intermediate point by G29 57 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 R Reference point Intermediate point A C Return to the start of The destination point return reference point from the reference position Fig 4 3 1 4 3 1 Reference Position Return G28 Format G28 X_Y_Z_ Function G28 code is used for performing the operation which returns to the reference position some one special position on the machine tool by the intermediate point Explanation Intermediate point The intermediate point is specified by the code parameter in G28 which can be expressed by the absolute value code or the incremental value code The intermediate point coordinate value of the code axis is registered during the execution of the block for supporting the G29 return from the reference position Notice The coordinate of the intermediate point is registered in the CNC however the coordinate value of the axis specified by G28 is only registered each time The other axes are not specified which are used the coordinate value specified by G28 before And therefore if you are not comprehend the intermediate point in the default system when using the G2
325. n 5 Return to point R Operation 6 Move to the initial point at a rapid traverse rate Position in the XY plane hole machining performs along with the Z axis Specifying a canned cycle operation is determined by 3 methods which are separately specified by G codes 1 Data form G90 absolute value method G91 Incremental value method 2 Return to the point plane G98 Initial point plane G99 Point R plane 3 Hole machining method G73 G74 G76 G81 G89 Plane both in initial point Z and point R Initial point plane Tool s absolute position along with the Z axis direction before the canned cycle state Point R plane It is also called Safety Plane which is the position along with the Z axis direction in the canned cycle when the rapid traverse turns into cutting feed Generally position at some certain distance above a workpiece surface to prevent the tool from impacting to the workpiece and guard the adequate distance to complete the acceleration procedure G73 G74 G 76 G81 G89 are specified the overall data hole position data hole machining data repeated times of the canned cycle to compose a block Z R Either the parameter Z at the bottom of a hole or the parameter R may be absent when 62 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code performing the 1 drilling hole the system is only altered the modal and performed the Z axis operation The format of the hole machining method is as follows GDG X Y Z R Q P F K
326. n Manual 0235 The reverse interval compensation value of the 5 axis at the rapid traverse rate Setting range 0 5 0 5 0236 Circular arc pointed angle disposes parameter 1 Setting range 0 5 0237 Circular arc pointed angle disposes parameter 2 Setting range 0 5 l 0238 Circular arc pointed angle disposes parameter 3 Setting range 0 5 0240 The gain adjustment data of the spindle speed 1 analog output Setting range 0 98 1 02 0241 The compensation value of the offset voltage for the spindle speed analog output Setting range 0 2 0 2 gt U v m z x lt 0242 The spindle speed in the spindle orientation or JOG Setting range 0 9999 r min 0243 The Max setting value of the frequency converter 8191 Setting range 4000 8191 0246 The spindle Max speed corresponding to the gear 1 6000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0247 The spindle Max speed corresponding to the gear 2 6000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0248 The spindle Max speed corresponding to the gear 3 6000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 392 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0250 The motor speed in the spindle gear shifting Setting range O 1000 r min 0251 The top motor speed in the spindle gear shifting 6000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0254 The axis regards as the count reference in the 0 surface speed control Setting range 0 4 0255 The lowest speed in the constant surface speed control G96
327. n is automatically cancelled when the sequence number or word indexes to the end of the program Note 2 The sequence number word and line number can be indexed in the AUTO Jandl EDIT Jmethods however it can only be performed at the background editing interface in AUTO mode 10 1 1 4 Positioning method of cursor PROGRAM Select the editing method press the display program screen a Move the cursor one line upward by 4 if the line of the cursor locates is more than the end line of the previous one the cursor then moves to the end of the last line b Move the cursor one line downward by if the line of the cursor locates is more than the end line of the next one the cursor then moves to the end of the next line gt c Move the cursor one line rightward by gt if the cursor at the end line can be moved at the start of the next line d Move the cursor one line rightward by if the cursor at the end start can be moved at the end of the last line e Scroll the screen upward by a cusor the moves to the last screen f Scroll the screen downward by al cusor the moves to the next screen 321 O 9 m gt O Z lt O Cc m ll SAINN TOA O 2 L gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual g Cursor moves to the beginning of its line by h Cursor returns to the start of the program by Ze END i Cursor moves to t
328. n of LEVEL ZEROING SAVE 7 Servo saves the updated parameter by and the state column displays Successful for drive parameter save 7 Close the parameter switch after the overall parameters setting are completed 3 3 5 2 Spindle Parameter When the spindle drive is selected as bus control mode by the system Bit 1 of parameter No 1 sets to 1 user can check and set the corresponding servo drive parameters of the spindle in the SPINDLE PARAMETER interface 3 3 5 2 1 Spindle Parameter Display When the bit 4 of parameter No O is set to 0 the system uses the single spindle control enter the spindle parameter interface by SPINDLE PARAMETER softkey The content of this interface is shown below Refer to the Fig 3 3 5 2 1 1 oe me psawey O O 000 STANDBY Powe stm o SOS a E i o o o OS oo o o OSS K E wa pooo OO O J ose PATH 1 BACKUP COMEBACK RETURN Fig 3 3 5 2 1 1 237 F m r an AE om a Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual When the bit 4 of parameter No 0 is set to 1 the system uses the double spindle control enter the spindle parameter interface by SPINDLE PARAMETER softkey The content of this interface is shown below Refer to the Fig 3 3 5 2 1 2 vooo 0001 0002 STANDBY 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 STANDBY 0011 STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY ST
329. n of the movement axis with manual mode and then move downward to Z axis so that the tool nose is 287 F m os gt om gZ ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z 288 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual lower the workpiece surface lastly move toward the negative of the workpiece with the lower speed Usually use the MPG feed mode till the tool is just cut to stop of the workpiece In this xX case press the in the editing panel area then the to zero If it sets to other values you can use the same method for example input X20 to confirm by 3 Similiarly move the tool and cut one side along the negative direction press I after INPUT positioning then the press mev and then complete the center operation It is note that the setting of the center does not change the absolute and machine tool coordinate values and the X coordinate sets 4 Move the tool to the axis which the relative coordinate displays as 0 that is the center along the X direction xX 5 In the Setting interface select the Workpiece coordinate page press the then the INPUT m and then the zero setting along X axis is executed 6 The floating coordinate system can be set by G92 at the center of the XY The XY value of the relative coordinate is 0 the positioning point of the machine tool as well the XY machine coordinate of this poi
330. n offset 5mm to stop at point Z for 1 second Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to initial position plane Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to initial position plane X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to initial position plane Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to initial position plane G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial position plane G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle rotation stop M30 Restriction Fail to specify the G code From G00 to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G87 command otherwise the G87 is replaced by G code of group 01 Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation Note 1 In this command in feed axis and direction are fixed and the in feed direction is regardless of the rotation of the G68 coordinate system 4 4 10 Boring Cycle G88 Code format G88 X_Y ZR_P F_ Function This cycle is used for boring a hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programmi
331. n the subprogram return to the program of the subprogram calling and then perform the following blocks continuously 20 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code CHAPTER FOUR PREPARATORY FUNCTION G CODE 4 1 Type of Preparatory Function G Code The preparatory function is expressed by G code and its following numbers which specifies the meaning of its block G codes are divided into the following two types Table 4 1 1 The G code is enabled only in the block in which it One shot code K is specified It is always effective before the other G codes in Modal G code the same group Example G01 and GOO are the modal G code in the same group GO1X _ Z G01 enabled X G01 enabled G00 Z_ __ G00 enabled The system bit 7 of parameter No 0 is common machining mode when it is set to 0 It is the high velocity high accuracy machining mode when the bit 7 of No O sets to 1 Note 1 F It is indentical with the common machining mode T high velocity high accuracy machining mode Note 2 Refer to the system parameter table for details Table 4 1 2 G code and its function G H code Function JOU JO p jqeu pow Aoeinooe yubiu AVWOO 8A YUBIH Se XYZ Positioning Rapid G00 traverse sre X_Y ZF_ Linear interpolation Cutting feed Circular arc interpolation CW Clockwise 21 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Opera
332. nal 4 3 Other Manual Operations 4 3 1 Coolant Control If COOLING The coolant can be shifted between the ON and OFF The indicator ON means that the power is turned on OFF is turned off 4 3 2 Lubrication Control amp EES t is turned on by pressing the lubrication button it is turned off by releasing it The indicator ON means that the power is turned on OFF is turned off 4 3 3 Chip removal Control 2 CHIP REMOVAL The chip revmoval can be shifted between the ON and OFF The indicator ON means that the power is turned on OFF is turned off 290 Chapter Four Manual Operation 4 3 4 Workping Indicator Control ASHI The working indicator can be shifted between the ON and OFF The indicator ON means that the power is turned on OFF is turned off ll 3WNTOA O U m gt O Z 291 er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual ll SAIN IOA O U m gt O Z 292 Chapter Five Single Step Operation CHAPTER FIVE SINGLE STEP OPERATION 5 1 Single step feed ami Enter the signle step mode by ek machine tool moves based upon the step length defined by system each time in this mode 5 1 1 Movement Amount Selection amp 25 1 50 f ivo 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 Select a movement increment by any of the and the 0 1 movement increment can be displayed on the page for example press the the single step le
333. nal gt stopper position position F4000 F500 oor Yv position Operate to the zero return stopper with lt Low high speed Zero return stopper Fig 9 4 2 1 9 4 3 Multi Core Absolute Zero Setting Set the bit parameters No 0 0 1 No 20 7 1 No 20 6 1 and No 20 5 1 configure the GE2000 series multi core absolute version manually move each axis to the granted position of the machine tool zero then set the 1 axis zero position when bit parameter No 21 0 1 the 2 axis zero position when No 21 4 1 the 3 axis zero position when No 21 2 1 the 4 axis zero position when No 21 3 1 and the 5 axis zero position when No 21 4 1 in the MDI mode In the zero return mode if the zero return indicator is turned on the machine zero point setting is successful Note It is hard to set the zero by this method it is more convenient to set on the bus configuration interface This zero return mode can be directly set on the 2 BUS CONFIGURATION interface refer to the Display Modification and Setting of Bus Servo Parameter in Section 3 3 5 for details For example The absolute encoder setting zero can be set the zero position based upon the absolute position from the motor feedback Set the bit parameter 20 7 1 20 6 1 20 5 1 Refer to the Fig 9 4 3 1 314 Chapter Nine Zero Return Operation Freely set the zero between negative and positive hard limit Fig
334. nate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 3 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm gt a mi z x lt 0081 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the positive boundary of the 2 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 375 gt U v m z x lt er Jd Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0082 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 4 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0083 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the positive boundary of the 4 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0084 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 5 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0085 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the positive boundary of the 5 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0086 Dry run speed 5000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0087 The cutting feedrate when the power is turned on 300 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0088 GO rapid traverse rate along the 1 axis 5000 Setting range Metric 0 30000 mm min Inch 0 30000 25 4 Cinch min Rotation axis 0 30000 deg min 0089 GO rapid traverse rate along the 2 axis 5000 Setting ra
335. ng Operation buttons A Number buttons Input each parameter numerical value B and buttons Parameter selection gt and gt buttons Function selection Collection and analysis e D button Input parameter value or confirm it and then perform the operation INPUT E pe Clear the data and then reset to the initial state Parameter items A Plane Select the testing plane G17 G18 and G19 B CW CCW circle Select the circle direction G02 G03 C Sampling period Set the sample period it is necessary to set based upon the circle O radius and feedrate the bigger the radius is the longer the sample period is the slower the feedrate is the longer the sampling period is D Feedrate The movement speed when testing E Amplification The round analysis is the magnification of the error amplification ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z Operation steps Step 1 Select the collection function by or button after each parameter is set INPUT Step 2 Start the arc and collect the data by pressing the mer and then select the analysis function by or after the collection is performed INPUT Step 3 Start the analysis function by w and then output the roundness data and draw the round error distribution figure refer to the following drawing 244 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting STD R x 0016 ai SAMPLING 78 MAX DIS R
336. ng means the absolute coordinate value of point R 86 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code P_ Dwell time at the bottom of the hole F_ Cutting feedrate G88 G98 G88 G99 Spindle posjtive Initial point plane Spindle positive Point R plane Fig 4 4 10 1 Rapidly move to point R and then the boring is performed from point R to Z after positioning is carried out along with the X and Y axes Dwell is performed after the boring is executed the the spindle stops tool returns to the point R G99 or initial point G98 manually from the point Z where places at the bottom of the hole and then spindle rotates positively Before specifying G88 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle When the G88 and the M code are specified at a same block perform the M code at the time of performing the 1 hole position operation and then the system then proceeds the next drilling operation When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement P is the modal code the least value of parameter is set by data parameter P281 and the most value is set by p282 Value P is less than the P281 parameter setting value which is operated based upon the le
337. ng range 0 500 0445 Axis 1 configures griding accuracy 0 0010 Setting range 0 10 0446 Axis 2 configures griding accuracy 0 0010 Setting range 0 10 0447 Axis 3 configures griding accuracy 0 0010 Setting range 0 10 0448 Axis 4 configures griding accuracy 0 0010 Setting range 0 10 0449 Axis 5 configures griding accuracy 0 0010 Setting range 0 10 Machine stroke detection the absolute position of the 1 axis encoder along negative direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 gt U v m z gt lt Machine stroke detection the absolute position of the 1 axis encoder along positive direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 Machine stroke detection the absolute position of the 2 axis encoder along negative direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 0453 Machine stroke detection the absolute position of 0 0000 406 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List the 2 axis encoder along positive direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 Machine stroke detection the absolute position of the 3 axis encoder along negative direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 Machine stroke detection the absolute position of the 3 axis encoder along positive direction boundary Setting range 99999 999 99999 999 Machine stroke detection the absolute position of the 4 axis encoder along neg
338. nge 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0030 The 1 axis workpiece origin offset value of G57 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0031 The 2 axis workpiece origin offset value of G57 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0032 The 3 axis workpiece origin offset value of G57 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm gt U v m z gt lt Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0033 The 4 axis workpiece origin offset value of G57 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0034 The 5 axis workpiece origin offset value of G57 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0035 The 1 axis workpiece origin offset value of G58 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0036 The 2 axis workpiece origin offset value of G58 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0037 The 3 axis workpiece origin offset value of G58 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0038 The 4 axis workpiece origin offset value of G58 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0039 The 5 axis workpiece origin offset value of G58 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0040 The 1 axis workpiece origin offset value of G59 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0041 The 2 axis workpiece origin offset value of G59 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0042 The 3 axis workpiece origin offset value of G59 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999
339. nge Metric 0 30000 mm min Inch 0 30000 25 4 Cinch min Rotation axis 0 30000 deg min Setting range Metric 0 30000 mm min 376 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List Inch 0 30000 25 4 Cinch min Rotation axis 0 30000 deg min 0091 GO rapid traverse rate along the 4 axis 5000 Setting range Metric 0 30000 mm min Inch 0 30000 25 4 Cinch min Rotation axis 0 30000 deg min 0092 GO rapid traverse rate along the 5 axis 5000 Setting range Metric 0 30000 mm min Inch 0 30000 25 4 Cinch min Rotation axis 0 30000 deg min 0093 The Fo speed General purpose for overall axes at 30 the rapid traverse rate along each axis Setting range O0 1000 mm min 0094 The top controllable speed General purpose for overall axes at the rapid position Setting range 300 30000 mm min 0095 The lowest controllable soeed General purpose for overall axes at the rapid position Setting range 0 300 mm min 0096 The top controllable speed General purpose for overall axes for the cutting feed Setting range 300 9999 mm min 0097 The lowest controllable speed General purpose for overall axes for the cutting feed gt a mi z x lt Setting range 0 300 mm min 0098 The consecutive feedrate of the JOG along each axis 2000 311 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0099 FL spe
340. nge 0 99 9999 0322 The clearance value of spindle in rigid tapping the 3 gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0323 Spindle command multiplication coefficient CMR 912 the 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 0324 Spindle command multiplication coefficient CMR 912 the 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 0325 Spindle command multiplication coefficient CMR 912 the 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 0326 Spindle command frequency division coefficient CMD the 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 0327 Spindle command _ frequency division coefficient CMD the 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 0328 Spindle command frequency division coefficient CMD the 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 0329 The used rotation angle in the coordinate rotation when the rotation angle command does not perform Setting range 0 9999 9999 0330 The used scaling override when using without the 397 gt a mi z x lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual scaling override command Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0331 The 1 axis scaling override Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0332 The 2 axis scaling override Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0333 The 3 axis scaling override Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0334 The dwell time in the unidirection orientation Setting range O0 10 S 0335 The unidirection orientation and overtravel value
341. ngth 0 100 displays in the lt POSITION gt interface Refer to the Fig 5 1 1 1 FEED F mm min STEP W 100 FEED OVRD 100 r mm 40 88 120 160 200 Fa 25 50 100 _ SP 5 Orpm Y O e Olm lso 100 56 66 78 88 98 100118 120 pS Z O OOl js COMMAND T NO T 8 0 OFFSET H 08 DAOA G G17 G9 G94 G21 G4 G49 G54 PART CNT 0000 0000 G11 698 615 G50 G69 G64 697 613 CUT TIME 200 0O DATA 1 01 87 PATH 1 i Fig 5 1 1 1 The machine tool corresponding axis moves 0 1mm by pressing the movement axis once gt Wu W00 TA 218MC U1 can be controlled by P OVERRIDE TIXI R vere buttons and the modification and debugging methods are identical with the above mentioned 293 O U m gt O Z lt O C m Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 5 1 2 Selection of Movement axis and Movement Direction The feed axis and its direction buttons the X axis can be moved positively or negative along the X axis direction button press its corresponding button once and the corresponding axis moves the distance of the system single step definition the same as the Y and Z axes This system does not temporarily support the manual 3 axis movement at the same time but the 3 axis can be performed the zero return simultaneously 5 1 3 Single step Feed Explanations The top clamping speed of the single step fee
342. ning CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle rotation stop M30 Restriction Fail to specify the G code From G00 to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G86 command the system then performs the G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation 4 4 9 Hole Cycle Back Boring Cycle G87 Code format G87 X_Y ZRQP F Function This cycle performs accurate boring Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R the bottom of the hole Q_ Offset value at the bottom of a hole P_ Dwell time at the bottom of a hole F_ Cutting feedrate 84 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G87 G98 G99 Initial point _ Spindle plane exact stop C gt 0 Spindle positive Spindle exact stop tool Spindle os exact stop 22 p R Rapid traverse GO 4 T Sp
343. ning operation The system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When the repeated times K is specified the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead of performing the second and subsequent holes Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time P is the modal code the least value of parameter is set by data parameter P281 and the most value is set by p282 Value P is less than the P281 parameter setting value which is operated based upon the least value if it more than the P282 parameter setting value and it is operated based upon the most value Example M3 S2000 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G82 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 dwell for 1s at thebottom of the hole then return to the point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 dwell for 1s at thebottom of the hole then return to the point R 72 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 dwell for 1s at thebo
344. nsation method Setting range 0 0 5 mm The compensation step length of the 5 axis interval based upon the fixed frequency compensation method Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0200 The time constant of the reverse interval based upon 20 the speed up down compensation method Setting range 0 400 ms 0201 Reverse interval compensation method Setting range 0 2 0 Modal A 1 Modal B 2 Modal C 0202 The acceptance width of completion signal of the M S and T signals Setting range 0 9999 ms 0203 Output time of resetting signal 200 Setting range 50 400 ms 0204 The allowable digit of M code Setting range 1 2 389 gt a mi z x lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0205 The allowable digit of S code Setting range 1 6 0206 The allowable digit of T code Setting range 1 4 0210 The incremental value of the number when the 10 sequence number is automatically inserted Setting range 0 1000 0211 Prohibt the beginning number of the tool offset value inputted by MDI Setting range 0 9999 0212 Prohibt the number of the tool offset value inputted by MDI Setting range 0 9999 0214 The limit value of circular arc radius error Setting range 0 0001 0 1000 mm 0216 Pitch error compensation number of the 1 axis reference position Setting range 0 9999 0217 Pitch error compensation
345. nsation Right G42 G42 is opposite to G41 which moves forward along the tool and the tool offsets at the right of workpiece That is the vector direction from G42 is opposited to the one of G41 however the offset method is absolute identical with the G41 other than the vector direction 1 G00 G01 G42X_Y D G42X_Y 122 New yecto Programming path Tool center path Fig 4 7 2 4 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 2 G02 G03 X Y X Y New vector Programming path New vector Programming path R po Start A gt Tool center Tool center path Start path Old vector Fig 4 7 2 5 6 The common precautions for the offset A The specification of offset G41 G42 and G42 are modal codes of which the offset numbers are specified by G code Any position can be specified before the cutter compensation state from offset state cancellation B Enter the cutter compensaton state from the offset state cancellation The movement codes from offset state cancellation to the cutter compensation state should be performed the positioning GOO or linear interpolation G01 instead of using the arc interpolation G02 G03 C The shifting between the cutter compensation left and right Generally whenever the offset direction performs from left to right or on the contrary which goes throught the offset cancellation state However the positoning G00 or linear interpolation G01 can be d
346. nt code is followed the coordinate scaling is cancelled the tool position is the start point of the movement code 5 Scaling state can not specify the G codes such as G2 G30 of reference position return and the one G53 G59 G54P1 G54P50 G92 of the coordinate system If these G codes must be specified it should be specified after cancelling the scaling function otherwise the system alarm occurs 6 Tool does not draw out the ellipse path even if the arc interpolation and each axis are SINN TOA specified the different scaling y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q When the scaling along with each axis is different and the arc interpolation is programmed by radius R its interpolation figure is as the Fig 4 2 14 2 The proportion of X axis is 2 Y is 1 G90 GO X0 Y100 G51 X0 YO Z0 I2 J1 G02 X100 YO R100 F500 The above mentioned commands are equal to the following one G90 GO X0 Y100 G02 X200 Y0 R200 F500 The proportion of radius R is scaled based upon the bigger one of the or J Y the shape after scaling Pai 0 0 100 0 200 0 Fig 4 2 14 2 The scaling of circular arc interpolation When the scaling along with each axis is different and when the arc interpolation is programmed by I J and K the arc is not performed and then the system alarms 48 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 7 The scaling is disabled to the tool offset value refer to the Fig 4 2 14 3 P
347. nt position 5013 Machine coordinate 5014 Workpiece Servo position compensation 5026 along X axis 152 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Servo position compensation 5027 along Y axis Servo aa compensation 5028 aa Z axis Servo position compensation 5029 along 4 axis Note 1 ABSIO The end coordinate system of the end of previous block in workpiece coordinate system Note 2 ABSMT The current machine tool coordinate system position in its system Note 3 ABSOT The current coordinate position in workpiece coordinate system Note 4 ABSKP The skip signal in G31 block is with the enabled position in workpiece coordinate system 3 Zero offset values of workpiece and addition Table 4 9 2 4 Variable Function 5201 External workpiece zero point offset value along the 1 axi 5204 External workpiece zero point offset value along the A axis 5206 G54 workpiece zero offset value along the 1 axi 5209 G54 workpiece zero offset value along the 4 axis 5211 G55 workpiece zero offset value along the 1 axi 5214 G55 workpiece zero offset value along the 4 axis SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 5216 G56 workpiece zero offset value along the 1 axi 5219 G56 workpiece zero offset value along the 4 axis 5221 G57 workpiece zero offset value along the 1 axis 5224 G57 workpiece zero offset value along the 4 axis 5226 G58 workpiece zero offse
348. nt records within the parameter of the G54 G59 coordinate coordinate system for calling by system 7 The operation is completed for correcting the rectangular workpiece center by using the trial cutting center method Flexibly understand the method of the relative assignment and the center function setting to improve the correction speed and enhance the convenient of operation Workpiece Workpiece _ lt _ _x w A gt Fig 4 1 5 1 Note 1 This system is only input the coordinate at the relative position displayed The place where can be modified the offset can also be set the position of the relative coordinate Chapter Four Manual Operation Note 2 It owns the operation function which can be performed the addition and subtraction operations to the displayed coordinate value before the displayed coordinate is set Note 3 After the coordinate system is set if the coordinate system set by G92 will lost due to the mechanical zero return or coordinate systems G54 G59 calling it may not lose if the mechanical coordinate records to G54 G59 by parameter The operator may flexibly set based upon their requirements usually it is suggested to use the latter 4 2 Spindle Control 4 2 1 Spindle Positive or Ee Specify the S speed in MDI mode press this button in the Manual MPG single step mode spindle rotates CCW 4 2 2 Spindle Negative oh S Specify the S speed in MDI mode press this button in the M
349. nt velocity is set by data parameter P100 P104 before the deceleration point set the zero return speed along each axis is set by data parameter P342 P346 after touching the deceleration switch Inquire the Z pulse one turen signal position based upon the speed of the data parameter P342 P346 after departing from the stopper it decelerates and stops after detecting and then return to the mechanical zero that is the reference point based upon the speed of the data parameter P354 The coordinate axis is stopped moving when returning to the mechanical zero and the zero indicator is turned on 313 O 5 m gt O Z lt O Cc m ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual For example The 1 axis high speed incremental zero return is regarded as an example the 1 axis begins to impact the stopper with the higher speed F4000 Data parameter P100 sets as 4000 and then pass the stopper based upon the F500 Data parameter P342 sets to 500 after touching the deceleration switch search the one turn Z pulse signal position of the servo based upon the F5000 speed after departing from the stopper it decelerates then stops after detecting and then return to the mechanical zero based on the F200 The data parameter P354 sets to 200 speed refer to the Fig 9 4 2 1 Stopper position Depart from the One turn sig
350. ntal value departed from the intermediate point When some axes are not specified that is failure movement value relative to the intermediate point for these axes G29 is only followed by the command with one axis which is the single axis return the other axes will invariable Example G90 GO X10 Y10 G91 G28 X20 Y20 Return to the reference position via the intermediate point 30 30 G29 X30 Return from the reference position 60 30 via an intermediate point 30 30 it is note that it is in an incremental program method and 60 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code the component along with the X axis direction is 60 The intermediate point specified by G29 is assigned by G28 G30 code For the definition of the intermediate point specification and system default refer to the explantions in G28 code 4 3 4 Reference Position Return Check G27 Format G27 X_Y_Z_ Function G27 performs the reference position detection Explanations 1 G27 code tool positions at the rapid traverse rate If the tool reaches to the reference position the reference position return does not conduct However if the tool does not reach to the reference position the alarm occurs 2 Machine tool locking state that is specify the G27 code the tool is already returned to the SINN 1OA reference position automatically and the completion signal return does not perform the breakover i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q too
351. o the program is ended Scaling Set the proportion of the drawing Figure center Set the corresponding workpiece coordinate value of the LCD based upon 265 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual the workpiece coordinate The Max Min value After the Max Min value of the display axis is set the CNC system may automatically set the scaling proportion or figure center value The Max value of X The Max value along X in figure display Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch The Min value of Y The MIN value along Y in figure display Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch The Max value of Y The Max value along Y in figure display Unit 0 0001mm 0 000 1inch The Min value of Y The Min value along Y in figure display Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch The Max value of Z The Max value along Z in figure display Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch The Min value of Z The Max value along Z in figure display Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch B The setting method of figure parameter a Move the cursor under the set parameter b Input the corresponding numerical value based upon the actual requirement c Confirm it by 2 Figure interface Enter the interface interface by FIGURE Refer to Fig 3 5 2 G32 X0 YO ZO Nie G 690 X74 295 Y 50 N166 Z30 M3 51500 Ma N1008 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 46 356 Z 31 N13 X75 496 Y 46 174 Z 033 Nise
352. oint on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0062 The 3 axis coordinate value of the 4 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system gt a mi z x lt Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 373 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0063 The 4 axis coordinate value of the 4 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0064 The 5 axis coordinate value of the 4 reference 0 0000 point on the mechanical coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0066 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 1 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0067 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the positive boundary of the 1 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0068 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 2 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0069 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the positive boundary of the 2 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0070 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 3 xis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0071 The coordina
353. ol bit par 683 6608 num par 0005 0008 A parameters related to coordinate system bit par 9 801G num par 0010 0065 A parameters related to travel detection bit par 0011 num par 66 885 AAAA parameters related to feedrate bit par 012 0014 num par 86 104 O65 parameters related to acc dec control bit par 615 6617 num par 1 5 157 AAG parameters related to servo bit par 0018 num par 168 8186 HH parameters related to backlash bit par 0018 num par 0190 0200 AAAS parameters related to DI DO bit par 619 628 num par 288 8206 G9 parameters related to MDI display and edit bit par 821 029 num par 210 0214 616 parameters related to pitch error comp bit par 0037 num par 216 8235 611 parameters related to spindle control bit par 0038 num par 24 8268 H1e parameters related to tool compensation bit par 39 041 num par 266 267 0013 parameters related to fixed canned cycle bit par 042 0043 num par 270 0288 Peis DATA Rd 12 82 PATH 1 SS sys INFO OPRT ALARM G CODE gt Fig 3 9 6 The parameter setting of each function is detailed in this interface the unfamiliar or unclear parameter setting can be searched and compared in the interface 6 Macro command interface Enter the help information Macro command list page by MACRO COMMAND LIST softkey in lt HELP gt interface refer to the Fig 3 9 7 G6
354. olled by PLC Modify the program aaa Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message Check the NO NO NO 0 N OO ladder diagram 0132 No alarm in external alarm message Check the PLC if 0133 The axis command does not be supported by system Modify the program oy a eee Modify the program ES eee Modify the program E eee Modify the program ae the program 0139 PLC axis control selection error Modify the program I 0140 The sequence number of the macro command skip is absent I a MDI current modal and DNC mode does not support the macro command Skip The proportion scaling override other than from 1 to 999999 is specified 0142 Scaling magnification is specified in other than 1 999999 Correct the scaling setting The scaling results move distance coordinate value and circular radius 0143 exceed the Max command value Correct the program or scaling magnification 0144 The coordinate rotation plane should be idencial with the arc or cutter 414 Appendix Two Alarm List Om erreersaton pere Wody terega J S sovenerieay pepereneranr nom sor poomeenos gen establish yet Modify the program or alter the bit 3 of parameter No 4 AZR 018 igenem o angle Modify the parameter 0780 Aer can oriy be used by R programming te polar ened mode 06 pon peresen aoran eon os point plane selection or direction can not be performed 08
355. ollowing items should be confirmed before the power of the GSK218MC CNC system turned on 1 The machine tool state should be normal 2 The power voltage should be conformed with the requirements 3 The wiring should be correct and firm The current position relative coordinate page displays after the system self checking is normal and the initialization is completed 100 O 40 88 120 160 200 o x Cc Cm F 25 5a 100 au SP 5 Orpm S 180 56 68 70 80 938 188 118 120 RaaNNqSuoo Suu Tool T Q COMMAND T NO T 000 OFFSET H DAOA PART CNT 0001 0000 CUT TIME 00O 00 00 09 05 55 25 m J cec gt o T 2 G G17 G9 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 613 2 2 Power OFF It is necessary to confirm the following items before the power is turned off 1 The X Y and Z axes of the CNC are on the stop state 2 The miscellaneous functions such as spindle water pump etc are closed 3 Firstly cut off the power of CNC then the machine tool The following inspections should be performed when the power is turned off 1 The LED cycle start on the operation panel should be located at the stop state 2 The overall movable components of the CNC machine should be on stop state 3 Turn off the machine by POWER OFF button Cut off the power in an emergency 207 F m on gt om A Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System
356. on When bit 1 of parameter No 10 equals to 0 the stroke inspection does not perform before moving when bit 1 of parameter No 10 equals to 1 the stoke inspection is performed before moving 214 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting CHAPTER THREE INTERFACE DISPLAY amp DATA MODIFICATION AND SETTING 3 1 Position Display 3 1 1 Four Methods of Position Page Display POSITION Enter the position page display by ea There are four position display pages RELATIVE COORDINATE ABSOLUTE COORDINATE COMPOSITIVE PROGRAM MONITORING which can be viewed by the corresponding softkeys refer to the following 1 Relative coordinate Display the position of the current tool at the relative coordinate system by the RELATIVE COORDINATE softkey Refer to the Fig 3 1 1 1 FEED F mm min PRG SPEED _ FEED OVRD 100 O lt amp mm 46 66 126 166 2h a FO 25 5 100 a e a 5 3 za SP 65 Orpm Y A e 89 Cm 500000 M 100 56 68 70 88 396 1098 118 120 _ sa Z aS ABU m Tool T COMMAND T NO T2000 OFFSET HAA DAOA G G17 G90 G94 G21 G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 613 CUT TIME 000 00 20 DATA 9 05 5 PATH 1 E m ABS ALL PMONI Fig 3 1 1 1 2 Absolute coordinate Display the position of the current tool at the absolute coordinate system by the ABSOLUTE COORDINATE softkey Refer to
357. oove boundary Fig 4 6 5 1 Notice It is suggested to change the bit 1 of parameter No 12 into 1 when using this code For example The fine milling is performed for the roughed groove by canned cycle G35 code refer to the following figure 110 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Point R plane position Z 5 X10 Y0 Fig 4 6 5 2 G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G35 X10 YO Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 D1 F800 Perform the rectangular groove inner milling to the bottom of a hole in the a canned cycle method 7 Ss G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Cancel the canned cycle return to the point R plane a M30 Mm S e Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit 0 of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G35 G36 command the system then executes G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command positioning tool radius offset is ignored call the specified cutter compensation by program in the procedure of in feed 4 6 6 Fine milling ccle Outside the Rectangle G37 G38 Code format G37 G98 G99 x Y Z R_tL JL VU D_ F_ K G38 Function Tool is performed the fine milling with the specified width and direction and then return after the fine milling is completed Explanations G37 Fine milling cycle outside the rectangular groove CCW G38 Fine milling cycle outside the rectangular groove CW
358. or K center the center relative to the start It is so called the CW and CCW which is viewed from to direction of Z axis Y axis X axis for the XY plane ZX plane YZ plane in the right hand rectangular coordinate system refer to the Fig 4 2 3 1 Y X Z S Di SN X Z Y G17 G18 G19 Fig 4 2 3 1 SINN TOA y ry O Q D gt Z Q Setting the bit 1 and 2 of parameter No 31 can be specified the defaulted plane modal information when starting up Specify the arc end by parameter word X Y or Z The corresponding G90 command is indicated by absolute value the G91 by increment value and the increment value is the coordinate for the end relative to the start The arc center is specified by parameter word l J or K which are separately corresponding to the X Y or Z J or K parameter value are the coordinate Simply it is temporary to regard the start as the coordinate origin the coordinate of the center located for the center relative to the arc start whenever in the absolute mode G90 or in the relative mode G91 which are the increment value included with the symbol Refer to the Fig 4 2 3 2 End X Y End Z X End Y Z Start Start Start I l K Center 3 Center Center s 30 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Ei Fig 4 2 3 2 Jor Kis with the symbol based upon the center relative to the start direction Arc center also can be specified by radius R other than the I J or K
359. ords G X Y Z R I J K F H M S T P and Q and then the is inputted 2 The calculation can be commaned and the code can be shifted in MDI state 3 The H P Q and R of the calculation and shifting codes are regarded as the parameter specified by G65 whenever before or after G65 H02 G65 P 100 Q 101 R 102 Correct N100 G65 H01 P 100 Q10 Correct 154 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 The input range of variable can not be exceeded the available 15 digit its calculation results should be less than 9 integer digits the manual input range of variable are the enabled 8 digit 5 The calculation result of variable can be performed by decimal and its accuracy is 0 0001 The rest of calculations will not discard the decimal other than the H11 OR calculation H12 AND calculation H13 NON calculation and H23 Remainder calculation may omit the decimal in variable during calculating For example 100 35 101 10 102 5 110 100 101 3 5 111 110x 102 17 5 120 100x 102 175 121 120 101 17 5 6 The performance time of calculation and shifting codes are variable according to the conditions generally the average value can be considered as 10ms 7 When the variable does not define the variable may become Null Variable 0 is always null SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q which can be wrote only instead of reading a Quotation When an undefined var
360. ote 1 The operation can be performed at an arbitary position therefore detect whether the tool will impact with the 328 Chapter Ten Edit Operation workpiece or other object when moving to the program restart position if does the program restart can only be performed after the tool moves to the places without any abstruction Note 2 The block of the program restart maybe not be interrupted in the halfway the operation can be be restarted from any block its method is identical with the above mentioned It is only different that the N line number of the preload modal value is directly defined by the direction button in the MDI mode at the 4 step and then confirm it by INPUT button You can input the corresponding modal code and M code after entering the CUR MOD interface again Note 3 Never attempt to perform the restart when the restart block indexes to the execution period of program restart otherwise the program start should be performed again at the 1 step Note 4 The reference position return should be performed before performing the restart after the power is turned on if the machine tool does not install the absolute position detector absolute encoder Note 5 The program restart function does not support the form with the sub program Note 6 The program restart function does not support the programs with the rotation mirror image scaling or polar coordinate modal Note 7 The program restart function
361. ote 2 If you find the code word is incorrect when the program is input cancel the input code by kL Note 3 Up to 65 characters for the single input of the block 10 1 1 3 Index of Sequence Number Word and Line Number Sequence number index is a sequence number within the index program Generally the program can be performed or edited from the beginning of this sequence number The skipped block due to index does not affect to the CNC state The coordinate value M S T code G code etc of the coordinate value in the skipped block does not affect to the coordinate value of CNC and the modal value If some one block from index program begins performing in this case the machine state CNC state should be checked It can be operated when the corresponding M S T code and the setting of the coordinate system etc are consistent The index of word generally uses the specified address word or numbers during the index for the program editing The steps of sequence number word and line number during the index program 1 Selection method lt EDIT gt or lt AUTO gt method 2 Find the object program in LIST 320 Chapter Ten Edit Operation 3 Enter to the object program by 4 Input the word or sequence number to be indexed and find it by the or button 5 If the line number in the program should be searched you can input the desired line number SEARCH and then confirm it by button Note 1 The index functio
362. ovement direction servo and system gear ratio of the system are altered the zero will lost and therefore it is necessary to reset the zero of the machine tool Note 2 After the machine tool zero is set the other reference points may be affected for example the 2 and the the 3 reference points should be set again 233 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 3 5 1 Servo Parameter Display Enter the servo debugging interface by pressing the E BUS CONFIGURATION then enter the servo parameter interface by the E SERVO PARAMETER The content of this interface is shown below Fig 3 3 5 1 1 0000 O o l O O O N a a o2 so Pees a owa o _ o ow o oo a Password DATA f 11 4a 17 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 5 1 1 ll SIN IOA O 9 a 5 O Z 3 3 5 1 1 Modification amp Setting of Servo Parameter 1 Select lt MDI gt operation mode SETTING 2 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by set the parameter switch to 1 3 Press the sr then the E BUS CONFIGURATION to enter the servo debugging interface enter the parameter setting and display screen by the E SERVO PARAMETER 4 Move the cursor to the selected axis parameter 0 input the password 315 Parameters 0 42 can be viewed or altered download the drive to the system by input button the servo parameter can be modified in the SERVO PARAMETER interface 5 Move
363. owing forms 09010 N100 G65 H01 P 100 QO I 0 G65 H22 P 101 Q 504 IE N N200 G65 H04 P 102 Q 100 R360 162 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G65 H05 P 102 Q 102 R 504 81 A 360 xI N G65 H02 P 102 Q 503 R 102 G65 H32 P 103 Q 502 R 102 X l X I R COS 6l G65 H02 P 103 Q 500 R 103 G65 H31 P 104 Q 502 R 102 Y 1 Y I R SIN 81 G65 H02 P 104 Q 501 R 104 G90 G00 X 103 Y 104 The 1 hole positioning G The concrete hole machining G code G65 H02 P 100 Q 100 R1 lI I 1 G65 H84 P200 Q 100 R 101 When I lt IE turn to N200 to machin the hole of IE M99 Call the program examples of the above mentioned user macro program body 00010 G65 H01 P 500 Q100 X0 100MM G65 H01 P 501 Q 200 YO 200MM G65 H01 P 502 Q100 R 100MM G65 H01 P 503 Q20 A 20 G65 H01 P 504 Q12 N 12 CCW G92 X0 YO Z0 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q M98 P9010 User macro program calling G80 XO YO M30 4 9 5 User Macro Program Function B 1 Arithmetic and Logic operation The operations listed in the following table can be performed on variables The expression at the right of the operator can contain constants and or variables combined by a function or operator Variable j and k in an expression can be replaced with a constant Variable at the left can also be assigned with an expression 163 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Table 4 9 5 1 Arithmeti
364. parameter value is delivered to the drive and the state column displays Successful for drive parameter download SAVE 7 Servo saves the updated parameter by and the state column displays Successful for drive parameter save 8 Close the parameter switch after the overall parameters setting are completed 3 3 5 1 3 Servo Parameter Backup 1 Select the lt MDI gt operation mode SETTING set the parameter switch to 1 2 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by 235 O U m gt O Z ll SAIN TOA Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by input the terminal user password or above 4 Control the enter the servo debugging interface by E BUS CONFIGURATION and then enter the parameter display screen by E SERVO PARAMETER 5 Select the BACKUP button the parameter of the current selected axis is copied to the file DrvParxXxX txt XX axis number For example the file name is DrvPar0O1 txt if the X axis is backup 6 Close the parameter switch after the overall parameters setting are completed 3 3 9 1 4 Recovery of Servo Parameter 1 Select the lt MDI gt operation mode SETTING 2 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by set the parameter switch to 1 SETTING 3 Enter the lt SETTING gt interface by input the terminal user password or above SYSTEM 4
365. pecifies the program name c Input the address o and then input a new program name ALTER d Press the file name is then completed 10 1 9 Program Restart This function is used for the program operations when the accident of the automatical motion generates such as the tool broren power off ESP rest etc The system returns to the program breakpoint and performs continuely based upon the reatart function after the accident is eliminated The operation steps of the program restart 1 Resolve the machine tool accident For example tool change offset alternation and mechincial zero turen etc PROG 2 In the lt AUTO gt mode press the RESTART button on the panel PROGRAM 3 Enter the program interface by the on the operation panel and then enter the sub menu by the PROGRAM software below the LCD screen page to the last one of the sAN ll SAIN TOA O 9 m gt O Z ll SAIN IOAN O 2 L gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual sub menu by pressing twice enter the program restart interface by pressing the RESTART Record the different codes between the current modal and preload one Refer to the Fig 10 1 9 1 DISTANCE B D mm D D mm OOD mm 50 000 REM DIST 1 2 3 4 X O gt O gt Ss W Z A 310 deg LOADED MOD
366. plane Machine 9 hole after positioning then return to point R plane Machine 10 hole after positioning then return to point initial point plane Return to reference point spindle stops Cancel the tool length compensation then prform the tool change Initial point plane tool length compensation Spindle start Machine 11 hole after positioning then return to point R plane Machine 12 13 holes after positioning then return to point R plane 115 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual N025 GOO G90 XO YO M5 Return to reference point then spindle stops N026 G49 ZO Cancel the tool length compensation NO27 M30 Program stops 4 7 Tool Compensation G Code 4 7 1 Tool Length Compensation G43 G44 and G49 Function G43 specifies the positive compensation of tool length G44 specifies the negative compensation of tool length G49 cancels tool length compensation Format SINN TOA System supports A B tool length offset methods which can be set by bit 0 of parameter No 39 Method A G43 G44 is i Method B G17 G43 Z H G17 G44Z H G18 G43 Y_H G18 G44 Y_H G19 G43 X_H G19 G44 X_H y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Tool length offset method cancel G49 or HO Explanation The purose of the above mentioned codes is specified a end position of the specified axis and then moves an offset Th
367. position 7 50 Point R plane position Z 5 Fig 4 6 4 U ig 4 6 4 2 A a O lt G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning T O G99 G33 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 170 J50 L10 W20 Q10 V10 U5 D1 F800 Perform the groove gt rough milling cycle within rectangle dh Z G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Cancel the canned cycle return from the point R plane fe M30 Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G33 G34 command otherwise G33 G34 will be replaced by the G code of group 01 Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command positioning tool radius offset is ignored call the specified cutter compensation by program in the procedure of in feed 4 6 5 Fine milling Cycle within Rectangular Groove G35 G36 Code format G35 G98 G99 x Y Z Rt JS L U D_ F_ K G36 Function Tool is performed the fine milling with the specified width and direction and then return after the fine milling is completed Explanations G35 Fine milling cycle inside the rectangular groove CCW G36 Fine milling cycle inside the rectangular groove CW X Y The start position on X Y plane Z Machining depth it is the absolute position inG90 it is the position related to the R reference surface in G91 109 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual R R reference surface position it is
368. position Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R P_ The dwell time at the bottom of a hole or the dwell time at point R when retracting F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Repeated times If required 93 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G84 G98 G84 G99 t Spindle stop Spindle stop Initial point Ko o MT plane Motion 7 Motion 2 Motion 6 Motion 2 Point R plane dle Spindle Spindle positive Spindle stop pe stop Motion 3 Motion 5 Motion 3 Motion 5 i Spindle Spindle sto Spindle stop negative p p negative P Motion4 7 Fig 4 5 2 1 Z axis moves to point R at the rapid traverse and performs G84 along with X and Y axes after positioning and then spindle reverse The tapping is performed from point R to Z when the tapping is completed the spindle stops and performs the dwell then spindle rotates tool retreating from point R with reverse direction spindle then stops consequently spindle moves to th
369. position at the rapid traverse 5000 rate Setting range O 30000 0172 The 3 axis manual position at the rapid traverse 5000 rate Setting range O 30000 gt a mi z x lt 0173 The 4 axis manual position at the rapid traverse 5000 rate Setting range O 30000 385 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0174 The 5 axis manual position at the rapid traverse 5000 rate Setting range 0 30000 0175 The program name of the 1 axis Setting range O 8 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 3 A4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0176 The program name of the 2 axis 1 Setting range O 8 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 3 A4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0177 The program name of the 3 axis Setting range O 8 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 3 A4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0178 The The program name of the 4 axis 0 name of the 4 axis a range 0 8 Bl lied 0179 The The program name of the 5 axis 0 name of the 5 axis oe range 0 8 reer cc eR ogR 0180 The grid or reference position offset value of the 1 axis Setting range 0 50 0181 The grid or reference position offset value of the 2 aa axis Setting range 0 50 0182 The grid or reference position offset value of the 3 gt axis Setting range 0 50 gt U v m z gt lt 0183 The grid or reference position offset value of the 4 aa axis Setting range 0 50 0184 The compensation condition when the friction 386
370. produces a smoothly machined surface 2 Whether the automatic corner override function is available is set by bit 7 of parameter No 16 Control the automatic corner deceleration function 0 Angle control 1 Speed difference control by bit 2 of parameter No 15 3 When specifying G62 and machining inner corner with cutter compensation function automatically adjust the feedrate both ends of corner There are four inner corners refero to Fig 4 8 2 1 wherein 2 s s ps1 78 Op is set by data parameter P144 145 SINN TOA n J O Q D gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q D gt Z Q 146 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual a T 1 Straight line Straight line pe 2 Straight line Arc Programmed path Tool center path 3 Arc Straight line Fig 4 8 2 1 4 When a corner is determined to be an inner corner the feedrate is overridden before and after the inner corner The distances Ls and Le where the feedrate is overridden are distances from the points on the cutter center path to the corner Refer to 4 8 2 2 wherein Ls Les2mm Programmed path N ge The feedrate is overridden gt Tool center path from point a to b Fig 4 8 2 2 Straight line to straingt line 5 When a programmed path consists of two arcs the feedrate is overridden if the start and end points are in the same quadrant or in adjacent quadrants T
371. product is damaged during transportation Confirm all the elements are complete without damage by referring to the list Itis necessary to contact our company immediately if the product type is inconsistent with the packing list lack of accessories or damage in transportation E Wiring Only the person who executes the wiring and inspection should have the corresponding professional capacity The product should be reliably grounded and its resistance should be less than 0 1Q and can not be used the neutral conductor zero cable to replace the ground wire The connection must be correct and secured Otherwise the product may be damaged or unexpected results may occur The surge absorb diode connected with the product should be linked based upon the described direction otherwise it may damage the product Turn off the power before inserting or unplugging a plug or opening the electric cabinet E Overhaul Turn off the power supply before troubleshooting or replacing components Gr Wisi GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Overhaul the system when there is a short circuit or overload and do not restart it until the trouble is removed Do not turn ON OFF the product frequently and the ON OFF interval should be 1 minute at least DECLARTION We will try to describe all the various matters as much as possible in this manual However it is impossible to give detailed descript
372. program The cutter compensation can not be set up or cancelled in the arc command 0034 Modify the program N Skip cutting G31 was specified in cutter compensation mode Modify the program T naeran omose osere O compensation C mode Modify the program 98 amen merene omenean end coincides with the arc center Modify the program 0098 The cuter nose posttoring ect compensation eneore 410 OO Q9 Appendix Two Alarm List The workpiece coordinate system can not be converted in cutter compensation C The coordinate system conversion can only be performed after the cutter compensation is cancelled ee Overcutting will occur and interference generates in cutter compensation C Modify the program In the cutter compensation more than 10 blocks without movement command but the dwell command are consecutively performed Modify the program The authority can be changed at the password interface if the authority is absent 0044 One of G27 G28 G29 or G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode Modify the program In the canned cycle G73 G83 a depth for each cutting Q is not specified or Q value is regarded as 0 Modify the program The commands other than P2 P3 and P4 are specified in the 2 3 and 4 reference position return command Bane Firstly perform the machine zero before executing the commands such as the G28 G30 and G53 etc 0048 In the canned cycle Z plane should be higher th
373. r JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 190 Chapter One Operation Panel VOLUME TWO OPERATION ll ANN IOA O U m gt O Z 191 er JJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual ll SAWN IOA O U m gt O Z 192 Chapter One Operation Panel CHAPTER ONE OPERATION PANEL 1 1 Panel Classification GSK218MC series contains of GSK218MC GSK218MC H GSK218MC V and GSK218MC U1 wherein GSK218MC and GSK218MC U1 CNC system are used the assembly structure GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V are separately used the horizontal structure and vertical structure Panel divides into LCD area Editing keyboard area sofkey function area and machine tool control area refer to the following figures LCD display area Edit keyboard area 1 816558 A i a fe FEE ALTER DELET SHIFT Be 2 ae 23 467 37 833 la eee l co Gi7 G G34 G21 Gaa G49 GIZ GER G38 G15 G50 G amp S GBA Gor 613 JER O lt 2 fs mser f aen owe s Ic 4s om ggg pon ae i i SAFO 0 001 DEF afeh BBG 0 Be aii gtr Soft key function area Machine control area Fig 1 1 1 GSK218MC panel 193 er JJ SY J GSK218MC CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual LCD display area Edit keyboard area
374. r arc can be specified consecutively Explanations 1 After L the chamfering specifies the distance from the virtual corner point to the start and end points The virtual corner point is the one that would exist if chamfering were not performed refer to the following figure 56 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 1 G91 GO1 X100 L10 2 X100 Y100 Insert the chamfering block Virtual center Fig 4 2 18 1 2 After R specify the radius for corner arc refer to the following figure 1 G91 G01 X100 R10 2 X100 Y100 Arc center of radius R Fig 4 2 18 2 Restrictions 1 Chamfering and corner arc only can be performed within the specified plane and these functions cannot be performed for parallel axes 2 If the inserted chamfering or the block of the corner arc causes the tool to go beyond the original interpolation movement range the alarm is issued 3 The corner arc can not be specified in the screw machining block 4 When the specified chamfering value and the corner value are negative the system is assigned with the absolute value 4 3 Reference Position G Code The reference position is a fixed point on a machine tool to which the tool can be easily moved to this point by the reference position function There are 3 code operation methods for the reference position refer to the Fig 4 3 1 the tool can be automatically moved to the reference position along with the specified axis in code via a
375. r number 014 6 SSOG ORI Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 014 7 RIN SCL1 SCL2 SCL3 XSC 1 The rotation angle of the coordinate rotation G90 G91 command 0 The rotation angle of the coordinate rotation Absolute command ORI ero 1 At the beginning of the tapping the control method of spindle is servo 0 At the beginning of the tapping the control method of spindle is follow 1 At the beginning of the tapping the spindle dwells 0 At the beginning of the tapping the spindle does not dwell gt E v m z gt lt XSC SCL3 SCL2 SCL1 RIN 1 The scaling of the 1 axis is enabled 0 The scaling of the 1 axis is disabled 1 The scaling of the 2 axis is enabled 0 The scaling of the 2 axis is disabled 1 The scaling of the 3 axis is enabled 0 The scaling of the 3 axis is disabled 1 The specification method of the scaling override along each axis is I J or K 0 The specification method of the scaling override along each axis is P code Standard setting 0111 1001 System parameter number 363 gt U v m z gt lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 364 iad O E a E E MDL 1 The unidirectional position G code is set to modal code 0 The
376. r of AS O lt excircle CW O Rectangle groove rough S Cc mill CCW Rectangle groove rough Zz G34 is IG mill CW G35 X_Y ZRIJL UDFK Finish mill circular inner G35 the rectangular groove CCW a G36 X_Y ZRIJL UDF K Finish mill circular inner the rectangular groove CW ve G37 X_Y ZRIJL UDF K z Finish mill circular out of the rectangle CCW a G38 X_Y ZRIJL UDFK Finish mill circular out of the rectangle CW G39 Corner offset circular arc G39 F interpolation G17 DX Y_ Cutter compensation G40 G40 cancel G41 G41 ae T Left cutter compensation G42 T Right cutter compensation Tool length compensation G43 G43 direction Tool length compensation G44 G44 H Z direction Tool length compensation G49 G49 cancel 23 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G sf n code Function J Co S72 D 2a Do FD D C lt azo O O O TA O D Z 235 Q o gt em as Machine tool coordinate G53 Write in the program T system selection Workpiece coordinate G54 system 1 Workpiece coordinate G55 system 2 05 Write in the block it generally places at the system 3 G57 beginning of the program system 4 SINN 1OA y J O Q D gt Z Q Workpiece coordinate G58 system 5 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 G60 00 01 G60X Y Z T Unidirectional positionin CA E 7 G G G G64 Cutting mode G G65 H_P i Q
377. r setting value which is operated based upon the least value if it more than the P282 parameter setting value and it is operated based upon the most value Axis shifting Cancel the canned cycle before shifting the tapping axis If the tapping axis is changed 92 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code in rigid tapping mode the system then shows the No 206 alarm Override The feedrate and spindle rotation feedrate are 100 by default during the rigid tapping the machine tool still operates after pressing the feed hold and reset buttons till the completion of the operation return Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation Program restart The program restart function is disabled in tapping cycle Note When the machining such as the flexible tapping rigid tapping or peck tapping etc are performed it is necessary to firstly cancel the constant surface cutting feed by G97 otherwise the disorder gear or broken screw tap etc will occur 4 5 2 Right handed Rigid Tapping G84 Format G84 X_Y_Z R_P_F_K Function In the rigid method the control of spindle motor is a servo motor which can be carried out the high speed accuracy tapping Also it can be guarantee that the start position of tapping is consistent in the case of invariable Point R Namely the thread still keep order even if repeated perform the tapping in a
378. r switch 0 Close the parameter swith 1 Open the parameter switch When the parameter switch sets to 0 the modification and setting of the system parameter are prohibited the system alarm 0100 Parameter write is enabled cancels When the parameter switch sets to 1 the system alarm occurs 0100 Parameter write is enabled In this 247 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual case the alarm This operation is only enabled in a setting interface can be cancelled by buttons 2 Program switch 0 Close the program switch 1 Open the program switch When the program switch sets to 0 the program editing is prohibited 3 Keyboard selection 0 MC H 1 MC V 2 MC 3 MC U1 Note In any method the keyboard selection can be also altered if the ESP button is controlled 4 Input unit Set whether the input unit of the program is metric or inch 0 Metric 1 Inch 5 I O channel User freely sets it based upon its requirements for example the channel sets to 2 if the DNC machining is performed by U disk the channel sets to 3 if DNC machining is performed by internet access 0 1 RS232 0 selects the Xon Xoff agreement 1 selects Xmodem agreement 2 USB 3 NET ll SAIN TOA 6 Automatic series No O 2 L gt O Z 0 When the program is input by keyboard in the editing mode the system will not automatically insert the sequence number 1 When th
379. ramming amp Operation Manual determined by bits 0 7 of parameter No 31 Note 3 The G codes of the 00 goup are the non modal G codes other than the G10 G12 and G92 Note 4 If th G codes without showing in the G code table are used the alarm then occurs perhaps the alarm will also be generated if the G code without the optional function is specified Note 5 Several different G codes can be specified in a same block In principle two or more G codes in a same group can not be specified in a same block If a same code that does not alarm in a same block is set it is subject to the following G codes Note 6 The G codes of 01 and 09 groups are shared with a same block In the canned cycle modal if the G code in group 01 is specified the canned cycle will be automatically cancelled and then turn into G80 state Note 7 G codes are separately expressed by each group based upon the different types Whether clear the G codes of each group when resetting or in the ESP which are set by both the bits 0 7 of parameter No 35 and bits 0 7 of parameter No 36 Note 8 When the rotation scaling codes and the codes in the 01 or 09 group are shared with a same block it is better to subject to the rotation scaling code simultaneously change the modal of 01 or 09 group The system will alarm when the rotation scaling code and the code in 00 group are shared with a same block SINN TOA 4 2 Simple G Code y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 4 2
380. range of compensation value is shown below Table 4 7 2 1 oo Range Compensation value D mm 999 999 m m 999 999 m m Compensation D inch 39 3700 inch 39 3700 inch Notice The system regards the compensation value of DOO is 0 by default user can neither set nor SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q modify The compensation plane should be performed after cancelling the compensation mode The system will alarm if the compensation plane changes without cancelling compensation mode 3 Plane selection and vector The compensation calculation is performed within the plane selected by G17 G18 and G19 This plane is called compensation plane For example when the XY plane is selected the compensation and vector calculations can be executed by X Y in program The coordinate value of the axis without the compensation plane is regardless of the compensation Simultaneously 3 axes are controlled only the tool path shadowed on the compensaton plane is compensated The alteration of compensation plane should be performed after cancelling the compensation mode Table 4 7 2 2 G17 X Y plane G18 Z X plane 4 G40 G41 and G42 The cancellation and performance of cutter compensation is commanded by G40 G41 and G42 of which they are defined a modal to affirm the value or the direction of compensation vector combined with the GOO or G01 and codes 120 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Table 4
381. raverse The rapid positioning is performed by code G00 The rapid feedrate are set by data parameter P88 P92 The following override adjustment can be performed by its corresponding buttons on the operation panel W R OVERRIDE e Ny 100 s V T U ORDI VUFO f5 f s50 f o0 0 001 f 0 01 f 0 1 1 A W R OVERRIDE SINN TOA a J O Q 7 gt Z Q 218MC 218MC H 218MC V buttons 218MC U1 button Fig 7 1 1 The buttons of rapid feedrate Wherein FO It is set by data parameter P93 The acceleration of rapid positioning G0 can be determined by data parameter P105 P123 which can be set reasonably based upon the machine tool and the motor s response characters Note In the GOO block the F code is disabled even if the it is specified the system positions at the GO speed 7 2 Cutting Speed In the linear interpolation G01 and circular arc interpolation GO2 G03 the feedrate of cutter is specified by the numerical values followed with the F code its unit is mm min Tool moves along the cutting feedrate compiled in program The cutting feedrate can be carried out by using the feedrate buttons on operation panel the override adjustment range is 0 200 183 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Automatically perform the acceleration deceleration to prevent the mechanical vibration at the beginning and the end of the tool movement ac
382. rd Specify a dwell time at the bottom of a hole A canned cycle codes can be accompanied a parameter P_ in the P_ parameter value perform the dwell operation time after the specified tool reaches to the plane Z its unit is ms The least value of parameter is determined by P281 and its most value is set by P282 Specify the cutting feedrate Change only the modal Specify the repeated time in the K_ parameter value and the K is only enabled with the specified block If it omits it regards K as once bey default The maximum drilling times is 99999 when the negative value is specified and then perform it base upon the absolute value when it is O the drilling hole operation is omitted gt Canned cycle G code is the modal one which always keeps enabling until the G code of the SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Restrictions specified canned cycle is cancelled gt The G80 and the G code of group 01 is cancelled the G code of canned cycle gt Machining data is always performed till the end of the canned cycle once it is specified in a canned cycle therefore the necessary hole machining data should be specified at the beginning of the canned cycle and only the altered data should be specified in the following canned cycle Note 1 The cutting feedrate specified by F is held even if the canned cycle is cancelled Note 2 the scaling function along Z axis cutting axle direction is disabled when
383. reference point return direction ZMI2 1 Set the 2 axis reference point return direction 0 Set the 2 axis reference point return direction ZMI3 1 Set the 3 axis reference point return direction 0 Set the 3 axis reference point return direction ZMI4 1 Set the 4 axis reference point return direction 0 Set the 4 axis reference point return direction ZMI5 1 Set the 5 axis reference point return direction 01 Set the 5 axis reference point return direction Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 349 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 00 8 ese ka pres meee eees AXS1 1 The 1 axis sets to rotation axis 0 The 1 axis sets to linear axis AXS2 1 The 2 axis sets to rotation axis 0 The 2 axis sets to linear axis AXS3 1 The 3 axis sets to rotation axis 0 The 3 axis sets to linear axis AXS4 1 The 4 axis sets to rotation axis 0 The 4 axis sets to linear axis AXS5 1 The 5 axis sets to rotation axis 0 The 5 axis sets to linear axis Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 010 9 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 Fala RAB RAB 1 Each axis rotates nearest when it regards as the rotation axis 0 Each axis does not rotates nearest when it regards as the rotation axis A4TP 1 4 axis linkage system
384. ress J or not Or H to adjust the rigid grade YES Yes press the lt INPUT gt to y clear the optimization state Step2 Measure and the optimization can be the rigid grade by performed again after SHIFTING or initializing SHIFTING The rigid grad hether it i vibration or No Return to grade Adjustment by lt CANCEL gt Directly adjust or measure The rigid grace after cancelling No enter the optimization schedule by lt INPUT gt Yes enter the optimization schedule by lt INPUT gt already timize Step3 Enter the optimization schedule Whether optimizes Yes perform the optimization by AXIS SHIFTING OR AXIS SHIFTING Step4 Optimization completed No clear the optimization data after pressing the lt CANCEL gt and then optimizing again hether download the naramete YES y Step5 Download the parameter by lt INPUT gt Whether the download is successfull YES Y Enter the step 0 after the operation is performed select the next axis to be optimized by up down direction buttons Reset to the initialization operation by lt RESET gt ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z 243 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 2 Round testi
385. result can be used in other macro programs The purpose of common variable does not specify in system user can be used it freely Table 4 9 2 1 100 199 The variable numbers are eliminated when Common l the power is turned off and reset to Null variable when the power is turned on 149 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 500 999 The data are registered in file and they will not absent even if the power is turned off 4 System variables System variables are used to read and write a variety data when CNC is performed which are separately shown below 1 Interface input signal 1000 1015 Read PLC based upon the bit and input the signal to system that is G signal 1032 Read PLC based upon byte and input the signal to system that is G signal 2 Interface output signal 1100 1115 Write system output based upon bit to the signal of PLC that is F signal 1132 Write system output based upon byte to the signal of PLC that is F signal 3 Tool length compensation value 1500 1755 Read write 4 Length wear compensation value 1800 2055 Read write 5 Cutter compensation value 2100 2355 Read write 6 Radius wear compensation value 2400 2655 Read write 7 Alarm 3000 8 User data table 3500 3755 Read only
386. ring the operation program 7 3 Stop of Auto Operation During the program Auto operation the system provides 5 methods to stop the automatic program 1 Program sto MOO After the block with MOO is executed program operation dwell and the overall modal information is saved The program continues after controlling the D 2 Program selection stop M01 J OPTIONAL Before the program operation if the STOP is pressed the program dwells when it executes the block containing the M01 and then the overall modal information is saved The program continues after controlling the Seia 3 Press the 2 After pressing the 2 in the Auto operation mode the machine tool shows the following states 1 Machine tool feed decelerates then stops 2 When the dwell G04 code is performed the timer stops then enters the feed hold state 3 The rest of modal information is saved 300 Chapter Seven Automatic Operation 4 The program consecutively performs after pressing GEST 4 Press the Refer to the Section 2 3 1 OPERATION EXPLANATION VOLUME 5 Press the ESP button Refer to the Section 2 3 1 in this OPERATION EXPLANATION VOLUME In addition when the program is operated in the Auto DNC MDI and MDI interface the machine tool can be stopped after shifting to other modes Refer to the following items 1 Shift to the Edit MDI or DNC interface the machine tool stops after performing the current block
387. rn d Preview the program at the current cursor located I USED 1504 58368 K 95878 3448 091000 1118 11 07 11 15 29 2073301 pjexiraz Mi Ga GIA Mi 235 Y 5 MIBG Zakas SAAMI MIZA 31 NISRA da Y 46 5517 Bee MIZE W75 472 Y dAA 556 Z 031 Miza 175 496 y 48 174 Z 033 E E Seo PATH 1 E Fig 3 2 6 II Enter the program USB list display interface by LIST softkey the display content is as 224 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting follows Refer to Fig 3 2 7 USB PROGRAM DIR pag USED MEM UE ca 000017 txt 256B 8 8 14 12 18 O0JJAS txt 126658568 11 08 08 16 M2 18 000027 txt 296B 08 08 14 12 18 007999 081364B 11 07 06 11 14 09391001 G65H81P5 0Q 1003R1 669650615680640 M50 G65H81P40Q 10A1R1 G65H81 P2001 888R1 M1969164963 Z0 M21 INPUT o o l 54 44 PATH 1 Fig 3 2 7 Explanation The overall program numbers within the memory is displayed by the page buttons the program names can not be viewed if they are more than 6 digit or improper the regular F m r an AE om a 3 3 System Display Enter the system page by there are five sub interface for this page HJOFFSET PARAMETER MACRO VARIABLE PITCH COMPENSATION and BUS CONFIGURATION which can be shifted and displayed by its corresponding software Refer to the following figure Fi
388. rogramming shape y The shape after scaling SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Cutter radius compensation value is not scaled Fig 4 2 14 3 The scaling of current compensation Image program example Main program G00 G90 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 l 1 J1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 l 1 J 1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 11 J 1 M98 P9000 G50 M30 Subprogram O9000 G00 G90 X60 0 Y60 0 G01 X100 0 F100 G01 Y100 49 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G01 X60 0 Y60 0 M99 100 40 50 60 0 40 50 60 100 Fig 4 2 14 4 Restrictions 1 In the canned cycle the depth of Z axis cutting value the 1 cutting depth distance W of the return value d Z and the movement scaling of the rapid cutting distance V are all disabled 2 In the manual operation the movement distance can not be increased or decreased by scaling function Note 1 The position displays the coordinate value after scaling Note 2 There is an axis of the specification plane is performed the image and its result is shown below 1 Circular code Negative rotation direction 2 Cutter compensation C Negative offset direction 3 Coordinate system rotation Negative rotation angle 4 Change the direction of the cutting feed 4 2 15 Coordinate System Rotation
389. rrent plane The parameter words of the 3 code parameter is the linear axis other than the arc interpolation axis Its parameter value is the helical height The meanings and restrictions of other code parameters are identical with the 33 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN 1OA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual circular arc interpolation If the system can not machined a circle based upon the offered code parameter the system is then returned the incorrect information The modal of the current tool movement method changes to G02 G03 by system after it executes The feedrate along with two arc interpolation axes circle is specified The command method is to simply add a move axis which is not a circular arc interpolation axis An F code specifies a feedrate along a circular arc Therefore the feedrate of the linear axis is as follows Length of linear axis F c F lt 1s Length of circular arc Affirm that the feedrate of linear axis is less than any of the restriction values Restriction It is note the coordinate plane selection when the helical interpolation is performed 4 2 4 Absolute Incremental Programming G90 G91 Format G90 G91 Function The code axis movement value method are included the absolute value code and the incremental value code The absolute value code is programmed with the coordinate val
390. s S 0 in a G96 code till M3 or M4 appears in program 178 Chapter Six Spindle Function S Code Spindle speed rpm The spindle speed almost coincides with the surface speed at approx 160mm radius Surface speed S a is 600mm min SINN TOA 5 ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Radius mm O 20 40 60 80 100120140 160180200 220240 260 280300 Fig 6 3 2 Relationships among the workpiece radius spindle speed and surface speed 5 Specify surface cutting feed in G96 mode 179 Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G96 mode G97 mode Specify surface speed in mm min inch min G97 command Store this speed in mm min inch min AS Specified O lt 2 S Cc Apply the Z S specified spindle em speed rpm Z Q Without specification Surface speed mm min or inch min converts into spindle speed rpm Commands other than G96 command Specified Apply the specified surface speed Without specification Employ the stored surface speed mm min inch min 0 is assumed if there is no stored surface speed Fig 6 3 3 180 Chapter Six Spindle Function S Code 6 The relative parameter setting of G96 When the bit 2 of parameter No 37 sets the GO at the rapid traverse rate calculate the reference coordinate of G96 spindle speed 0 End 1 Current point When the bit 3 of parameter No 37 sets the G96
391. s are related with the current coordinate plane and select the X Y in the G17 Z X in G18 Y Z in G19 The system is treated the specified point as the rotation center if the current positioning is absolute method The system is regarded the current point as the rotation center if the positioning is relative method G68 also can be held a command parameter R its parameter value is the angle for the rotation the positive value is CCW and its rotation angle is degree The used rotation angle is determined by data parameter P329 when there is no rotation angle in the coordinate rotation The system is regarded the current tool position as the rotation center in the G91 mode whether the rotation angle is performed the increment is set by the bit O of parameter No 47 The rotation angle of coordinate 0 Absolute code 1 G90 G91 code The plane operation selection can not be performed when the system is on the rotation mode otherwise the alarm occurs It is necessary to note it when programming The G codes G27 G30 etc of the reference point return and the G codes G53 G59 G54P1 G54P50 G9 etc 2 of command coordinate system can not be specified in the 51 SINN TOA n J O Q D gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual coordinate system rotation method When however there is not alternative other than to specify these G codes it is
392. s performed after along more than two axes cancel the offset of overall axes by G49 and the offset value of axis vertical to the specified plane is only cancelled by HOO 2 It is suggested that the establishment and cancellation of length compensation adds to the movement code along Z axis otherwise the establishment and length compensation cancellation will be performed at the current point and therefore it is better to confirm that the Z axis is on the safety height when using G49 prevent the the workpiece from impacting or damaging 5 The concrete example of tool length compensation A Tool length compensation Machining hole 1 2 and 3 y S lt B HO01 offset value 4 E gt C z S m gt _ Q Unit mm B 120 Ag Actual position an Programming position Unit mm Fig 4 7 1 1 N1 G91 GOO X120 Y80 1 N2 G43 Z 32 HO1 ee 2 N3 G01 Z 21 F200 oe n 3 N4 G04 P2000 eee NS GOO 227 sran weavers 5 NG X30 Y 50 f viwcissincates ati 6 118 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code N7 G01 2 41 F200 oe eee 7 NS GOU ZAT siamo toagsaiee Shite 8 IND KOO VOOi ss araara Kn 9 N10 G01 2 25 F100 eee 10 NIT G04 P2000 2 cincin 28 D N12 GOO Z57 HOO sasse see ee 12 N13 X 200 Y 60 oo es e messere 13 N14 M30 4 7 2 Cutter Compensation G40 G41 G42 Code format G41D XY G42D XY
393. s set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G88 command y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q the system then performs the G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation 4 4 11 Boring Cycle G89 Code format G89 X Y Z RPF K_ Function This cycle is used to bore a hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R P_ Dwell time at the bottom of a hole F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Repeated times 88 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G89 G98 G89 G99 Initial point plane Fig 4 4 11 1 This cycle almost is absolute indentical with the G85 The different is that this cycle performs a dwell at the bottom of the hole Before specifying G89 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle When the G89 and the M code are specified at a same block perform the M code at the time of performing the 1 hole position operation and then the system then proceeds the next drilling operation When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code
394. screen by pressing the Setting button again 0 In the position interface do not shift the screen by pressing the Setting button again apa 1 In the position interface shift the screen by pressing the Graph button again 0 In the position interface do not shift the screen by pressing the Graph button again 9 DEN 1 In the position interface shift the screen by pressing the Diagnosis button m again 0 In the position interface do not shift the screen by pressing the Diagnosis button again ET 1 In the position interface shift the screen by pressing the Alarm button again 0 In the position interface do not shift the screen by pressing the Alarm button again Standard setting 1111 0111 System parameter number 02 6 HELP PLC AMDI SMDI SPET alg PETP 1 Automatically skip to the program page by Editing button 0 Do not automatically skip to the program page by Editing button 1 In the Editing mode automatically skip to the program interface by lt PROGRAM gt SPET 356 SMDI SMDT PLC HELP Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0 In the Editing mode do not automatically skip to the program interface by lt PROGRAM gt 1 In the MDI mode automatically skip to the MDI interface by lt PROGRAM gt 0 In the MDI mode do not automatically skip to the MDI interface by lt PROGRAM gt 1 In the
395. sequence number can also be specified using an expression 166 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code GOTOn n Sequence number 1 to 99999 Example GOTO 1 GOTO 10 3 Conditional branch IF statement lt Conditional expression gt IF lt Conditional expression gt GOTO n If the specified conditional expression is satisfied Branch to the block marked with sequence number n If the specified conditional expression is not satisfied the next block is executed If the variable value 1 is greater than 10 branch to the block with sequence number N2 If the condition is not satisfied IF 1 GT 10 GOTO 2 If the condition is s Program saftisfied SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q N2 G00 G91 X10 0 lt IF lt Conditional expression gt THEN If the conditional expression is satisfied a predetermined macro program statement is executed Only a single macro statement is carried out If the value of 1 and 2 are the same 0 is assigned to 3 IF 1 EQ 2 THEN 3 0 Explanations gt Conditional expression A conditional expression must include an operator inserted between two variables or between a variable and constant and must be enclosed in brackets An expression can be replaced a variable gt Operators Operators consist of two letters and used to compare two values to determine whether they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than t
396. set a tool radius D along with the X axis negative direction and then multiple the cutting coefficient position of the helix 2 Move to point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Downward the cutting W distance depth with helical method at the rapid traverse rate feed to the circle center 4 The circle surface with radius is milled with helix step by step by L value for each time where from center to outside 5 Z axis returns to R reference surface at the rapid traverse rate 6 Rapid positioning to the start position along with the X and Y axes 7 Z axis descends to the distance from the unproceeded surface V at the rapid traverse rate 8 Cutting Q V depth downward along Z axis 101 SINN 1IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 9 Repeat the operations from 4 to 8 till to the total cutting depth on the surface is machined 10 Return to initial point plane or point R plane based upon the different specifications of G98 or G99 Code path gt Rapid feed Cutting feed Fig 4 6 1 1 LY Note Dis the tool diameter value 41s the helical radius coefficient Y Note D is the tool diameter value Ais the helical radius coefficient Tool center path Circle groove border Fig 4 6 1 2 Notice 1 It is surposed to change the bit 1 of parameter No 12 into 1 when using this code 2 T
397. setting or ESP 0 Remain the F H and D codes when resetting or ESP Standard setting 0000 0000 gt System parameter number a 013 5 C07 C06 C05 C04 C03 C02 C01 u x lt C01 1 Clear the G codes in group 01 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 01 when resetting or ESP C02 1 Clear the G codes in group 02 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 02 when resetting or ESP C03 1 Clear the G codes in group 03 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 03 when resetting or ESP C04 1 Clear the G codes in group 04 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 04 when resetting or ESP C05 1 Clear the G codes in group 05 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 05 when resetting or ESP C06 1 Clear the G codes in group 06 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 06 when resetting or ESP C07 1 Clear the G codes in group 07 when resetting or ESP 359 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 0 Reserve the G codes in group 07 when resetting or ESP Standard setting 1000 0000 System parameter number 036 A E 2a ETE C08 1 Clear the G codes in group 08 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve the G codes in group 08 when resetting or ESP C09 1 Clear the G codes in group 09 when resetting or ESP 0 Reserve t
398. sicesatiennctretreuntst aso E E AE OAE ab acnasen N 7 20 AXIS DISHA y na A eC 7 2A CO rdiNate Syste enson E E E N 8 2A Machine ToolCoordinate Systemsa oann EE AE EA EEEE a 8 DAZ ARCTELCICE POSION ecran anea n a a EE 8 DAS Workpiece Coordmate Systemi muaren orini a rE nate Sareea oo aE EE EERE 9 2 4 4 Absolute Coordinate Programming and Relative Coordinate Programming cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 29 Modalan ONC SI OU murdare E EAE 11 CHAPTER THREE COMPONENT PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 0 ccccccsssssscccceessees 13 31e Program Co OMPOSIMOM io coisis ters cBaass os aded cae O S A aden dimen 13 Slide PROC TAMA NaM Ee sca caaasen dean saat a as sataneas sit tuaaaad Aan rm tate baa iasmagnd cane 14 Sled peg uenecy Numberand Block cansion atl sete ed a eect eee cerm edo eee 14 zee name COGEN O eee annem we ear ae emt ean ee ena a ee Aen A 14 3 2 General Sruct re of Progra sesse A AA OE OAO an addvoaowveadaadsunaeues 18 J2 DuUbDpro rim Compl NE sesia a a E E OT 19 I2 DuUbproorain allies aaa a aa a a a 20 IA Pror WEN aa aa a a a a a seateineseates 20 CHAPTER FOUR PREPARATORY FUNCTION G CODE sssecccccssecceccseececccsececcsseccecssseceecssse 21 4 1 Type of Preparatory Function G Code seesssssessessssesessssssrrssssrrrssssrressssreresssrressseeresssrreessereesssseres 21 A 2 DME G COE se A E A E E A 26 AD Rapid Positionmne GOU rsi EE N AE E N 26 A2 Linear Interpolation GOl reien a E E bt sceesbudense 2i 4 2 3 Circular
399. specify Standard setting 0000 0010 9 System parameter number D 0144 PCP DOV VGR gt lt v k 1 The gear ratio between the spindle and position encoder can be set arbitrarily 0 The gear ratio between the spindle and position encoder can not be set freely SOU 1 The override is enabled when the rigid tapping is performed the tool retraction 1 The override is disabled when the rigid tapping is performed the tool retraction PCP 1 The tapping is the high speed peck tapping cycle 0 The tapping is the standard peck tapping cycle Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 01415 ove One TER BS 362 NIZ TDR OVU OVS Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 1 Perform the rigid tapping smooth treatment 0 Do not perform the rigid tapping smooth treatment 1 Rigid tapping in feed Use the identical time constante when tool retraction is performed 0 Rigid tapping in feed Do not use the identical time constante when tool retraction is performed 1 The unit of the rigid tapping tool retraction override is 10 0 The unit of the rigid tapping tool retraction override is 1 1 In the rigid tapping the feedrate selection and override cancellation signal are enabled 0 In the rigid tapping the feedrate selection and override cancellation signal are disabled Standard setting 0000 0000 System paramete
400. spindle in tapping cycle the system then alarms the top speed level of the spindle in the rigid tapping is determined by P94 P296 F command If the specified F value exceeds the upper limit value of the cutting feedrate data parameter P96 sets the upper limit value it is subject to the upper limit value P command P is the modal code the least value of parameter is set by data parameter P281 and the most value is set by p282 Value P is less than the P281 parameter setting value which is operated based upon the least value if it more than the P282 parameter setting value and it is operated based upon the most value Axis shifting Cancel the canned cycle before shifting the tapping axis If the tapping axis is changed 95 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual in rigid tapping mode the system then shows the No 206 alarm Override The feedrate and spindle rotation feedrate are 100 by default during the tapping the machine tool still operates after pressing the feed hold and reset buttons till the completion of the operation return Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation Program restart The program restart function is disabled in tapping cycle Note When the machining s
401. ssentastocuntietisetardalast 323 10 1 1 8 Deletion of Multiple Code Word essesssseresesesssrrrrssssssrrrrssssssrrrrrssssrrrreressssrrrersssserrrree 323 IOT Deletion oi Smole Block renen aa aa a seetsee dea 324 IOL Deleiorot Overall ProoraMS erence a a 325 LOJA Erori COD e A O ee Sern 325 10 15 Copy and Paste of Blocker a a EE OA 325 LO LO Cutand Pate Or BIOCEN 326 WOA Replacement ot BoC kestunanenene ed hat a a a a a unter dante 327 OIS Renimeor Prosa aes a a that at a a a a aa 327 HOST 9 Program Restart itcrs 3252 5 ssc 8 aa a a a vera a veliconmee todas Seamed AAR 327 10 2 PFOGKAMUAGCIMIMIS ALON esineeseen E Bi avsided A Oecan ad eveas ea henaaseeee 329 TODD dexo Prora ist 5 ics a e tasecaTuees a aaean dabaadald susan dyes mead dae seusoandateaescates 329 1022 Quattor Storage PPO OLAV ic c dchendcatabbradeicmmittatenedncndd tals tad a Meatless ead siasseedaladdineseal ee 330 POD 3 Sora Capaci Veia cies hast a e a a a a taeoialeinesealee 330 10 24 CheckofProorani Lists tid sist rial catia T S N 330 PODS Lockna ot PYOSraMNi5 tit iid hast trie at cat at ahha date Mead de tails a a 330 CHAPTER ELEVEN SYSTEM COMMUNICATION ssscccccsssssscccccsssscccccccssscscccseessees 331 IAN Shall POL COMMUICAGION sessin E R E N E a 331 LEL POTE a ena a a a e T 331 IT Tonnon MATOCUCTION ara a a a a a a a A 332 IES ISeries Pon Data lt I rans WSS Ore coil statins tacehn a a 333 ERA Series Port DING ON Cine Machinini ossido iea b
402. stance d It is specified by canned parameter V if it does not specify it then sets by data parameter P284 which is set the rigid tapping tool retraction by the bit 4 of parameter No 44 the override is enabled is specified retraction speed override by bit 3 of parameter No 45 is set the rigid tapping in feed tool retraction whether using the same time constant by bit 2 of parameter No 45 is set whether the feedrate selection and override cancellantion signal are enabled in the rigid tapping by bit 4 of No 45 When point Z has been reached the spindle is stopped then rotated in the reverse direction for retration Standard peck flexible tapping cycle It is the standard peck tapping cycle when bit 5 of parameter No 44 sets to 0 rapid traverse to point R after positioning along with the X and Y axes From point R cutting is performed with depth Q depth of cut for each cutting feed and then return to point R whether the overrider in rigid tapping is enabled which is set by bit 4 of parameter No 44 specify the retraction feedrate by bit 3 of parameter No 45 the distance d it is set by data parameter P284 from the point R to the end of cutting then perform the cutting again based upon the value of the cutting feedrate F whether using the same time constant in the in feed tool retraction which is set by bit 2 of parametr No 45 When point Z has been reached the spindle is stopped then rotated in the reverse direction
403. t Tool length compensation When the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is commanded a same block with the canned cycle add or cancel an offset value at the time of positioning to point R in the canned cycle modal if the tool compensation G43 G44 or G49 is placed at one block 81 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual separately the system is then performed the offset value addition or cancellation with real time Axis switching Cancel the canned cycle before the drilling axis can be changed Boring machining In a block that does not contain X Y Z or other axes is not performed Example M3 S100 Spindle rotation G90 G99 G85 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 and then return to the initial position plane G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle rotation stop M30 Restriction Fail to specify the G code From G00 to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G85 command the system t
404. t and dwell by modifying the K5 1 in the PLC address Note 1 The shifting is performed among the Auto MDI and DNC modes The cycle start is enabled before the current block is performed and the feed hold is disabled by the lt FEED HOLD gt button Note 2 Shift to editing mode in the Auto MDI and DNC modes The cycle start is disabled before the current block is performed and the feed hold is disabled by the lt FEED HOLD gt button Note 3 Shift to machine tool zero return single step manual and MPG modes in the Auto MDI and DNC modes The feed hold is disabled by the lt FEED HOLD gt button Note 4 In the cycle start mode when shifting among the Auto MDI and DNC modes or when the shifting is editing In the controllable panel mode Press the lt FEED HOLD gt button before performing the current block and the feed hold function is on the disabled state 209 O Z m gt O Z lt O 4 Cc m F m on gt om A Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 2 5 Overtravel Defense To avoid the machine damage due to the X axis Y axis and Z axis are exceeded the overtravel and the machine should be taken the overtravel defense measure 2 5 1 Hardware Overtravel Defense Separately install the stroke limit switch at the Max stroke with positive or negative along the X axis Y axis or Z axis when the overtrvel occurs the operation axis d
405. t its value Note 3 It is used for setting the tool setting prober diameter when the diameter calibration is executed B Measurement parameter inputs the operation steps 1 The selection of item it can be selected by moving the cursopr up down button 259 er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 2 Data input Whn the Auto tool measurement does not start in any operation mode input the data then the ENTER and the each data can be modified accordingly C Operation steps Step 1 Set each tool measurement parameter in turn Step 2 Shift to the Auto mode Step 3 Start the automatic tool setting main program by lt START gt softkey then operate the macro program measurement by lt CYCLE START gt again automatically specifiy the tool length and radius write in to the offset registered Workpiece origin setting along Z axis Notice Ensure that the current tool is already performed the automatic tool measurement before the Z axis workpiece origin is set otherwise the machining error may occur and the tool and equipment may be damaged as well the personnel safety A The selection of the coordinate system 1 Setting range G54 G59 G54 P1 P50 2 Data input When the automatic tool measurement does not start in any operation mode move the cursor to the coordinate system option and then input the data based upon the following formats a The integer of 54 59 b G54 G59
406. t the cutter compensation value based upon its diameter value 0 Set the cutter compensation value based upon its radius value Standard setting 1000 0100 System parameter number 0141 ENEE PPUT 1 The input and display of the data parameter are determined by bit parameter NO 0 2 INI 0 The input and display of the data parameter are metric system PUIT 361 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual G39 1 In the radius compensation the corner arc function is enabled 0 In the radius compensation the corner arc function is disabled CNI 1 Radius compensation performs the interference inspection 0 Radius compensation does not perform the interference inspection Standard setting 0110 0000 System parameter number 04 2 RD2 RD1 RD1 1 Set the tool retraction direction of G76 G87 Negative 0 Set the tool retraction direction of G76 G87 Positive RD2 1 Set the tool retraction axis of the G76 G87 The 2 axis 0 Set the tool retraction axis of the G76 G87 The 1 axis Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number a Ce se I J O7A 1 In the peck drilling G73 G83 the alarm will generate if the cutting value does not specify 0 In the peck drilling G73 G83 the alarm will not generate even if the cutting value does not
407. t value along the 1 axi 5229 G58 workpiece zero offset value along the 4 axis 5231 G59 workpiece zero offset value along the 1 axi 5234 G59 workpiece zero offset value along the 4 axis 7001 G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value along the 1 axis 153 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 7004 G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value along the 4 axis G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value along the 1 axis G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value along the 4 axis G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value along the 1 axis G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value along the 4 axis 4 Local variable The corresponding relationships between addresses and local variables are shown below Table 4 9 2 5 Argument Local variable Argument Add Local variable No Add No SINN TOA y ry O Q D gt Z Q Note 1 The assignment is performed by that the English letter adds the numerical value the rest of 20 letters can be assigned to argument other than the G L O N H and P Each letter only can be assigned once from A B C D to X Y Z and the assignment can be performed regardless of the alphabet sequence and the addresses without assignment can be omitted Note 2 There is not alternative other than to specify the G65 before using any argument 5 The precautions about the user macro program body 1 Input by keyboard Press the followed with the parameter w
408. tant of 100 JOG feed along each axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0157 The exponential acceleration deceleration time constant of JOG feed along each axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0158 The acceleration clamping constant of MPG 50 incomplete operation mode Setting range 0 1000 ms 0160 The 1 axis command frequency multiplication coefficient CMR Setting range 1 65536 0161 The 2 axis command _ frequency multiplication coefficient CMR Setting range 1 65536 0162 The 3 axis command _ frequency multiplication 1 coefficient CMR Setting range 1 65536 0163 The 4 axis command frequency multiplication coefficient CMR Setting range 1 65536 gt U v m z gt lt 0164 The 5 axis command frequency multiplication coefficient CMR Setting range 1 65536 384 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0165 The 1 axis command frequency division coefficient 1 CMD Setting range 1 65536 0166 The 2 axis command frequency division coefficient CMD Setting range 1 65536 0167 The 3 axis command frequency division coefficient CMD Setting range 1 65536 0168 The 4 axis command frequency division coefficient CMD Setting range 1 65536 0169 The 5 axis command frequency division coefficient CMD Setting range 1 65536 0170 The 1 axis manual position at the rapid traverse 5000 rate Setting range O 30000 0171 The 2 axis manual
409. tart position Linear Circular Programmed path S Intersection Tool center path Note Intersection is the position where offset paths of two successive blocks intersect Tool center path Intersection C Tool movement around the outside of an acute a lt 90 Tool path in the beginning of compensation has two types A and B which are selected by bit 0 127 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual of parameter No 40 Linear Linear _inear arc G42 G42 Programmed JNININNVYSDOdd SINN TOA Programmed path ex Programmed Tool center path l Neils Tool center path S S Programmed G41 5N path N N Less than 1 Fig 4 7 3 2 2 Tool movement in offset mode The invariable compensation plane is performed in the compensation mode otherwise the alarm may issue and the tool stops at the same time In the offset mode the movement of tool is as follows 128 Chapter F our Preparatory Function G Code a Tool movement around the inside of a corner a2180 Linear gt Linear Linear gt Arc Programmed fs L Toolcenter path Intersection Arc Linear c Intersection 3 When it is exceptional 1 There is no intersection Alarm amp stop When compensation value is large When compensation value is small Programmed path Arc gt Arc Programmed Tool center path Fig 4 7 3 3 Fig
410. te value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the positive boundary of the 3 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm gt U v m z gt lt 0072 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 4 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 374 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0073 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the positive boundary of the 4 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0074 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 5 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0075 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 1 9999 along the positive boundary of the 5 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0076 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 1 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0077 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the positive boundary of the 1 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0078 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the reverse boundary of the 2 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0079 The coordinate value of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 along the positive boundary of the 2 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0080 The coordi
411. ted 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 1 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 165 Or hd Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual When 3 FUP 2 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 2 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 9 Abbreviations of arithmetic and logic operation commands When a function is specified in a program the first two characters of the function name can be used to specify the function See the table 4 9 5 1 Example ROUND RO FIX FI 10 Priority of operations Function g 2 Operations such as multiplication and devision AND T O 8 Operations such as addition and subtraction OR XOR gt S Example 1 2 3 SIN 4 mi Z Q a S as A 1 12 and indicate the order of operations 11 Restriction uses the enclosed expressions When specifying the divisor 0 or TAN 90 in division operation system alarm is then issued 2 Branch and Repetition 1 Branch and Repetition In a program the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement Three types of branch and repetition operations are used Branch and repetition GOTO statement Unconditional branch IF statement Conditional branch IF THEN _ WHILE statement Repetition while 2 Unconditional branch gt GOTO statement Branch to the block marked with sequence number n A
412. ted Therefore the tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P4 P6 P7 The arc cutting of block N6 is ignored 138 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 10 Interference check Tool overcutting is called interference The interference can check the tool overcutting in advance If the interference is checked in the syntax inspection after loading the program the system will then alarm Whether the interference check is performed when the bit 6 of parameter No 41 is set the radius compensation The basis conditions of interference 1 The movement distance of the block for establishing the cutter compensation is less than tool radius 2 The tool path direction defers from the programmed path direction The angle of path between the 90 and 270 3 When the arc machining is performed the angle of its start and end of tool center path is great different to the one of the programmed path more than 180 Programmed path Tool center path 4 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Great different between two path directions 180 Fig 4 7 3 22 Tool center _ path Programmed path Great different between two path directions 180 Fig 4 7 3 23 11 Manual operation The manual operation in tool point radius compensation refer to the manual operation in the 139 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Volume Operation 12
413. tem debugging level the 4 level Terminal user and the 5 level Machining operation based upon the high to low The default is lowest leve when the machine s power is turned on Refer to the Fig 3 4 5 1 The 1 level 2 level The state parameter data parameter cutter compensation parameter and the transmission PLC ladder diagram etc of the CNC can be modified The 3 level The state parameter data parameter and cutter compensation data and pitch compensation etc of the CNC can be modified The 4 level The state parameter data parameter of partial CNC can be modified The 5 level Without password level It can be both modified the cutter compensation data macro program and performed the machine tool operation panel instead of altering the state parameter data parameter and pitch compensation data of the CNC SYSTEM PSW MACHINE Pw NEW O O O lt acan O aan O T Vc gt z O m DEBUG Psw sen Pow lt df gt sew Pd CT AGAIN AGAIN Logout END PATH 1 SETTING WORK DATA Fig 3 4 5 1 1 After entering this interface by lt MDI MODE gt position to the destination position by moving the cursor INPUT 2 Input the password of the corresponding level then press the m if it corrects the system will prompt Password Correct 3 Input the digits 0 6 or letters when the system passwords are modified then press the INPUT to confirm it 264
414. ter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G74 command the system then performs the G60 modal M code Spindle is rotated by miscellaneous function M code before specifying G74 If there is no specified the spindle rotation the system then adjusts as CW based upon the current spindle command speed automatically When the G74 code and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first positioning operation The system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When K is used to specify the repeated times the M code is executed for the 1 hole only instead fo performing the subsequent holes Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are performed followed with the program perform the above mentioned M code after executing the current statement S command Ifthe specified spindle speed exceeds the top spindle speed in tapping data parameter P257 the upper limit speed of spindle in tapping cycle the system then alarms the top speed level of the spindle in the rigid tapping is determined by P94 P296 F command If the specified F value exceeds the upper limit value of the cutting feedrate data parameter P96 sets the upper limit value of cutting feed it is subject to the upper limit value P command P is the modal code the least value of parameter is set by data parameter P281 and the most value is set by p282 Value P is less than the P281 paramete
415. ter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation Program restart The program restart function is disabled in tapping cycle Note When the machining such as the flexible tapping rigid tapping or peck tapping etc are performed it is necessary to firstly cancel the constant surface cutting feed by G97 otherwise the disorder gear or broken screw tap etc will occur 99 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 4 6 Compound Cycle G Code Compound comparison table G22 G38 Table 4 6 1 Drilling Operation at the Tool retraction Purpose Z direction bottom of a hole operation Z direction Cutting feed Rapid traverse Groove i milling of inner en eee ee ee ee in een ee ee ee circle along CW epee ee econ along CCW G25 Cutting feed Rapid traverse Fine milling cycle of full circle Ae eee Eon an ee ee ee ee along CCW ef eee along CW a ee ee eee rough milling along CCW rough milling along CW a ee ee rectangular groove along CCW Cutting feed Rapid traverse Fine milling cycle of the inner on ei eee Cutting feed Rapid traverse Fine milling cycle a ie ee ee ex rectangular CW Restriction SINN TOA y J O Q D gt Z Q The tool radius offset D will be ignored during the canned cycle position
416. ter number 0 117 CPCT CALT WEOE HLOE CLLE CBLS CBOL CBOL 1 Cutting feed mode Backward acceleration deceleration 0 Cutting feed mode Forward acceleration deceleration CBLS 1 The acceleration deceleration before the cutting feed S type 0 The acceleration deceleration before the cutting feed Linear type CLLE 1 The acceleration deceleration after the cutting feed Exponent type gt E v m z gt lt 1 The acceleration deceleration after the cutting feed Linear type HLOE 1 JOG operation selection Exponent type 0 JOG operation selection Linear type WLOE 1 MPG operation selection Exponent type 0 MPG operation selection Linear type CALT 1 Cutting feed acceleration clamping 0 Cutting feed acceleration releasing CPCT 1 Cutting feed controls the in position accuracy 0 Cutting feed does not control the in position accuracy Standard setting 1010 0001 System parameter number 011 8 RYES RBK RVIT RVIT 1 The next block is performed after the compensation is performed when the 353 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual reverse interval is more than the interval allowable tolerance D value 0 The next block is performed after the compensation does not perform when the reverse interval is more than the interval allowable tolerance D value 1 The cutting feed rapid
417. terpolation inside the plane is that its path is performed along with the specified rotation and radius or center in the specified plane Thanks to the recognized start and end can not fully affirmed the arc path and therefore it is necessary to offer gt Arc roataion direction G02 G03 gt The plane of arc interpolation G17 G18 G19 gt Center coordinate or radius is led out two code formats center coordinate J and K or radius R programming The interpolation calculation can be performed in the coordinate system only when the above mentioned 3 cases are fully affirmed The arc interpolation can be performed by following code and the tool can be operated along with the arc refer to the following figure Arc in the XY plane G02 R G17 XY Pi G03 J Arc in the ZX plane G02 R_ G18 X Z F G03 LK Arc in the YZ plane G02 R_ G19 YZ F_ Table 4 2 3 1 Specification of arc on XY plane ee Specification of arc on ZX Plane specification plane Specification of arc on YZ plane ai p oT 2 Revolving direction si Two axes of X Y or End position coordinate in G90 method P Z workpiece coordinate system End position Two axes of X Y or The coordinate for the end G91 method Z relative to the start 29 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual The vector from start to The position coordinate for Two axes of J
418. th treatment function 1 Perform the smooth treatment based upon the length 2 Perform the smooth treatment based upon the integrated relationships between length and angle 0410 Accuracy smooth balance coefficient 10 0000 Setting range 0 0000 10 0000 If you want to carry out the high accuracy control the setting value can only be set for the parameter accuracy smooth balance coefficient 410 this parameter can be controlled the machining level Total 11 levels 0 10 410 0 High accuracy control strictly control the in position accuracy regardless of the smooth it is enable to program for machining the meticulous edge type for example word 1 10 Return to the high speed accuracy contro The lower the level is the better the accuracy is the higher the lever is the better the smooth is gt U v m z gt lt Adjust this parameter to reach an ideal effect 0411 Spline shape control coefficient 10 0000 Setting range 0 0000 10 0000 0412 Fitting accuracy control for small line block 1 0000 Setting range 10 0000 50 0000 0413 Roundness smooth control coefficient n1 3 0000 Setting range 0 0000 50 0000 0414 Roundness smooth control coefficient n2 0 0000 Setting range 0 0000 50 0000 405 er Jd Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual The Max allowable error between the machine coordinate and absolute encoder position of each axis Setti
419. the F500 Data parameter P342 sets to 500 after touching the deceleration switch then slowly search the one turn Z pulse signal of servo with F40 Data parameter P99 sets to 40 after departing from the stopper lastly it immediately stops after gaining refer to the Fig 9 2 2 Stopper position Depart from the One turn signal Stop position E stopper position position F4000 Ny F50 F40 F0 Detect the Operate to the zero return stopper based upon high speed XK Stow Zero return stopper ll SAIN TOA O 2 L gt O Z Fig 9 2 2 9 3 Operation Steps for Mechanical Zero Return Specified by Program A G28 zero turn can be specified by program after bit 3 of parameter No 6 sets to 0 because the detection of stroke stopper is shared the same effect with the manual mechanical zero turn 9 4 Bus Servo Zero Return Function Setting There are three kinds of zero return methods when the system configures a bus servo which are separately common high speed and multi core absolute setting zero We will separately introduce the following setting methods 312 Chapter Nine Zero Return Operation 9 4 1 Common Zero Turn Set the bit parameter No 0 0 1 and No 5 4 0 the system is performed the zero return based upon the common one which can be selected the zero return method such as the one turn signal or one shot signal and this zero r
420. the MDI data input and operation can be performed in the MDI mode Refer to the Fig 3 2 4 X GOO F Y G17 5 Z G90 M 30 lt G94 T 2000 G54 H 2000 G21 D 2000 G40 649 ABSOLUTE G11 nee X 1 727 m T F G15 Y 47 897 m a M G50 Z ms Z 5 480 m P T G64 Q H G97 SPRM 6000 L D G13 SMAX 100020 DATA di 09 42 PATH 1 al ee gt a a Fig 3 2 4 223 ll SINNIOA O U m gt O Z ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 4 Program CUR NXT display Enter the CUR NXT display page by the CUR NXT softkey the code value is displayed for the being performed block and the next block to be performed program Refer to the Fig 3 2 5 CURRENT NEXT X X Y Y Z Z pel a es amp al as Sy 190 all fy ie a 2s amp al 2s je ae ta b ay 9 09 58 PATH 1 PRG MDI CUR MOD DIR Fig 3 2 5 5 Program list display Enter the program System list display interface by LIST softkey the display content is shown below Refer to the Fig 3 2 6 a Program numbers the stored program number include the subprogram the Max program numbers to be registered b Memory capacity The occupied memory capacity program storage total capacity for the stored programs c Program list Display the program number of the registered program in tu
421. the above mentioned table are differ from the different mechanical drivings refer to the User Manual from the machine tool manufactory 3 When the bit O of parameter No 56 sets to 1 the MPG movement value selects the absolute operation The speed for rotating the MPG can not more than the 5r s if does the graduation and movement value may inconsistent 6 2 Control for MPG Interruption Operation 6 2 1 Operation of MPG Interruption The operation during the MPG can be overlapped the automatic movement in the Auto operation mode 296 Chapter Six MPG Operation Cutter position in Cutter position after the Auto mode MPG interruption Programming cutting depth The cutting depth is the result of MPG interruption Fig 6 2 1 1 The operations are shown below 1 Shift to MPG mode after dwelling during the operation in the Auto mode 2 Move the tool postion by MPG for example performing the up down movement along Z axis or the translation along X or Y axis as will the rotation along A axis can be reached to the destination of the coordinate system modification 3 Start it after shifting to the Auto mode and workpiece coordinate holds invariable till to coordinate recovers the actual value after the mechanical zero return is performed Note Set whether using the MPG Single step interruption function by bit 3 of parameter No 56 When a program is performed in the Auto MDI or DNC mode shift to the MPG mode after fe
422. the canned cycle is performed Note 3 In the single mode the canned cycle mostly uses 3 sections machining methods positioning R plane gt Initial plane Note 4 In the canned cycle when the bit 1 of parameter No 36 is set to 1 the hole machining data and the hole position data are eliminated in the REST or ESP The examples of data hold and clean in the above mentioned are shown below Table 4 4 2 Data Explanation Sequence ee specification 64 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G81 and Z R F can be omitted because the hole machining method specified in hole is identical with the hole machining data The position movement Y of a hole is machined once by G81 method It is only moved along with X axis relative to the hole Machining is performed by G82 and the hole machining data is performed by the Z R and F specified in and the P specified in Do not perform the hole machining Cancel the overall hole machining data Z and R should be specified again because the overall data are cancelled in G85X Z RP EEO F can be omitted because it is same with the specified one in i ry O Q D gt Z Q P is unavaliable in this block is only saved For it is the hole machining with the different Z values and the hole position is only enabled moved along with X axis The specified Z in the R P in and the F in are regarded as the hole machining data
423. the cursor left or right 3 You can find the destination address by moving the cursor or input the desired search parameter address then control the button 4 FLUCTUATION interface can be displayed the velocity acceleration and addition acceleration for debugging and then find the optimized adapted parameter of the drive and motor ll SAINN TOA O 2 L gt O Z 3 7 Alarm Display The alarm information displays at the lower left corner on the screen when the system alarm ALARM issues In this case the display page appear by sua There are four display interfaces in this page ALARM L USER HISTORY RECORD which can be checked Refer to the Fig 3 7 1 Fig 3 7 4 by its corresponding softkey Alternatively whether shifting to the alarm interface when bit 6 of parameter No 24 alarm occurs 1 Alarm interface Enter the alarm interface by ALARM softkey in lt ALARM gt interface refer to the Fig 3 7 1 212 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting NO ALARM PATH 1 MDI pe _ ER sto ee Fig 3 7 1 Display the detailed content of the current P S alarm number on the alarm display screen Refer to the appendix two for the detailed alarm content 2 User interface Enter the external alarm interface by USER softkey in lt ALARM gt interface refer to the Fig 3 7 2 gs m Jc A om o NOTHING PATH 1 ave E crow ewe
424. the multi block to be cleared for example the Y100 0 Refer to the Fig DELETE 10 1 1 8 1 and then press the ee The program between the cursor and address mark can be deleted Note 1 If the N sequence number lies among the blocks the system regards that it is the code word treatement 10 1 2 Deletion of Single Block When some one program in the memory should be deleted refer to the following steps a Select lt EDIT gt operation method b Enter the program display page there are two methods to delete the program 1 Input the address o input the program name input the numerical button o EA J or In this case the O0002 program is regarded as an example DELETE the program in the memory is deleted by l 2 Select the LIST interface in program interface select the program name to be deleted by ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z DELETE cursor the system state column prompts Confirm deleting the current file by peure and then INPUT the state column shows Deletion Successful by wer again lastly the selected program by cursor can be deleted Note 1 If only one program file is performed under the editing mode program list interface the program name will become O00001 and the program content is deleted regardless of the program name is 000001 or not when the multiple program files are performed the program content and name of O00001 will be deleted together 324 Chapter
425. then measure the macro program by lt CYCLE START gt button the system will automatically set the center coordinate to the selected workpiece coordinate system after the measurement is performed 3 4 3 2 Introduction and Operation Explanation of Tool setting Function Interface display and function introduction 297 ll SAIN TOA O i m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual MACHINE s 4 7183 m Y OOOO mm Z OOOO mm ABSOLUTE X 29 8483 mh Y 61 5870 m 0080 G54 x 34 5667 mm Y 61 5870 nm Z OOOO mm 10 46 21 PATH 1 WORK WEAS DESETI MEASURE START RETURN Fig 3 4 3 2 1 TOOL MEASURE MEASUREMENT MODE TOOL NO T OFFSET L NO t OFFSET D NO D TOOL DIA S TOOL LENGTH 2 MEASURE DEPTH Zz EXCEED DIS R amp Q WEAROUT OFT NO M WEAROUT ALLOW E TOOL DIA TRIM I Z AXIS ORIGIN SET COORD SYS SELECT 654 IEUTAATA Tool setting function contains of the Auto tool length measurement and Z axis workpiece origin setting A Tool measurement Auto tool length measurement is performed the measurement to the different tool length and dirameter by the tool setter which is installed on the workpiece The length and diameter of each tool is automatically set to the specified tool offset register so that the tool can be correctly ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z machined
426. ting 0 Macro program common variables 100 199 will not be cleared after resetting CLV 1 Macro program local variables 1 50 will be cleared after resetting 0 Macro program local variables 1 50 will not be cleared after resetting Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number liad heal kaad EADS DAZ EAP CADO LADO LAD3 are the binary combination parameter Use the No 0 ladder digram when it is set to 0 Use the No 0 15 ladder diagrams when it set to 1 15 PLCV 1 Read and display the PLC software version number 0 Do not read and display the PLC software version number Standard setting 1000 0001 System parameter number 01514 OPRG Bere 1 One touch input output is enabled to the component program when performing the debugging or its above authority 0 One touch input output is disabled to the component program when performing the debugging or its above authority Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 015 5 CANT CANT 1 Single machining time is automatically cleared gt E v m z gt lt 0 Single machining time is not automatically cleared Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number fic A CC i Cl HPF 1 MPG movement amount selects the absolutely operation 0 MPG movement amount does not select the absolutely operation HISR 1 Use the MPG single step interruption fun
427. ting the Ethernet Bus Communication Method or Pulse Communication Method Method one INININNVYDOdd SINN TOA SINN IOA y J O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 1 Enter the lt MDI gt operation method SETTING then enter the password page by PASSWORD input the 2 Enter the lt SET gt page by corresponding level password refer to the Section 3 4 5 Setting and Modification of Password Authorization Book II OPERATION in this manual 3 Set the parameter switch to 1 in the lt SETTING gt interface SYSTEM 4 Enter into to the page to perform the seting together by the sr then the Bus Configuration Refer to the Fig 1 4 1 1 Move the cursor to the item of the Bus or not 2 Input the 1 select the Bus or input the 01 select the pulse BUS OR NOT 1 AXIS EX CARD ENCODER TYPE GRATING TYPE MAX ERROR SP EX CARD AXIS SET ZERO Ne LIMIT Po LIMIT GRATI Ts 0 NOTE NO 1 YES DATA OO r E 14 27 29 ET 1 SOFFSET HIPARA _EMACR o PITCH Bus CONF co Fig 1 4 1 Mehtod 2 The drive transmission method is Bus by directly setting the bit parameter No 0 0 1 it is the pulse by setting the No 0 0 0 Note It is necessary to cut off the overall powers before modifying this parameter turn on the power again after performing it Chapter Two Programming
428. tion Manual G sf n code S ee T evano CCW Counter Clockwise G11 Programmable data input G11 F mode cancel GI2X YZ LJK Stored stroke check G12 F ig function ON G13 Stored stroke check G13 F function OFF G15 Polar coordinate code G15 F 11 cancel G17 PS XY plane selection Write in the block it is used in the both arc G18 02 ZX plane selection interpolation and cutter compensation Co S72 D 2a Do FD D C lt azo O O O TA O D Z 235 Q D EEO y J O Q D gt Z Q G19 Specify this command in a single block YZ plane selection Data input in inch Data input in metric F n n as G22X YZRILWQVODF_K Fc Groove rough mill inner circle CCW YZRIELLWQVD F_ Groove rough mill inner G23 F circle CW G24X YZRIJDFK Finish mill circular inner G24 i aia F the whole circle CCW G25 G25 X_Y ZR1IJDF K_ z Finish mill circular inner the whole circle CW G26X YZRIJDFK Finish mill circular of G26 ee F excircle CCW T G27 Reference position return G27 XYZ check Ea T Reference position return 22 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Group Code form Function code JOU JO p jqeu pow Aoeinooe ubiuU A I90 9A YB1H Q G Q9 OO Q9 N N N 4 4 TI TI TI TI 4 G29 Return from the reference G29 position 2 3 and the 4 reference position return G30Pn G30 7 G31 G31 Skip function G32 X_Y ZR1IJDF K_ Finish mill circula
429. tion between N3 and N6 command along is as right figure shown Z axis N1 Compensation beginning Fig 4 7 3 29 142 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code 4 7 4 Corner Offset Arc Interpolation G39 Format G39 Function By specifying G39 in offset mode during cutter compensation corner offset circular arc compensation can be performed The radius of corner compensation equals to the compensation value Whether the corner arc in the radius compensation is enabled by setting the bit 5 of parameter No 41 Explanation 1 When the G39 code is specified corner arc interpolation in which the radius equals to the compensation value can be performed 2 G41 or G42 preceding the code determines whether the arc is CW or CCW G39 is one shot G code 3 When G39 is programmed the arc at the corner is formed so that the vector at the end point of the arc is perpendicular to the start point of the next block Refer to the following SINN TOA figure n J O Q D gt Z Q In offset mode N1 X10 N2 G39 N3 Y 10 Block N1 Block N2 Tool center path Programmed Offset vector path Block N3 Fig 4 7 4 1 G39 4 7 5 Tool Compensation Value Entering Compensation Number From Program G10 Format G10 L10 P_R_ Geometric compensation value of H code G10 L12 P_R_ Geometric compensation value of D code G10 L11 P_R_ Wear compensation value of H code G10 L13 P_R_ Wear compensation va
430. tions of G98 or G99 Code path G37 Fine milling cycle G38 Fine milling cycle outside the rectangle CCW outside the rectangle CW L gt L D Cutter 2 A center path Cutter center patl Rectangular groove boundary Rectangular groove boundary Fig 4 6 6 1 Explanation The transition arc is inconsistent with the interpolation direction of the fine milling arc when the finish milling is performed outside the rectangle The interpolation direction in the code explanation is the one of the fine milling arc For example Fine milling outside the rectangle is performed by canned cycle G37 code G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G37 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 D1 F800 Perform the fine milling outside the 112 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code rectangle at the bottom of a hole by canned cycle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Canecl the canned cycle return from the point R M30 Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit 0 of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G37 G38 command the system then executes G60 modal Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command positioning tool radius offset is ignored call the specified cutter compensation by program in the procedure of in feed 4 6 Canned Cycle Cancel G80 Code format G80 SINN 1OA Function Canned cycle canel i ry
431. tively performed If the last block of the subprogram is ended using the M02 or MO3 code the function is same as the M99 return to the main program and then call the next block of the subprogram to be consecutively performed When the end of the main program is M99 the program is repeatedly performed Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram M98 P40000 SINN 1IOA Quadruple nesting J O Q D gt Z Q First nesting Second nesting Third nesting Fig 3 2 2 Quadruple subprogram nesting One subprogram calling code can be consecutively and repeatedly called the same subprogram and up to 9999 times can be repeatedly called 3 2 1 Subprogram Compiling Compile a subprogram based upon the following format o D00000 Subprogram No Aidi Subprogram M99 Subprogram end Fig 3 2 1 1 Write the subprogram No following the address O at the beginning of the subprogram the subprogram at last is M99 code M99 compiling formate is as the above mentioned figure 19 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 3 2 2 Subprogram Calling The subprogram is performed by main program or calling the code The subprogram calling code formate is as follows M98 P eed LOCOCO se Repeat the calling times The called subprogram series No Fig 3 2 2 1 e f the repeated times are omitted the repeat
432. ton on the file menu or the F button on tool bar refer to the Fig 11 1 4 1 Further edit the program file to the series port communication software 4 000055 Communicator File Edit Series Port Operation View Language Help iNew Open qSave raste Print Q About System GSK 218M v Tn Lap fs Port COM1 GSN Dj DNC Communic ER Send File pmi Receive File ay Set Port Baud 38400 A 00001 Tool Path Name G90G40G17G80G49G0G54 20000M3 X9 034Y 28 627 2710 2 13 773 G12Z 18 773F1500 X68 7642 18 817F3000 X8 4922 18 87 X8 2222 18 933 X7 9512 19 002 X7 383Y 28 6052 19 071 X6 48Y 28 5552 19 185 X6 069Y 28 5272 19 238 X6 8772 18 929 x7 4Z 18 735 X7 9062 18 561 8 1712 18 476 X8 437Z 18 395 X68 7042 18 324 X8 9732 18 261 9 2442 18 205 9 5182 18 162 9 7952 18 133 10 0732 18 123 X10 3512 18 131 10 6282 18 166 X10 9032 18 225 11 1712 18 306 Ready HUM gt ba 7 m z gt x lt lt Fig 11 1 4 1 I D IHC Communic 4 DNC transmission The data delivers by clicking the on tool bar or the DNC transmission on the Transmission mode drop down menu When the system I O channel sets to 0 PC directly delivers with PC common use method in this case the DNC transmission dialog frame displays the state of file transmission which includes the delivered file name delivered byte line number and the transmission time and speed type second refer to the Fig 11 1 4 2 When t
433. tool damage and personal injury 7 9 Dry Run The program can be inspected by Dry run before the program is machined generally it is used AUTO matching with the M S T Lock or Machine Lock Enter the Auto operation mode by and amp wp zi The indicator ON on the button means the machine enters the dry run then press the state In the rapid feed the program speed dry run speed x rapid feedrate In the cutting feed the program speed dry run speed x cutting feedrate Note 1 Dry run speed is set by data parameter P86 Note 2 Whether the dry run is enabled is set by bit 5 of parameter No 12 during tapping Note 3 Whether the dry run is enabled is set by bit 6 of parameter No 12 when the cutting feed is performed Note 4 Whether the dry run is enabled is set by bit 7 of parameter No 12 in the rapid positioning 7 6 Single Block Operation ll SAIN TOA O 2 L gt O Z If you want to check the operation circumstance of the single bock the Program single block operation can be selected D Press the SINGIE button The indicator ON on the button means that the single operation state is already performed in Auto DNC or MDI mode When the single block is operated the system stops operation after performing one block and then continue performing the next block by MG ESTAR till the program operation is completed Note During the G28 also the single block can be
434. trols by selecting the analog value the spindle then can be performed the trimming In the Auto mode change the spindle speed by adjusting the spindle override based upon h Tro h F 5 the Ea ees Gee and the spindle override can be carried out 50 120 real time DC adjustments total 8 levels gt z am m 2 h S OVERRIDE The revolving override increases one level by pressing once each level is 10 it will not increase any more till to 120 th SANE once each level is 10 the The revolving override decreases one level by pressing spindle speed stops till to 50 GSK218MC H V CNC System can be changed the spindle speed by adjusting the spindle override by spindle override wave band switch and the spindle override can be carried out the feed override can be carried out 50 120 real time adjustments total 8 level The actual speed of spindle program command speed x spindle override The top spindle speed is determined by data parameter P258 It will be rotated based upon this speed if it exceeds this numerical value 304 Chapter Seven Automatic Operation 7 11 Background Editing in Auto Mode System supports the background editing function during the machining procedure In the Auto mode enter the program display interface in lt PROGRAM gt during the program operation and then press the PROGRAM J softkey then enter the background editing interface refer to the Fig 7 11 1 G92 X0 YO
435. ttom of the hole then return to the point R X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 dwell for 1s at thebottom of the hole then return to the point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 dwell for 1s at thebottom of the hole then return to the point R G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 1 dwell for 1s at thebottom of the hole then return to the initial position plane G80 Canned cycle cancellation G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Reference position return M5 Spindle rotation stop M30 Restriction Fail to specify the G code From GOO to G03 G60 are the modal codes bit O of parameter No 48 is set to 1 of group 01 in a same block when using G81 command otherwise the G60 is replaced by G82 Cutter compensation In this canned cycle command cutter compensation is ignored due to the command function is regardless of the cutter compensation SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 4 4 4 Peck Drilling Cycle G83 Code format G83 X_ Y Z RQF _ K_ Function This cycle performs peck drilling It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing shavings from the hole Explanations X_Y_ Hole position data Z Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute
436. tusets aa teatnejetaaatcuasucdhae tare uc a teeutendenetcunaaataette 189 VOLUME TWO OPERATION cssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssee 191 CHAPTERONE OPERATION PANEL sssiscssccecsssicvessccsecessescshocccacansevecechocevesasosvessshecovssaseesesecsecese 193 ki PanelclassiicaloNizasimeaan a aa aa dE aseenedhuaes 193 1 2 Panel F ncton Explanatl ON onanie oars a a Ea AN 196 baaie EODD P A ea en e A A NA A ee ee 196 Ne Edin K Cy OO ARAL ccc oaks a i a a e a fade ad bales tas teens teseateatiaes 197 1 2 3 Introduction of Screen Operation Buttons sc rscsecds inci iates ce deis coweispeetardcnentevtncectadiee tes hotest eeeem ian 199 k24 AGSKZESMC Machine Tool Control ATCA nesei aea a a vette macros 200 1 2 5 GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V Machine Tool Control Area cccecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 203 1 2 6 GSK218MC U1 Machine Tool Control Area neeeneeennneneseenesenennnrrrrerrererrrrrrrrrerererrereereereeeens 204 CHAPTER TWO SYSTEM ON OFF amp SAFETY OPERATION 0 cccsssssscccccsssssccceeees 207 ZN V ONTON eo a A A E A E 207 ZZ EN S OG EEEE O E E E A A A A A E AE E 207 2 OEV ONO O O E E NTN 208 ZAD Re CUNT OPERO ana ets esi a e r e 208 S E Pe a O A a A 208 Do Peca AOU eeen nena E E ee ee een ee eee ee eee 209 2A CVCE Slaltc FECA THONG means enana a OA 209 29 OvermravelDE eN S En A E A A 210 Zul Hardware Oy citravel Deren Er kanio E A toe 210 232 S
437. ual Interruption in Section 6 2 of the OPERATION MANUAL Shift to MPG mode after dwells and then the manual intervention function is performed refer to the Manual Intervention Function in Section 4 1 4 of the OPERATION MANUAL In the Auto MDI or DNC mode when the program is directly shifted to the single step MPG Manual Zero return mode during the operation and the program is then stopped after decelerates 309 O U m gt O Z lt O m er JJJ Sy j GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual ll SAIN IOA O U m gt O Z 310 Chapter Nine Zero Return Operation CHAPTER NINE ZERO RETURN OPERATION 9 1 Concept of Machine Tool Zero Mechanical Zero The machine tool coordinate system is the inherent one for a machine its origin is called the mechanical zero or machine tool zero also it regards as Reference Point in this Manual which described the mechanical origin by machine tool manufacturer usually it installs at the top traversal along X Y Z as the 4 and 5 axes positively The mechanical zero point does not execute when the CNC equipment is power on it is better to perform the Auto or Manual mechanical zero return 9 2 Operation Steps for Pulse Servo Mechanical Zero Return e MACHINE 1 Enter the mechanical zero return operation method by ZRO in this case the Mechanical zero return displays at the right corcer on LCD screen ll S
438. uch as the flexible tapping rigid tapping or peck tapping etc are performed it is necessary to firstly cancel the constant surface cutting feed by G97 otherwise the disorder gear or broken screw tap etc will occur 4 5 3 Peck Tapping Chip removal Cycle Code format G84 or G74 X YZRPQFK Function In the peck tapping cutting is performed for several times until the bottom of the hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ Incremental programming means the distance from the specified point R to the bottom of the hole absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value at the bottom of the hole R_ Incremental programming means the distance from the initial point plane to the point R absolute programming means the absolute coordinate value of point R P_ The dwell time at the bottom of a hole or at point R when retracting Q_ The cutting depth of cutting feed each time F_ Cutting feedrate V_ Retraction distance d if it does not specify which is set by parameter P284 K_ Repeated times If required 96 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code G74 G84 G98 G74 G84 G99 D Retraction distance D Retraction distance High velocity peck tapping High velocity peck tapping Initial point plane O ad Point R t G gt 0 Point R position plane G74 G84 G98 G74 G84 G99 d Cutting start distance d Cutting start distance i Standard pe
439. ue by the end of axis movement and the end position is concerned with the concept of the coordinate system refer to the Sections 2 4 1 2 4 4 The incremental value code is directly programmed by the relative movement value of the axis The incremental value is regardless of its coordinate system it only needs to be offered the movement direction and distance that of the end position relative to the start one The absolute value code and the increment one are separately used by G90 and G91 30 Se olan 40 100 Fig 4 2 4 1 34 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code The movement from start to end in the Fig 4 2 4 1 is programmed by absolute G90 and increment G91 are shown below G90 GO X40 Y70 or G91 GO X 60 Y40 The above mentioned methods can be performed the same operation User can use it flexibly based upon the requirements Explanations gt Parameter without code can be written to the block along with other codes gt G90 and G91 that are the modal values are shared with a same group that is the G90 mode is the default before the G91 does not specify and the G91 is enabled unitl the G90 mode is specified System parameter Setting the bit 4 of parameter No 31 can be specified whether the default positioning parameter is G90 When the parameter is 0 or G91 When the parameter is 1 mode when starting up SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q 4 2 5 Dwell G04 Format G04
440. unidirectional position G code does not set to modal code Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 049 RPST RPST 1 Z axis moves with the G01 mode during the restart of program 0 Z axis moves at the dry run speed with the GOO mode during the restart of program Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 50 SIM ew REE REL 1 The relative display setting of the index worktable Within 360 0 The relative display setting of the index worktable Without 360 G90 1 Index command Absolute command 0 Index command G90 G91 command 1 The alarm occurs when the index code and other controllable axis codes Re are share with a same block 0 The alarm does not occur when the index code and other controllable axis codes are share with a same block Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number 015 1 MDLY SBM SBM 1 The single block can be used in the macro program command statement 0 The single block can not be used in the macro program command statement MDLY 1 Without delay in the macro program command statement 1 Delays in the macro program command statement Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 052 eee eo CCV 1 Macro program common variables 100 199 will be cleared after Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List reset
441. urrent selected axis can be recovered to the servo drive XX axis number For example the file name is SP01 txt if the X axis is backup SAVE 6 Servo saves the updated parameter by and the state column displays Successful for drive parameter save 7 Close the parameter switch after the overall parameters setting are completed 3 3 5 3 Servo Debugging Tool STT In order to guarantee that the servo debugging function is really reacted the servo capacity it is better to cancel the gear ratio at the drive side and each compensation Including the pitch error compensation and reverse interval compensation at the system side 3 3 5 3 1 Interface Composition Enter to the servo debugging tool interface by HSTT The content of this interface is as the Fig 3 3 5 3 1 3 3 5 3 2 ll SINN TOA AXIS EVET SI EE O U m 5 O Z x Y Z STEP Press up down key to select axis to be adjusted Press MOVE or MOVE check rigid levels if MT abnormal press lt INPUT gt If MT run stably press Dir Key to add rigid level till MT abnormal 11 42 58 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 5 3 1 Rigid level interface 19809 1331 61 58 r0 V 000A DATA 240 Chapter Three Interface Display amp Data Modification amp Setting oTD R 0000 MAX DIS 0 0000 MIN DIS 0 0000 CIRCUL 0 SAMPLE ANALYSE Press lt 0R gt to select SAMPLE or ANALYSE 14 37 13
442. us in canned cycle The setting of data parameter Axle name address P175 179 j distance from the unprocess plane w ae cutting at the rapid traverse rate The setting of data parameter Axle name address P175 179 W gt 0 It should be exceeded the W p The first cutting distance of Z axis slot bottom position at the first direction from R plane in the canned and then directly machining cycle based upon its bottom The setting of data parameter Axle name address P175 179 Coordinate address along with X 99999 999 99999 999 999999999099909 Cm 999999999099999 com gt rr 0 9999 999 059999 999 S Dwell time specification 17 SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Resolution range range Function meaning The setting cli data parameter Axle name address P175 179 Coordinate address along with Y 99999 999 99999 999 3989999099099909 Cm coe swe seee 29 com gt r The setting of data parameter P1 75 179 Coordinate address along with Z 99999 999 99999 999 mm direction It is the overall restriction values of CNC equipment in table 3 1 3 1 regardless of the one of the Axle name address machine tool And therefore it is important to program based upon the comprehension of the programming limit for referring this manual and the one of the machine tool manufacturer Note The
443. ustom macro is specified Modify the program 0114 G39 format error Modify the program The value regarded as the variable can not be specified Alternatively the O 0115 N regarded as variable are specified in the user marco program Modify the program aac The left side of assignment statement is a variable whose an assignment is inhibited Modify the program This parameter does not support the G10 on line modification Alter the program The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit quintuple Modify the program same block with other M codes 0121 The machine tool coordinate and the encoder feedback value are exceed the setting value of the offset 0122 The nesting layers of the marco program calling are more than 5 modify the Zx 00 N 41 09 gt mi z x lt er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual The transmission and cycle statement can not be used in the MDI current end symbol Modify the program NC and user macro command statement are existed together Modify the program The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 99999 Or it cannot be found Modify the program 0129 An address of lt Argument assignment gt is incorrect Modify the program An axis control command was given by PLC to an axis controlled by CNC Or 0130 an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis contr
444. ut c Input the last character of the block to be cut d Press CUT softkey program is cut to the paste e Cursor moves to the position to be pasted the paste is then completed by pressing the PASTE softkey Note 1 If there are several same completed characters should be cut in program cut the program between the completed character and cursor character with the search sequence downward Note 2 If the cut method is performed by N sequence number in program the program of line is cut between the cursor start and N sequence number Note 3 When the program name shares a same block with the program content in the editing method program interface the character followed with the program name can be performed the copy operation for the system instead of cutting operation 326 Chapter Ten Edit Operation 10 1 7 Replacement of Block The operation steps of block replacement a Enter the program editing page Refer to the Fig 10 1 1 b Cursor moves to the character to be replaced c Input the replaced content d Press the REPLACEMENT softkey the system replaces the content positioned by cursor and the overall same contents in block as the one from input Note This operation is only performed for character instead of executing the integrated block 10 1 8 Rename of Program The current program name changes into another name a Select lt EDIT gt operation method b Enter the program display interface Cursor s
445. uto Operation 1 Program loading in Auto mode Q a Enter the Auto operation mode by joni PROGRAM b Enter the LIST Jpage display by ro find a destination program by moving the cursor c Confirm it by l 2 Program loading in Edit Mode D oi EDIT a Enter the editing operation mode by PROGRAM b Enter the LIST Jpage display by find a destination program by moving the cursor c 1 BERETTA o c Confirm it by Q AUTO d Enter the Auto operation mode by ll SAIN IOA O U m gt O Z 7 2 Start of Auto Operation After the desired program to be started is selected by the two methods in Section 7 1 the and then observe the program operation shifting to the lt POSITION gt lt MONITORING gt or lt FIGURE gt interfaces etc The program operation starts at the line where the cursor locates and therefore firstly check program operates in Auto mode by pressing the CYCLE 299 ll SAIN TOA O U m gt O Z Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual whether the cursor is on the desired line before pressing the D and confirm whether the modal value is correct If it starts from start line but the cursor does not locate at this line press the Ea then the 2 to carry out the automatic operation program from start line Note In the Auto mode the workpiece coordinate system and basis offset value can not be modified du
446. uxiliary Control in Single step Operation sseseesseeseeesssesrssssressssrsrsssserressserrrssssrreesssreressserressss 294 CHAPTER SIX MPG OPERATION sisccavessscceciccssccesteseicetccswestcaseteicxseccededeseseesvscauedsvaseacvevecncedsveeess 295 OI MPOFeE uon a a a a r ital he saa she elena 295 Gall Selector or Movement AMOUNT oele a cadence aed a a a 295 6 1 2 Selection of Movement Axisand Direction renani E E AEE 296 Glo MPO Feed Explanations seisseen iii i a AR EE E E E ees 296 6 2 Control for MPG Interruption Operation 0 cece nnn a a 296 6 2 1 Operation of MPG Inter p tO tiosscec svescvcsicaceodeetncpccascaeesaseteassbstsxeea ewes peareardositeap eee ai 296 6 2 2 Relationships Between MPG Interruption and Other Fucntions cccceeeeeseeeeeessessssesssssenees 298 6 3 Auxiliary Control During MPG Operation o oo cccccccccsssscccceeesseeeceeessseeeceeesseeecceessseeeeeeensaaeeeeens 298 64 Electric MPG Dive EUNCUOM trcicvsinchiuwhobsarasdeutadualteilnesate vents osaubobw hua sneheiatetsieabunseiiulasbauioncleilat sinker 298 CHAPTER SEVEN AUTOMATIC OPERATION ssssssecccccssssccceccccssssceccocosssssececosssssseeeosossse 299 fick Selection Of AUTO ODETA ON sis sseciseacecasicienevin casa A A T 299 2 Start Of AUlO Operationerna a EEE E OEE A OE A NN 299 Lo SOPO AUO OPEO cei haia E OEEO E AOE OE A 300 XII Llist Ey MIE TR NI Sacre sarpatrnctnosecig te oe oss assassin ae tus nares cesar a acca E SLO MAR aE
447. value by page up down button Move the compensation number position to be modified by cursor SEARCH Method 2 After the compensation number is input positioning performs by INPUT 3 Input the compensation value in any mode and then confirm it by ca or INPUT softkey 4 Input the compensation value in amy mode and then press INPUT or INPUT softkey the system will then automatically calculate the compensation value and display it Note 1 When the tool offset is changed the new offset value can be enabled only when the specified H or D code of compensation number shoul be performed Note 2 User can freely alter the tool compensation value during the program operation When however the modification should be completed before performing this tool compensation number if it can be immediately enabled during program operation Note 3 For example the length compensation value shold be added the relative coordinate value of the Z axis it is only need to be write the compensation value followed with the Z axis the system will then automatically overlapped For instance input the Z 10 the compensation value is regarded that the current relative coordinate value of Z axis adds 10 3 3 2 Display Modification and Setting of Parameter 3 3 2 1 Parameter Display Enter the parameter page display by 1 PARAMETER there are two sub interface within the parameter page BIT PARAMETER DATA PARAMETER which can be viewed or a
448. vement specified by an incremental value refer to the Fig 4 2 16 1 54 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code Input the skip signal f gt Actual movement a The movement without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 1 The next block is 1 axis movement specified by an incremental value The next block to G31 is 1 axis movement specified by an absolute value refer to the Fig 4 2 16 2 SINN TOA Y100 n J O Q D gt Z Q Input the skip signal G31 G90 X200 F100 gt X200 Actual movement The movement without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 2 The next block is 1 axis movement specified by an absolute value The next block to G31 is an absolute command for 2 axes refer to the 4 2 16 3 Input the skip signal 300 100 Actual movement __ The movement without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 3 The next block is an absolute value for 2 axes Note It can be set by the bit 6 of parameter No 02 SKIP signal it is regarded as the signal input when 0 is set to 1 and the 1 is set to 0 55 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 4 2 17 Inch Metric Conversion G20 G21 Code format G20 Inch input G21 Metric input Function Either inch or metric can be carried out the program input Explanations Change the unit of the following values after the inch metric is converted The feedrate position code workpie
449. veyor ON OFF M35 M36 Code M35 control the start of the helical chip removal conveyor M36 control the stop of the helical chip removal conveyor 5 1 11 Punching Water Valve ON OFF M26 M27 Code M26 is puncing water valve ON M27 is puncing water valve OFF 9 1 12 Spindle Blowing ON OFF M44 M45 Code M44 Spindle blowing contron ON M45 Spindle blowing contron OFF 5 1 13 Automatic Tool change Start End M50 M51 Code M50 Start the automatic tool change control M51 End the automatic tool change control 5 2 M Codes for Controlling Program The M codes for controlling the program are divided into main program control and macro program control Firstly perform the movement code and then perform the M code when the M codes for controlling program are shared the same block with the movement code Notice 1 MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 codes can not be specified together with other M codes otherwise the system alarm occurs When the above mentioned M codes are shared the same block with other codes except the M codes the other codes in the same block will firstly perform and then perform these M codes 2 These M codes include that the CNC conveys the M codes to the machine tool simultaneously the CNC can also performs the internal operation code for example the M code for the program prereading function is disabled Additional the CNC conveys only the M code to machine tool instead of executing the M co
450. when using this code Tool will never operate when X__ Y___ does not specify but the G40 Cutter compensation Left G41 1 GOO G01 G41 X__ Y__ D__ code locates at the end of block and forms a new vector vertical with the X Y directin tool moves to the point of new vector from the old one at the start Tool center path Programming Start path Fig 4 7 2 2 Using this code when old vector is regarded as 0 so that the tool enters to the cutter 12 SINN 1OA i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q SINN TOA y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual compensation state from the tool offset cancellation state In this case the offset value is specified by D code 2 G02 G03 G41 G02 G03 X_ Y__R_ New vectors can be carried out by the above mentioned programs which are located at the line between arc center and end viewing from the forward direction of the arc point at the left or right tool center moves along arc from the old vector point of arc to the new one However the premise is that the old vector has been performed correctly The offset vector points to the arc center or departs from the center from the start or end Tool center New vector New path vector X Y a X Y Programming path Tool center path Old vector Programming Old vector Start path Fig 4 7 2 3 Cutter compe
451. width increment of the Cutter diameter gt L gt 0 G22 G23 inner circle groove cycle inside the XY plane Cutter diameter gt L gt 0 it is the The cutting width increment of G33 G34 absolute value when in the in the specified plane negative Cutter radius lt L lt 99999999mm The distance between the G37 G38 it is the absolute value when in finish milling start and rectangle edge X the negative axis direction The setting of data parameter Miscellanous function output program P204 execution schedule subprogram call ee Parameter sequency number G10 on line modification O0 99999 Program name Chapter Three Component Program Configuration ee a 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 CA dwell time at the bottom of the hole Data parameters P281 282 in the canned cycle or the time at the point R when retracting The cutting detpth or the offset value at 99999 999 99999 999 mm the bottom of the hole in canned cycle Circular radius angle offset 99999999 99999999 mm value corner value 99999 999 99999 999 mm The R plane in the canned cycle The setting of data parameter P205 Spindle rotation specification _ eer O Multi gear spindle output The a 1 data parameter Tool function a The setting of data parameter Axle name address P175 179 SINN TOA ry O Q D gt Z Q The resolution range of the U is 22 U 2D 2 the smaller value in Corner arc radi
452. wing figure When the offset value of the tool path programming Fig A is set as negative value so that the tool movement path is as the Fig B similarly if the offset value of the tool path programming Fig B is set as negative value and then the tool movment path is as the Fig A Tool center path Programming Fig A path Fig B Fig 4 7 2 8 Generally the figure with the pointed angle is the most common However after the offset value is set to negative value the inner round of machining component can not be performed When an inner pointed angle of one angle is cut inser the sutiable radius arc at this position and then the cutting can be performed after the acr transition Whether it is the left compensation or the right is confirmed that the tool movement is left or right roleated to the workpiece it is regarded as the workpiece unmoved The system enters the 124 Chapter Four Preparatory Function G Code compensatin mode by G41 or G42 and cancels it by G40 The example of compensation program shows below The block 1 calls starting the compensation cancellation mode in the block becomes compensation mode by G41 At the end of this block tool center is vertical to the compensation direction of the next program path From P1 to P2 by tool radius The tool compensation value is specified by DO7 that is the compensation number is set to 7 and the G41 means the tool path path compensation left
453. x lt Setting range 0 9999 ms 0300 The linear acceleration deceleration time constant of 200 395 er Jd Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual the spindle and tapping axis the 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0302 The time constant both the spindle and tapping axis in tool retraction the 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0303 The time constant both the spindle and tapping axis 200 in tool retraction the 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0304 The time constant both the spindle and tapping axis in tool retraction the 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0310 It is regarded as the speed allowance rate q when 5 the spindle reaches to the command speed Setting range 0 1000 0311 Spindle fluctuation rate r without issuing the 5 detection alarm of the spindle speed alteration Setting range 0 1000 0312 Fluctuation amplitude i of the spindle speed without 10 the detection alarm of spindle speed alternation Setting range 0 9999 0313 Spindle speed fluctuation detection time p ms from 1000 the command speed change to the beginning Setting range 0 99999 0320 The clearance value of spindle in rigid tapping the 1 gear gt U v m z gt lt Setting range 0 99 9999 0321 The clearance value of spindle in rigid tapping the Le 396 Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 2 gear Setting ra
454. x lt 0 Do not automatically insert the sequence number SVCD 1 Use the bus servo card 0 Do not use the bus servo card MODE 1 High speed amp high accuracy mode it can not be modify the 15 0 and 17 0 but supporting the 4 axis 3 linkage 0 Common mode when the high speed amp high accuracy mode sets to the common one 15 0 sets to 1 by default Standard setting 1000 0001 System parameter number 0 0 1 RAS5 RAS4 RAS3 RAS2 RAS1 SPT SBUS RASA RASA 1 Use the absolute grating scale 0 Do not use the absolute grating scale SBUS 1 Spindle drive is bus control method 346 SPT RAS1 RAS2 RAS3 RAS4 RASS Appendix One GSK218MC Parameter List 0 Spindle drive is non bus control method 1 I O point control 0 Frequency conversion or others 1 Use the grating scale by setting the 1 axis 0 Do not use the grating scale by setting the 1 axis 1 Use the grating scale by setting the 2 axis 0 Do not use the grating scale by setting the 2 axis 1 Use the grating scale by setting the 3 axis 0 Do not use the grating scale by setting the 3 axis 1 Use the grating scale by setting the A axis 0 Use the grating scale by setting the 4 axis 1 Use the grating scale by setting the 5 axis 0 Do not use the grating scale by setting the 5 axis Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 0
455. xample G65 H26 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 101x 102 103 159 Or hd Sy E GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 13 Complex square root 4 j k G65 H27 P I Q J R K For example G65 H27 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 1027 1037 14 Sine 1 JeSIN K Unit G65 H31 P I Q J R K For example G65 H31 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 SIN 103 15 Cosine 1 JeCOS K Unit G65 H32 P I Q J R K For example G65 H32 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 COS 103 16 Tangent JeTAN K Unit G65 H33 P I Q J R K For example G65 H33 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 TAN 103 SINN TOA 17 Arc tangent ATAN K Unit G65 H34 P I Q J R K For example G65 H34 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 ATAN 102 103 y ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Note 1 The unit of angle variable is degree Note 2 In each operation when the necessary Q and R are not specified its value regards as zero to operate Note 3 trunc Rounding operation eject the decimal section 3 Branch command 1 Unconditional branch G65 H80 Pn n Sequence number For example G65 H80 P120 Trun to N120 block 2 Conditional branch 1 J EQ K G65 H81 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number For example G65 H81 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 102 turn to N1000 block when 101 102 program performes with sequentially 3 Conditional branch 2 J NE K
456. xceeds the value specified in the data parameter 214 An axis not included in the selected plane by using G1 7 G18 G19 was 0021 commanded in circular interpolation Modify the program oe In the circular interpolation neither R Specifying an arc radius nor J and K Specifying the distance from a start point to the center is specified 0023 In the arc interpolation J K and R are simultaneously specified Helical interpolation helical angle is set to 0 the system does not be treated 0024 Modify the program the line length of the file exceeds 1024 bytes G92 Modify the program r 0 0 NO oe In the plane selection command two or more axes on the same diretion are the program The tool length compensation number or the cutter compensation number 0 0 00 0030 specified by D H is excessive large Additionally the workpiece coordinate system number specified by P code is also too large Modify the program When G10 sets the offset amount workpiece coordinate system external 0031 workpiece coordinate system and additional workpiece coordinate system the specified P value is excessive big or does not be specified In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by system 0032 variables the offset amount was excessive or does not be specified Modify the program A intersection point can not be determined in a cutter compensation C or a chamfering Modify the
457. xt command N7 N8 N6 G91 X100 Y100 N7 G40 N8 X100 YO ick her path Fig 4 7 3 19 137 EEO i ry O Q 7 gt Z Q Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual 9 Corner movement When more than two vectors are produced at the end of a block the tool moves linearly from one vector to another This movement is called the corner movement If AVXSAV limit and AVYSAV limit the latter vector is ignored If these vectors do not coincide a movement is generated to turn around the corner which belongs to the previous block These motions are belonged to the ee block N6 thus the feedrate equals to o S that in block N6 If the block N6 is G00 Mode the tool is moved at the rapid traverse rate if the block N6 is G01 G02 and G03 modes the tool is moved U Pa based upon the cutting feedrate O lt fa O A I gt C S m O Fig 4 7 3 20 However if the path of the next block is semicular or more the above mentioned function is not performed and its reason is as follows N4 G41 G91 X150 Y200 N5 X150 Y200 N6 G02 J 600 Tool center path N7 G01 X150 Y 200 N8 G40 X150 Y 200 Programmed path Fig 4 7 3 21 If the vector is not ignored the tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P3 circular arc P4 P5 P6 P7 But if the distance between P2 and P3 is negligible the point P3 is then omit
458. y Press this key to start program Auto operation Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode Note When the symbol numbers at the beginning of a block is more than 1 that is the enabling skip function does not open the system then skips this block 202 Chapter One Operation Panel 1 2 5 GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V Machine Tool Control Area Fig 1 2 5 1 GSK218MC H Machine tool control area 1G Tusen mro funs fuso fioo DOOUNG Backes 0 001 0 019 0 1 pret _ eae e D e cn fb o 3 CW E TMAG CW IT CHANGER CCW STOP CW ants o o o 4 USERS USER4 USERS O a5 m on gt om Q Fig 1 2 5 2 GSK218MC V Machine tool control area The usages and function definitions of the basis buttons on the GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V machine tool control area are absolutely coincided with the GSK 218MC Here we just describe the new additional buttons 203 Or JJJ Sy J GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming amp Operation Manual Remark amp Operation To make the system ESP button entering the ESP Any mode state N axis selection Axis shifting for Manual mode single button multi axis mode and MPG mode Spindle speed adjustment The spindle speed analog Any mode value control method is enabled Spindle override switch Auto mode MDI mode Manual mode and DNC mode Feed override The adjustment of switch feedrate AA Mo 1 2 6 GSK218MC U1 Machine Tool
459. y either the SP function command is used again between the SP and SPEC or the SP is set before using the END2 1041 The horizontal breakover cable is parallel with the node network 1042 Fail to load the PLC system parameter file 422 eee Function command SFT exceeds the Max allowable use number Reduce the use amount
460. y the program 0199 Undefined macro command Modify the program In the rigid tap an S value is out of the range or is not specified The Max 0200 value for S value can be specified by parameter Change the setting in the parameter or modify the program 0201 In the rigid tapping no F value is specified Modify the program 0202 In the rigid tapping spindle distribution value is too large In the rigid tapping the position for a M code M29 or a S command in program is incorrect Modify the program 0204 M29 should be specified in the G80 modal Modify the program es Rigid tapping signal is not 1 when G84 or G74 is executed through the M NO OO code M29 is specified Check the ladder diagram to find the reason i 6 Appendix Two Alarm List 0206 Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode Correct the program a 0207 The specified distance was too short or too long in rigid tapping TS Po This command can not be performed in G10 modal it is better to cancel the E G10 modal firstly 0209 The scaling rotation polar coordinate modal does not support the program E restart 0210 The program restart file name is inconsistent Select the correct file name i a plane Modify the program kad a program m 2 pen earnen ora anropar system modification and cutter compensation 08 aaan a the program 027 Tre seaingroiatoni polar correo doss not suppor skip op

GSK218MC Series Machining CNC System Programming

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents